SlideShare a Scribd company logo
CourseLab 2.3 User Manual

COURSELAB 2.3 USER MANUAL .......................................................................................................................... 1 
1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................... 6 
    1.1. PREREQUISITES ................................................................................................................................................... 6 
    1.2. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................... 6 
2. COURSELAB OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 7 
    2.1. ABOUT COURSELAB ........................................................................................................................................... 7 
    2.2. COMPLIANCE TO STANDARDS ............................................................................................................................. 7 
3. E-LEARNING COURSE ........................................................................................................................................ 8 
    3.1. WHAT IS E-LEARNING COURSE? ......................................................................................................................... 8 
    3.2. E-LEARNING COURSE STRUCTURE: LEARNING MODULES, CHAPTERS ............................................................... 8 
       3.2.1. Learning Module........................................................................................................................................ 8 
       3.2.2. Folder......................................................................................................................................................... 9 
    3.3. LEARNING MODULE STRUCTURE: SLIDE, FRAME ............................................................................................... 9 
       3.3.1. Slide ........................................................................................................................................................... 9 
       3.3.2. Frame ....................................................................................................................................................... 10 
    3.4. SPECIAL SLIDES: TITLE-SLIDE, MASTER-SLIDE ................................................................................................ 10 
       3.4.1. Title-Slide ................................................................................................................................................. 10 
       3.4.2. Master-Slide ............................................................................................................................................. 10 
4. CREATING LEARNING COURSE – FROM CONCEPTION TO PUBLISHING ....................................... 11 
    4.1. COURSE SCENARIO. THINGS TO CONSIDER. ...................................................................................................... 11 
    4.2. CREATE NEW LEARNING COURSE .................................................................................................................... 12 
    4.3. EDITING MODULE ............................................................................................................................................. 13 
       4.3.1. Editing Module Design Settings ............................................................................................................... 13 
       4.3.2. Editing Title-Slide .................................................................................................................................... 16 
       4.3.3. Editing Master-Slide ................................................................................................................................ 16 
       4.3.4. Editing Slide ............................................................................................................................................. 17 
             4.3.4.1. Name of a Slide .................................................................................................................................................. 17 
             4.3.4.2. Slide ID .............................................................................................................................................................. 17 
             4.3.4.3. Select the Master-Slide for the Slide .................................................................................................................. 18 
             4.3.4.4. Slide Content ...................................................................................................................................................... 19 
             4.3.4.5. Slide Comments ................................................................................................................................................. 19 
             4.3.4.6. Slide Transition .................................................................................................................................................. 19 
       4.3.5. Create and remove Slides. Change the order of Slides ............................................................................ 20 
       4.3.6. Module and Slide Preview ....................................................................................................................... 20 
    4.4. ADD MODULES. CHANGE THE ORDER OF MODULES. ........................................................................................ 21 
    4.5. ADD FOLDERS .................................................................................................................................................. 21 
    4.7. PUBLISH COURSE .............................................................................................................................................. 22 
       4.7.1. Module runtime settings ........................................................................................................................... 23 
       4.7.2. Course runtime settings ........................................................................................................................... 25 
       4.7.3. Wizard “Course Publication” ................................................................................................................. 26 
5. OBJECTS ............................................................................................................................................................... 28 
    5.1. OBJECT AND OBJECT POSITIONING WITHIN A FRAME ........................................................................................ 28 
    5.2. TYPES OF OBJECTS: INTERNAL AND COMPLEX ................................................................................................. 28 
    5.3. INTERNAL OBJECTS .......................................................................................................................................... 29 
       5.3.1. Text Box ................................................................................................................................................... 29 
             5.3.1.1. Inserting Text Box .............................................................................................................................................. 29 
             5.3.1.2. Editing Text. Editing Modes .............................................................................................................................. 29 
             5.3.1.3. Insert a Table into Text....................................................................................................................................... 30 
             5.3.1.3. Insert a Picture into Text .................................................................................................................................... 32 
        5.3.2. Pictures .................................................................................................................................................... 32 
             5.3.2.1. Inserting Picture ................................................................................................................................................. 32 
5.3.2.2. Valid Graphic File Formats ........................................................................................................................... 32 
        5.3.2.3. Change the Size of Picture ................................................................................................................................. 34 
        5.3.2.4. Optimizing Pictures ............................................................................................................................................ 35 
   5.3.3. Section “Clip Art” ................................................................................................................................... 35 
5.4. AUTOSHAPES.................................................................................................................................................... 35 
5.5. COMPLEX OBJECTS ........................................................................................................................................... 36 
   5.5.1. External Elements .................................................................................................................................... 36 
        5.5.1.1. “External File” Object ........................................................................................................................................ 36 
        5.5.1.2. External URL ..................................................................................................................................................... 37 
        5.5.1.3. IFRAME ............................................................................................................................................................. 37 
           Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 39 
    5.5.2. Popup Windows ....................................................................................................................................... 39 
        5.5.2.1. “Relief” Popup Window ..................................................................................................................................... 39 
           Object Events ............................................................................................................................................................. 40 
        5.5.2.2. “Standard” Popup Window ................................................................................................................................ 41 
           Object Events ............................................................................................................................................................. 42 
    5.5.3. Balloons ................................................................................................................................................... 42 
        5.5.3.1. “Simple” Balloon ............................................................................................................................................... 42 
        5.5.3.2. “Standard” Balloon............................................................................................................................................. 43 
        5.5.3.3. “Convex” Balloon .............................................................................................................................................. 44 
        5.5.3.4. “Gradient” Balloon ............................................................................................................................................. 45 
        5.5.3.5. “Think” Balloon ................................................................................................................................................. 46 
    5.5.4. Design Elements....................................................................................................................................... 47 
        5.5.4.1. Gradient areas ..................................................................................................................................................... 47 
        5.5.4.2. Click Area .......................................................................................................................................................... 48 
           Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 48 
        5.5.4.3. Notifier ............................................................................................................................................................... 49 
    5.5.5. Title-Slide Objects.................................................................................................................................... 51 
        5.5.5.1. Start Module Button ........................................................................................................................................... 51 
        5.5.5.2. Title-Slide Popup................................................................................................................................................ 52 
    5.5.6. Rich Media objects ................................................................................................................................... 53 
        5.5.6.1. Flash-Movie ....................................................................................................................................................... 53 
           Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 54 
        5.5.6.2. Shockwave-movie .............................................................................................................................................. 54 
        5.5.6.3. Video Clip .......................................................................................................................................................... 55 
           Object Events ............................................................................................................................................................. 57 
           Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 58 
           Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 58 
        5.5.6.4. Java Applet ......................................................................................................................................................... 59 
    5.5.7. Navigation Objects................................................................................................................................... 61 
        5.5.7.1. Navigation Menu ................................................................................................................................................ 61 
           Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 62 
           Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 62 
        5.5.7.2. Current Position.................................................................................................................................................. 62 
           Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 63 
        5.5.7.3. “Contents” tab .................................................................................................................................................... 63 
           Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 66 
           Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 66 
        5.5.7.4. “Help” tab........................................................................................................................................................... 66 
           Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 68 
           Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 68 
        5.5.7.5. “Calculator” tab .................................................................................................................................................. 69 
           Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 71 
           Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 71 
        5.5.7.6. “Settings” tab...................................................................................................................................................... 71 
           Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 75 
           Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 75 
        5.5.7.7. “About” tab ........................................................................................................................................................ 75 
           Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 77 
           Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 78 
        5.5.7.8. “Next” Button ..................................................................................................................................................... 78 
           Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 79 
           Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 79 
        5.5.7.9. “Previous” Button............................................................................................................................................... 79 
           Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 80 
           Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 81 
        5.5.7.10. Slide Name ....................................................................................................................................................... 81 
           Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 81 
        5.5.7.11. “Sound” Button ................................................................................................................................................ 82 

                                                                                                                                                                                         2
Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 83 
       Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 83 
    5.5.7.12. “Close Module” Button .................................................................................................................................... 83 
    5.5.7.13. “Replay Slide” Button ...................................................................................................................................... 84 
       Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 85 
       Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 85 
    5.5.7.14. “Simple” Progress Bar ...................................................................................................................................... 85 
    5.5.7.15. “Extended” Progress Bar .................................................................................................................................. 87 
    5.5.7.16. “Help” Popup Window ..................................................................................................................................... 88 
       Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 90 
       Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 90 
    5.5.7.17. “Contents” Popup Window .............................................................................................................................. 91 
       Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 93 
       Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 93 
    5.5.7.18. Frame Navigator ............................................................................................................................................... 94 
    5.5.7.19. Comments Object ............................................................................................................................................. 95 
    5.5.7.20. Comments Tab Object ...................................................................................................................................... 96 
5.5.8. Characters ............................................................................................................................................... 98 
    5.5.8.1. “Agent” Character .............................................................................................................................................. 98 
    5.5.8.2. “Talking Head” Character ................................................................................................................................ 101 
5.5.9. Lists ........................................................................................................................................................ 106 
    5.5.9.1. Bulleted List ..................................................................................................................................................... 106 
       Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 111 
       Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 111 
       Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 112 
    5.5.9.2. “Simple” List .................................................................................................................................................... 112 
       Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 117 
       Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 117 
       Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 118 
    5.5.9.3. “Standard” List ................................................................................................................................................. 118 
       Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 121 
       Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 121 
       Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 122 
    5.5.9.4. “Standard” Block-List ...................................................................................................................................... 122 
    5.5.9.5. “Standard” List Item ......................................................................................................................................... 123 
    5.5.9.6. “Simple” List Item............................................................................................................................................ 123 
5.5.10. Text Boxes ............................................................................................................................................ 124 
    5.5.10.1. Shadow Text Box ........................................................................................................................................... 124 
    5.5.10.2. “Relief” Text Box ........................................................................................................................................... 127 
       Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 129 
       Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 129 
    5.5.10.3. “Simple” Text Box ......................................................................................................................................... 129 
       Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 131 
       Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 131 
5.5.11. Form Controls...................................................................................................................................... 132 
    5.5.11.1. Text Field ....................................................................................................................................................... 132 
       Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 133 
       Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 133 
       Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 133 
    5.5.11.2. Hidden Text Field ........................................................................................................................................... 134 
       Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 135 
       Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 135 
       Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 135 
    5.5.11.3. Text Area ........................................................................................................................................................ 136 
       Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 137 
       Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 138 
       Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 138 
    5.5.11.4. CheckBox ....................................................................................................................................................... 138 
       Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 139 
       Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 140 
       Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 140 
    5.5.11.5. Group of Radio Buttons.................................................................................................................................. 140 
       Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 142 
       Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 142 
       Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 142 
    5.5.11.6. Drop-down Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 142 
       Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 144 
       Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 144 
       Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 144 


                                                                                                                                                                                 3
5.5.11.7. Button ............................................................................................................................................................. 145 
        5.5.12. Simulations........................................................................................................................................... 146 
            5.5.12.1. “Task controller” object ................................................................................................................................. 146 
            5.5.12.2. “Test Structure” object ................................................................................................................................... 151 
            5.5.12.3. “Results by selections” object ........................................................................................................................ 152 
        5.5.13. Questions ............................................................................................................................................. 154 
            5.5.13.1. Object Single Choice Question....................................................................................................................... 154 
               Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 160 
               Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 161 
            5.5.13.2. Object “Multiple Select Question” ................................................................................................................. 162 
               Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 168 
               Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 169 
            5.5.13.3. Object “Ordered Items Question” ................................................................................................................... 170 
               Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 176 
               Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 177 
            5.5.13.4. Object “Numeric Fill-in-Blank Question” ...................................................................................................... 178 
               Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 184 
               Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 185 
            5.5.13.5. Object “Text Fill-in-Blank Question”............................................................................................................. 186 
            5.5.13.5. Object “Text Fill-in-Blank Question”............................................................................................................. 186 
               Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 192 
               Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 193 
            5.5.13.6. Object “Matching Pairs Question” ................................................................................................................. 194 
            5.5.13.6. Object “Matching Pairs Question” ................................................................................................................. 194 
               Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 200 
               Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 201 
        5.5.14. Tests ..................................................................................................................................................... 202 
            5.5.14.1. Test ................................................................................................................................................................. 202 
               Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 210 
               Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 211 
            5.5.14.2. Current Results ............................................................................................................................................... 212 
               Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 213 
               Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 213 
            5.5.14.3. Results by objectives ...................................................................................................................................... 214 
               Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 215 
    5.6. SCENARIOS ..................................................................................................................................................... 216 
    5.7. CURSORS ........................................................................................................................................................ 216 
6. HANDLING OBJECTS ...................................................................................................................................... 219 
    6.1. COMMON SETTINGS OF ALL OBJECTS. OBJECT ALLOCATION WITHIN A FRAME. .............................................. 219 
       6.1.1. Object’s background and border color. Opacity. .................................................................................. 219 
       6.1.2. Sizing and Scaling. ................................................................................................................................. 220 
       6.1.3. Rotating Object ...................................................................................................................................... 220 
       6.1.4. Object position within a Frame and permission to move object. ........................................................... 221 
       6.1.5. Modifying common settings for the group of the objects. ...................................................................... 222 
       6.1.6. Aligning Objects..................................................................................................................................... 222 
            6.1.7. Distributing Objects evenly ................................................................................................................................. 222 
            6.1.8. Changing Objects Z-Order .................................................................................................................................. 223 
    6.2. EFFECTS. CONTROLLING DISPLAY TIME. ......................................................................................................... 224 
       6.2.1. Objects display time. Timeline Panel. .................................................................................................... 224 
       6.2.2. Object entry and exit effects ................................................................................................................... 225 
    6.3. BINDING SOUNDS TO OBJECTS ........................................................................................................................ 226 
    6.4. OBJECT PROPERTIES ....................................................................................................................................... 227 
       6.4.1. Common Object Properties .................................................................................................................... 227 
       6.4.2. Specific Object Properties ..................................................................................................................... 228 
7. MULTIFRAME ANIMATION .......................................................................................................................... 229 
    7.1. USING FRAMES ............................................................................................................................................... 229 
    7.2. FRAME DISPLAY TIME ..................................................................................................................................... 229 
8. ACTIONS AND EVENTS .................................................................................................................................. 231 
    8.1. “EVENT – ACTION” MECHANISM .................................................................................................................... 231 
    8.2. EVENTS GENERATED BY THE COURSELAB PLAYER ........................................................................................ 231 
       8.2.1. Slide and Frame Events ......................................................................................................................... 231 
       8.2.2. Events common to all objects ................................................................................................................. 232 
    8.3. OBJECT CUSTOM EVENTS ............................................................................................................................... 233 

                                                                                                                                                                                             4
8.4. ACTIONS ......................................................................................................................................................... 233 
       8.4.1. Variables and object properties in action parameters ........................................................................... 233 
       8.4.2. Built-in actions ....................................................................................................................................... 233 
             8.4.2.1. Execution actions ............................................................................................................................................. 234 
                EXTERNAL URL ................................................................................................................................................... 234 
                RETURN ................................................................................................................................................................. 234 
                ROTATE - START .................................................................................................................................................. 234 
                ROTATE - STOP ..................................................................................................................................................... 234 
                CALL ....................................................................................................................................................................... 235 
                MOVE - START ...................................................................................................................................................... 235 
                MOVE - STOP......................................................................................................................................................... 236 
                SOUND.................................................................................................................................................................... 236 
                METHOD ................................................................................................................................................................ 237 
                NAVIGATION ........................................................................................................................................................ 237 
                GOTO ...................................................................................................................................................................... 237 
                DISPLAY ................................................................................................................................................................ 238 
                MSGBOX ................................................................................................................................................................ 238 
             8.4.2.2. Service Actions ................................................................................................................................................ 238 
                IF ... ELSE ............................................................................................................................................................... 238 
                DELAY .................................................................................................................................................................... 239 
                VARIABLE ............................................................................................................................................................. 239 
                CHECKHIT ............................................................................................................................................................. 239 
                SEQUENTIALLY ................................................................................................................................................... 240 
                TIMER ..................................................................................................................................................................... 240 
                FOR ......................................................................................................................................................................... 240 
             8.4.2.3. Using JavaScript ............................................................................................................................................... 240 
                8.4.2.3.1. Action JAVASCRIPT .............................................................................................................................. 240 
                8.4.2.3.2. Including JavaScript in module.js files..................................................................................................... 240 
             8.4.2.4. Actions with scores and statuses ...................................................................................................................... 240 
                SET SCORE ............................................................................................................................................................ 240 
                SET COMPLETION STATUS ................................................................................................................................ 241 
                SET SUCCESS STATUS ........................................................................................................................................ 241 
                IF SUCCESS STATUS ............................................................................................................................................ 241 
9. SCORES ............................................................................................................................................................... 243 
    9.1. OBJECTIVES .................................................................................................................................................... 243 
    9.2. RULES ............................................................................................................................................................. 244 
10. SCREEN CAPTURE AND CREATING SIMULATIONS OF OTHER APPLICATIONS....................... 245 
    10.1. WHAT NEEDS TO BE DONE PRIOR TO RECORDING THE SIMULATION? ............................................................. 245 
    10.2. SCREEN CAPTURE WIZARD........................................................................................................................... 245 
    10.3. MODIFY PARAMETERS SETTINGS WHILE IN CAPTURE MODE .......................................................................... 246 
    10.4. CAPTURE FRAMES ........................................................................................................................................ 246 
    10.5. SPECIAL CAPTURE MODE............................................................................................................................... 246 
    10.6. EDITING CAPTURED FRAMES ......................................................................................................................... 247 
11. IMPORT MICROSOFT POWERPOINT PRESENTATIONS .................................................................... 248 




                                                                                                                                                                                              5
1. Introduction


1.1. Prerequisites
This manual assumes that intended audience already has working knowledge of Microsoft
Windows® operating system and its basic operations, such as handling files and folders,
interactions with Dialogs and Menus and has general computer skills such as using Mouse and
Keyboard.
Graphics, audio, video, and other rich-media objects are external to the CourseLab system
therefore we will not go over the details of editing them.
For any additional information on these subjects, please refer to the corresponding software
vendor’s documentation.



1.2. System Requirements
Minimum system requirements for working with CourseLab:
   •   Microsoft® Windows® 2000/XP/2003;
   •   Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher;
   •   50MB hard drive space;


Minimum system requirements for viewing learning modules:


   •   Microsoft® Windows® 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, 2003 (limited support of Microsoft®
       Windows® 95 *), and Linux;
   •   Internet Explorer 5.0 (Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher recommended), Mozilla FireFox 1.0
       or higher, Netscape® 7.2 or higher, limited support** of Opera 9.0 and higher and Safari
       3.0 (Win) and higher;
   •   JavaScript enabled;
   •   XML support enabled (Microsoft® XML Parser 3.0 or higher recommended for Internet
       Explorer***).


* Microsoft® XML Parser 3.0 cannot be installed on Microsoft® Windows® 95 system
therefore no data will be transferred from the Learning Module to the Learning Management
System using AICC protocols.
** Some effects may not work
*** Due to the lack of Microsoft® XML Parser 3.0 component some of the objects in Learning
Module may malfunction in Internet Explorer.




                                                                                             6
2. CourseLab Overview

2.1. About CourseLab
CourseLab is a powerful, yet easy-to-use, e-learning authoring system that offers programming-
free WYSIWYG environment for creating high-quality interactive e-learning content which can
be published on the Internet, Learning Management Systems (LMS), CD-ROMS and other
devices.
Key features of CourseLab:
   •   WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) environment for creating and managing
       high-quality interactive e-learning content.
   •   No HTML or other programming skills required.
   •   Object-oriented Model allows constructing e-Learning content of almost any complexity
       just as easy as you put together the building blocks.
   •   Scenario feature enables building complex multi-object interactions with one mouse
       click.
   •   Interface based on an Open Object Model enables to easily extend and enhance existing
       libraries of objects and templates including those created by the user.
   •   Built-in test creation capabilities.
   •   Embedded mechanisms for objects’ animation.
   •   Add any rich-media content like Macromedia® Flash®, Shockwave®, Java®, and video
       in different formats.
   •   Easy inserting and synchronization of sound files.
   •   Import PowerPoint® presentations into the learning material (requires optiona
       PowerPoint Import Pack).
   •   Screen capture mechanism, which enables emulating functionality of different software
       (requires optional Screen Capture Pack).
   •   Simple intuitive action description language.
   •   Access to additional functionality of the Course Player for advanced users via JavaScript.
   •   No Java® required for Course Player.



2.2. Compliance to Standards
Learning modules created using CourseLab are compliant to the following e-Learning standards:
   •   AICC (http://www.aicc.org/ )
   •   SCORM 1.2 (http://www.adlnet.org/ )
   •   SCORM 2004 (SCORM 1.3) (http://www.adlnet.org/ )




                                                                                                7
3. E-Learning Course


3.1. What is e-Learning Course?
E-Learning Course encapsulates structured, thematically self-contained learning material, which
can be distributed to the learner throughout Internet or using memory devices.
Typically, the e-Learning Course accommodates self learning material, but unlike book or
manual provides the following:
   •   Powerful multimedia content − graphics, animation and other rich-media material (audio
       and video in different formats, Flash-movie, Java applications and others).
   •   Interaction – presentation of the learning material may depend on the actions taken by the
       user.
   •   Different options for assessing and evaluating gathered knowledge (tests, exercises).
Incorporation of e-Learning Course into the Learning Management System and
intercommunication between them enables the most efficient management of the overall learning
process.
Within Learning Management System the e-Learning Course is considered as an independent
learning unit, which can be assigned for assessing the level of learning. Upon completion of e-
Learning Course various reports could be generated by the Learning Management System.
From the educational methodology perspective e-Learning Course corresponds to any
conventional Learning Course – assuming that e-Learning Course encloses all the necessary self-
educational learning material and tests for controlling and evaluating apprehension of the
learning material.



3.2. E-Learning Course Structure: Learning Modules, Chapters
E-Learning Course consists of structured sets of Learning Modules. Depending on structure of
learning content modules can be grouped into Chapters. Chapters can be arranged using the
hierarchy Chapters structure.



3.2.1. Learning Module
Learning Module is a fundamental building block of the Course hierarchy representing the set
of author-structured Slides. During the learning process the learner is led from one Slide to
another sequentially, which is default behavior. If desired, author of the learning Module can
define different order of the Slides appearance (for example depending on the result of the test).


Learning Module can be used for educational purposes (in this case consists of learning material
only), besides that, Learning Module can be employed for assessing of the learned lessons (can
contain tests and exercises). It is a common practice to combine both learning material and tests
in one single Learning Module: In this case upon completion of the learning material learner is
tested within the same Learning Module.

                                                                                                8
In the Learning Management System the Learning Module is one of the component of the
Learning Course and the only dynamic structural unit; system collects information regarding
completion of the Learning Module. When processing information about status of all Learning
Modules, the system changes the completion state of not only the particular sections of the
Course but also Learning Course itself with accordance to the rules defined in the particular
Learning Management System.
From the educational methodology point of view Learning Module corresponds to lesson or
lecture – meaning it supposed to have thematically coherent and completed learning material.



3.2.2. Folder
Learning Modules created in CourseLab can be thematically combined in Folders. Folders can
be grouped within other Folders resulting in complicated Course hierarchy structure. Although
there is no limitation for number of Folders and number of sub Folders within a Folder, it is
strongly recommended to avoid using too complex hierarchy structure. The reason is that you do
not mean to discourage student from pursuing this Course just because the structure of that
Course is too hard to apprehend.
Within Learning Management System the Folder is usually displayed as a folder containing
Learning Modules and/or other Folders. The Folder for the distance Learning System is a
structural entity/unit. There is no information regarding state of the Folder transmitted to the
System from the Learning Modules. The system is making changes to the state of the Folders
based on state information of its Learning Modules and other Folders.
From the educational methodology point of view Folder can be represented as a series of
thematically grouped lectures or lessons.



3.3. Learning Module Structure: Slide, Frame


3.3.1. Slide
Slide (Interactive page) is the main building block of Learning Module.
Slides are used by the author to place learning material, tests, and exercises. The order of Slide
correlation is predefined by the author.
Slide itself consists of Frames. Depending on complicity the number of Frames can vary (e.g.
using animation, software simulation etc. can significantly increase the number of Frames). Any
Slide has at least one Frame.
Slides are not accessible by the Learning Management System individually. The Learning
Module is the smallest system managed unit.
From the educational methodology perspective Slide can be employed for expressing single
point of view (thought or idea) with regards to the Learning Module.




                                                                                                9
3.3.2. Frame
Frame is the smallest structural unit of the Learning Module. In order to create a Learning
Module author uses Frames as the foundation for objects.
Even though there is no limitation for the number of Frames within a Slide, we recommend not
to exceed 30-40 Frames per Slide otherwise the time elapsed for loading up the Slide could be
inconveniently slow.
Similar to Slides, Frames are not accessible by the Learning Management System individually.
The Learning Module is the smallest system managed unit.
From the educational methodology perspective Frame is not a self-containing unit - it is rather
component of the Slide.



3.4. Special Slides: Title-Slide, Master-Slide
Every Module contains the Special Slides: Title- Slide and Master-Slide (one or several).



3.4.1. Title-Slide
Title-Slide is an introductory part of the Learning Module which appears on the PC screen right
after launching Learning Module. Along with the introductory page the system loads the main
part of module on the background, which makes it convenient for user.
       Important! During display of the Title-Slide introduction the main code for the module is
       not loaded yet, therefore, not all the complex objects will be displayed. Thus only text,
       pictures, and special objects “Start Module”button and “Title-Slide Popup” window can
       be used when editing the Title- Slide.



3.4.2. Master-Slide
All the Slides for the Learning Module are created on top of the Master-Slide. The Master slide
is the slide that contains elements that are common to all or several slides: Navigation Objects
within a Module, Help, etc. There is no limit for the number of Master-Slides and hypothetically
each Slide with assessment content might have a Master-Slide, but this is rather inefficient and
must be avoided. Practically, one Master-Slide should be enough.




                                                                                             10
4. Creating Learning Course – from conception to publishing


4.1. Course Scenario. Things to consider.
The following should be taken under consideration while creating Learning Course:
Thematic Presentation of the Learning Course must be strictly consistent.
Stay focused. There is no need to pause – do not follow the usual teaching approach of blending
some funny story into the studying material. Student himself will set the right pace to absorb the
material.
Do not provide too many alternatives. A tree-like Course structure is rather disadvantageous if
compared to linear type Course. It sends learners different directions therefore some parallel
paths of the tree-like structure are in jeopardy of not being revealed at all. The only exception for
using more complex structure is in case you need to provide an example, which is relevant to the
Main Objective. Note, this example should be just be an additional illustration to the learning
material and could be skipped causing no damage to the overall learning process. And again, if
above mentioned example is an essential part of the main course, the linear Course structure
should be taken into consideration. Ideally, learner should be able to go through the entire
Course only by pressing “Next” button.
Specifics of delivering Learning Material - pieces of the Learning Material should be
reasonably sized.
Break down the Learning Material into chunks of learning content. Build the clear hierarchy
structure. If learning material is extensive, break it down into Modules with respect to thematic
coherence – clear and consistent story lines and content. It is not recommended to group more
than one learning subject into one Module; better use more Modules in the Course than overload
the Modules with different learning subjects. Use thematic coherence inside each Module to
distribute learning assessment into the Slides.
One Topic per Slide. The learning material in the Course is divided into the Slides. Although
there is a thematic relationship among the slides we do not recommend using several slides for
covering a single learning Topic. Ideally, use only one Topic per Slide.
Reverse situation: overloading the Slide with several related Topics is not recommended either.
Most likely the student will remember none of these concurrent Topics.
Not to exaggerate, it does not necessarily mean that entire learning material within one big Topic
should be fit into one slide; in many cases it is simply impossible. It is essential that the theme
within one slide is clearly outlined, consistent, and not overlapping with other topics.
Use Interactive Multimedia features
Utilize multimedia illustrations and graphics. E-Learning has a huge advantage over
conventional learning since e-Learning introduces multimedia content. Animated schemes or
Flash-movie is often more comprehensive than lengthy descriptions and should be used to full
extent to explore the Topic within a Slide.
Learn as you practice. Allow audience to interact with the system as it significantly improves
the process of memorizing the learning material. E-Learning is interactive by its nature, thus use
this potential to the full extent. Where appropriate, enable onscreen actions to demonstrate
different results by manipulating with parameters. Use quizzes.



                                                                                                  11
4.2. Create New Learning Course
Start CourseLab. On “Start Page” screen select “Create New Course” (in case the CourseLab is
already running, go to menu File – New – Course, or select “New Course” icon, or use Ctrl-
Shift-N key combination). New Course Wizard is opened.

Click “Next” button to start creating new Course.




On the next page of the Wizard:
   •   Insert Course name
   •   Specify folder where Course files will be located (if it does not exist, it will be created
       automatically) and press “Next” button.
              NOTE: Unlike naming the Course, where any symbols can be used, when naming
              the Course Folder, it is not recommended to use special characters (@, #, $, ^, %,
              &, *, and quotation marks).




                                                                                               12
By default, every created Course contains single Module by default (you can add as many
Modules as you want later). On the next page of the Wizard:
   •   insert name of the first Module,
   •   Select Module design template and press “Next” button.
       NOTE: No restrictions on using special symbols when naming Module.
Course is created. Press “Finish” button to finish working on the “New Course” wizard.
Later on you may add more modules to the Course, as well as Folders.



4.3. Editing Module


4.3.1. Editing Module Design Settings
You may change every new Module’s width and height, change default font for every text
insertion, Module’s color palette, as well as prefixes of identifiers for Slides, Frames and other
objects if necessary. To do that select menu Module – Design Settings or use Alt-F7 key
combination.




                                                                                               13
Module’s width and height can be changed according to your vision of Module layout.
However, since Modules have fixed width and height, you should always consider users display
resolution as main limitation – your Course should fit into the smallest display. Built-in
CourseLab Module templates are designed to fit into 800x600 pixels (750x530 and 792x536
templates) and 1024x768 pixels (1018x682 templates) display resolutions. Also, keep in mind
that changing Module’s width and height might require further adjustment of Title-Slide and
Master-Slide for this Module. Thus, change these settings only when absolutely necessary.




Module’s color palette is designed to save time when selecting filling colors and contains
frequently used colors for this Module. Module is not limited by the number of selected pallette
colors – you can always use standard color picker instead.

                                                                                             14
Identifiers for Slides, Frames and other objects should not be changed without worthy reason.
       IMPORTANT! Prefixes for object identifiers must contain only Latin alphabet letters,
       numbers and underscore character (they must not start with a digit though).




Usually, the most frequent change is a change of default font.




                                                                                                15
4.3.2. Editing Title-Slide
                        To turn on Title-Slide editing mode
                        use View – Title sub-menu or
                        corresponding      quick     switching
                        button in the Slide’s Panel.

                        You may change picture, add Logo, insert Module name and
                        instructions prior to presenting Module (for example, using “Title-
                        Slide Popup” window object), and so on. If necessary, you may modify
                        the look of “Start Module” button. “Start Module” button can be
                        displayed in two ways: Inactive (displayed from the moment system
                        starts loading the Module until Module is loaded) and Active
                        (displayed when the code for the Module is loaded) – arrange the
                        necessary pictures in your Graphic Editor and change corresponding
                        pictures using “Properties” context Menu option.

      LIMITATION: Title-Slide appears on the screen before the browser loads all of the run-
      time files necessary for Module and Objects functionality, therefore only the limited
      number of the objects such as pictures, text boxes, auto shapes, and special objects “Start
      Module” button and “Title-Slide Popup” window, which do not require run-time files,
      can be employed. Links, banners, animation effects and other events are not functioning
      on Title-Slide. Except for mentioned above WYSIWYG editing mode is used for editing
      Title-Slide.


                          4.3.3. Editing Master-Slide
                          To turn on Master-Slide’s editing
                          mode use View – Master sub-
                          menu or quick switching button in
                          the Slide’s Panel.

                          If required, change pictures on the Master-Slide, add common Slides
                          background picture, insert Logo, specify Module’s name, and so on.
                          The appearance of the objects on the Master-Slide can be modified
                          with respect to overall design of the Module.




      LIMITATION: Since Master-Slide is backround for many other Slides, therefore links,
      animation effects, and events are disabled on the Master-Slide. Besides, there is a
      limitation on using Objects: you can use only pictures, text boxes, auto shapes and
      special objects from the “Navigation” folder. All other Master-Slide editing features are
      based on WYSIWYG editing mode.




                                                                                              16
4.3.4. Editing Slide
                            To turn on regular Slide’s
                            editing mode use View –
                            Normal sub-menu or quick
                            switching button in the Slide’s Panel.
                            The following settings of the Slide can be edited:
                                •   Name of the Slide
                                •   Slide ID
                                •   Select the Master-Slide for the Slide
                                •   Content of the Slide
                                •   Slide Comments
                                •   Next Slide transition settings



4.3.4.1. Name of a Slide

                                    Usually, the name of a Slide reflects the main topic of a Slide.
                                    The name of a Slide appears on every Frame of this Slide (in
                                    case Master-Slide has a corresponding object “Slide Name”,
                                    which enables display of this text). Besides that, the name of a
                                    Slide is mentioned in the table of contents of the Module
                                    (again, if Master-Slide contain the corresponding “Contents”
                                    objects) even if the name is not displayed on the Slide itself.


                                    By default, newly created Slide is titled as “Untitled”. In order
                                    to change the name of a Slide, right click on Slide icon in
                                    Slides panel and choose Rename option from Context menu.
                                    There are no limitations for naming a Slide.


                                                     NOTE: The newly edited name of a Slide will
                                                     not be displayed in edit mode; but it will be
                                                     visible in the viewing mode.




4.3.4.2. Slide ID

Compared to Slide Name the Slide ID is used for internal programming purposes only
(establishing relationship among the Slides, enabling process of Slide transition, etc.). By default
CourseLab sets Slide ID automatically to every new Slide and usually there’s no need to change


                                                                                                  17
it. In case you need to change Slide ID, right click on icon of desired Slide in the Slide Panel and
                                 select Identifier option from the context menu.
                                 Please be aware that:
                                     • Slide ID must contain only Latin alphabet letters,
                                 numbers and underscore character (ID must not start with a
                                 digit).
                                     • Change of the Slide ID may require revision and
                                 adjustment of all corresponding actions and relationship for this
                                 Slide.
                                     • ID must be unique for all Slides, Frames, and Objects
                                 within a Module – two Slides of the same Module can not share
                                 the same ID (upon attempt of changing Slide’s ID the entered
                                 data is automatically validated for uniqueness).




4.3.4.3. Select the Master-Slide for the Slide

                                  As it was previously mentioned the Learning Module may
                                  contain several Master-Slides.
                                  You can modify Master-Slide which is the background for
                                  associated Slide while in editing mode: right click on the Slide
                                  from the Slide Panel and select Master option from the
                                  context menu. In the popup window make a selection of
                                  desired Master-Slide.
                                  By default, when the Module is created, first created Slide is
                                  linked to the first Master-Slide from the list of Module’s
                                  Master-Slides, regardless of number of Master-Slides for this
                                  Module.
                                  Later, every newly created Slide is based on the Master-Slide,
                                  which is associated with the previous Slide. For example, the
                                  foundation for new Slide 11 will be the Master-Slide of Slide
                                  10.




                                                                                                 18
4.3.4.4. Slide Content
To insert pictures, texts, and objects into the Frame of the Slide, Insert – Picture, Insert – Text
Box, and Insert – Object sub-menus can be used, or corresponding Panel buttons. Complex
objects can be inserted directly from the library of the objects either by double-clicking on the
selected objects or by dragging and dropping the object into the working area.
Please refer to the Object allocation section of this document for more details on the specifics of
object allocation.

4.3.4.5. Slide Comments

                                 Slide Comments is additional text that can be attached to the
                                 Slide. It can contain author's comments and remarks to the
                                 Slide, or comments to the Slide that imported from PowerPoint
                                 presentation.

                                 Slide Comments is not part of viewable Slide area, and it is not
                                 an object, therefore it cannot be displayed as usual text object.
                                 Special objects are used to display comments to learner (please
                                 refer to Complex Objects - Navigation section of this
                                 document).

                                 To add or edit comments to the Slide right click on the Slide
                                 icon in the Slide Panel and select Comments option from the
                                 context menu. RichText editing window will appear. Edit the
                                 text.




                                   4.3.4.6. Slide Transition

                                   By default, it is assumed that transition to the next Slide will
                                   be performed by click on the “Next” button or by other user-
                                   activated navigation actions. Apparently, this is the most
                                   common situation when the user is in control of the timing for
                                   observing the Slide.
                                   But there are instances when timing must be set to transition
                                   to the next Slide regardless of the action from the user. In
                                   order to change default transition settings, right click on the
                                   target Slide icon from the Slide Panel and select Advance
                                   option from the context menu.
                                   In the open window modify “Wait for Action” setting to
                                   “Immediate”. Transition to the next Slide will occur

                                                                                                 19
automatically right after all the elements for the current Slide have been displayed.
Please refer to the “Actions” section of this document for other methods of programming Slide
transitions.



4.3.5. Create and remove Slides. Change the order of Slides


                                         Once the Module is
                                         created – it already
                                         contains one Slide. To
                                         add a new Slide on the
                                         Insert menu select New
                                         Slide (or use Ctrl–M
                                         shortcut keys), otherwise,
                                         right click on Slide Panel
                                         and select New Slide
                                         from the context menu.
                                         Note, that new Slide will
                                         be placed right after
                                         currently selected Slide
                                         vs. being placed to the
last position from the list of Slides.
You can always adjust position of the Slide: left click on the
icon representing the Slide that you would like move and drag
this Slide to the desired location while holding down the left
mouse button.
To delete a Slide select the Slide you want to delete and press Del key. Alternatively, on the Edit
menu, select Delete Slide or use Delete Slide from the Slide’s context menu.
Remember, that you can always reverse Slide deletion by using Undo under Edit menu.



4.3.6. Module and Slide Preview
While editing, it is always possible to preview what the Learning Module will look like on Web
Browser.
                                      For viewing of the entire Module select Module –
                                      View Module (or press F5 key, or press corresponding
                                      button on toolbar). Module will be loaded into the
separate browser window, which is limited by width and height according to the size of the
Learning Module configured for viewing from the beginning.
For Slide preview select Module – View Slide sub-menu (or press Shift-F5). Module will be
loaded into the separate Browser Window which is limited by width and height according to the
size of the Learning Module and will automatically transition into the selected Slide for display.




                                                                                                20
4.4. Add Modules. Change the order of Modules.
Upon creation of new Learning Course, it contains only single Module. In case it is not enough,
you can add required number of Modules and group them into the Folders.




                                             To add new Module to the Course you can either
                                             select File – New – Module sub-menu (or use
                                             Ctrl-N shortcut keys), or use context menu by right
                                             clicking on the name of the Course from the
                                             “Course” panel. Add required number of Modules
                                             and fill them with the learning content.
                                             To change Module’s order do the following: in the
                                             Course panel drag Module with the mouse button
                                             to the parent element (Course or Folder). Dragged
                                             Module will be placed at the end of the list of
                                             Modules.

4.5. Add Folders




                                                                                             21
Upon creation of new Learning Course, it contains only single Module, which is not placed in
the Folder. As the number of the Modules increases, it might be necessary to group Modules into
the Folders.
                                                  To add new Folder to the Course you can
                                                  either select File – New – Folder sub-menu or
                                                  use context menu by right clicking on the
                                                  name of the Course from the “Course” panel.
                                                  Add required number of Folders and fill them
                                                  with the Modules.
                                                  To change Folder’s order do the following: in
                                                  the Course panel drag Folder with the mouse
                                                  button to the parent element (Course or
                                                  Folder). Dragged Folder will be placed at the
                                                  end of the list.



4.7. Publish Course
After completing of all editing tasks Course should be published.
Publishing Course - creation fully functional standalone (separate from CourseLab) version of
the Learning Course intended for use on CD, in the Learning Management System and so on.
During publishing only those elements which are required for displaying the Course are copied
into the separate folder from the folder containing the editable version of the Course, also some
other elements added which are not used for editing, but require for Course display. The editable
version of the Course during publishing remains unchanged.
Depending on the prospective usage there are different choices of Course publishing:
   •   for Launching from the CD
   •   For distribution in the Learning Management System, which supports AICC standard
   •   For distribution in the Learning Management System, which supports SCORM 1.2
       standard
   •   For distribution in the Learning Management System, which supports SCORM 2004
       standard
Sequence of the publishing steps as follows:
   •   Specify runtime settings for each Module
   •   Specify Course runtime settings
   •   Launch “Publish Course” wizard




                                                                                              22
4.7.1. Module runtime settings


                                         Prior to publishing it is necessary to specify runtime
                                         settings for each Module in the Course:
                                         Select Module – Runtime Settings sub-menu.
                                         “Module Properties” dialog window opens up.




In most cases LMS needs Module ID, Module Name and Module Description to represent the
Module to the user. The actual name of the Module in CourseLab will be used in LMS as is (will
be inserted in metadata files automatically). To define Module ID and Description select
“General” tab and fill in “Identifier” and “Description” fields under “Module identification in
LMS” section.




Identifier is a short Module ID, which will be used in the Learning Management System.
Description – brief informal description of the Course, which will be used within Learning
Management System in the Module card.



                                                                                            23
Use “Checks” tab to specify software components that need to be checked for availability on
student’s computer prior to launching Module. For example, if you have inserted sound files or
video clip in AVI format, it will be useful to check if Windows Media Player is installed on
student’s computer.




Use “Runtime” tab to specify some extra execution parameters.
Specifying parameters in the “Objectives” and “Rules” tabs is described in greater details in the
Score section.

                                                                                              24
4.7.2. Course runtime settings
                                             Prior to publishing, it is necessary to specify
                                             runtime settings for the Course.
                                             Select File – Course runtime settings sub-menu.
                                             “Course Properties” dialog window opens up.


                                             In most cases LMS needs Course ID, Course
                                             Name and Course Description to represent the
                                             Course to the user. The actual name of the Course
                                             in CourseLab will be used in LMS as is (will be
                                             inserted in metadata files automatically). To
                                             define Course ID and Description fill in
                                             “Identifier” and “Description” fields under
                                             “Course identification in LMS” section.




Identifier – short Course ID, which will be used in the Learning Management System.
Description – brief informal description of the Course, which will be used within Learning
Management System in the Course card.




                                                                                           25
4.7.3. Wizard “Course Publication”
                                         Select File – Publish Course sub-menu to start Course
                                         publishing. Follow wizard instructions to complete
                                         publishing.




Select desired publication type - standard compliant package or folder for CD. In case one of the
LMS publishing options was selected CourseLab will generate ZIP archive, structured according
to selected standard (AICC or SCORM). In case “Publishing for CD” option was selected
CourseLab will generate folder set with autorun.html. Autorun.html is very simple HTML file
that cannot be edited in CourseLab – you can adjust it to your design in any HTML editor.




                                                                                              26
Select name of the package (or CD folder) and location, where it will be saved. Click th “Next”
button and wait until the course is published.




                                                                                            27
5. Objects


5.1. Object and Object positioning within a Frame
Object is the basic element of CourseLab, the building “brick” of the Learning Module. You may
construct the Learning Module of any complexity by employing various Objects and building
relationships among them.
When you insert the Object of any shape into the Frame it is placed into the Rectangular
Placeholder. You can change size and orientation of this Rectangular Placeholder. There are 3
types of Objects allocation within the Rectangular Placeholder:
   •   Object that can automatically adjust its size to the size of Rectangular Placeholder (For
       example, pictures, and AutoShapes are always resizing height and width to fit the
       Rectangular Placeholder),
   •   Object that can resize by itself (autofit to contents depending, for example, on the amount
       of the text)
   •   fixed-size Object



5.2. Types of Objects: Internal and Complex
Two main types of Objects are used in the CourseLab for building up learning Module: internal
and complex.
Internal Objects are the primary and most frequently used Objects; they are built into the
CourseLab. In fact, you can create entire learning Module by utilizing only internal Objects such
as:
   •   text boxes (can include text, tables, pictures)
   •   pictures and autoshapes
Since these types of Objects are the most commonly used, the access to the Editor menu is very
simple - editing buttons are conveniently located on the toolbar.
Complex Objects are external to CourseLab and loaded into the CourseLab using the Open
Object Interface.
For presentations of software execution the special object Cursor can also be employed.




                                                                                               28
5.3. Internal Objects


5.3.1. Text Box
Text Box – embedded into the editor object, which is used for creating areas within a Frame
with formatted text and tables.

5.3.1.1. Inserting Text Box
                  You can add Text Box to a Frame as follows: click on “Insert” menu option
                  and select “Text Box”, or choose “Text Box” icon from the toolbar.
Area of text appears on the Slide with “Enter Text” instruction on it.
Alternatively, copy the desired text to Clipboard using any text editor and paste it right into the
Frame. This insertion method is more convenient to use in many cases.



5.3.1.2. Editing Text. Editing Modes
Using left mouse button, double click on Text Box or use “Edit text” option from the context
menu to open text editing window.
By default, text editing window opens up in Rich Text Format mode where you can edit text just
like in any other conventional text editor: modify font, style, size, specify different format
settings for paragraphs and lists, and so on. The edited text is automatically converted into
HTML code, which will eventually be placed into the learning Module.




Those who are familiar with HTML coding can switch to HTML mode by selecting “Edit
HTML” button (right button in the bottom buttons row).

                                                                                                29
5.3.1.3. Insert a Table into Text
To insert a table, click on “Insert Table” button in text editing window (selected on the picture
below).




In opened Insert Table dialog screen, specify the number of columns and rows and other
parameters.




                                                                                              30
After pressing “OK” button table appears in the text editing screen. You can insert text into the
cells while in editing mode.




Use “Table Properties” option from the context menu (right-click within table’s border) in case
you need to modify settings for already inserted table.
Note, that there are buttons to quickly insert and delete rows and columns. They are located right
next to the “Insert Table” button.
Use “Cell Properties” option from the context menu to modify settings for the single cell.


                                                                                               31
5.3.1.3. Insert a Picture into Text
If necessary, you can insert a picture right inside the text. While in editing mode, press “Insert
Picture” button (selected on the picture below) and locate the file of the picture to insert.




5.3.2. Pictures
CourseLab enables insertion of the graphics created by any graphic editor tool into the learning
module, although CourseLab itself does not support graphic editing.



5.3.2.1. Inserting Picture
                  To insert picture into Frame of the learning Module you can either choose
                  “Picture” sub-menu within “Insert” menu or use “Insert Picture From File”
                  icon on the toolbar.
Locate the picture you need to insert and press “Open” button. Picture will be inserted into the
Frame and file itself will be copied into the “Images” folder of current learning Module. In case
file being copied already exists, the User will be prompted to cancel file overwriting.
       LIMITATION: Since Learning Modules can be further used on Internet, all file names of
       the pictures should be web-safe, in particular it is recommended to use letters and
       numbers of Latin alphabet only; no spaces and no special characters.



5.3.2.2. Valid Graphic File Formats
Any internet-friendly graphic file formats can be used in the learning course.
With respect to the fact that learning courses can be used on the Internet, it is highly
recommended to select only graphic files of the small size therefore only compressed graphic
formats such as GIF, JPG, and PNG are recommended. Each format has some advantages and
disadvantages, which should be taken under consideration when selecting format. Below is the
brief overview of these formats.
                                                                                               32
GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)
GIF is the most common format for graphic images on the Internet supported by all
browsers and majority of the graphic editors. Using the special compression algorithm
(limited to 256 or less colors and simple linear compression along the horizontal axis)
enables very small size of the graphic file if there are large areas of the same color on the
source file. For the same reason it is not suitable for storing photos and images with the
large graded areas - stored image will have a large size and poor quality display. GIF
supports transparency (you can choose a single color in the image that will be rendered
as invisible, allowing the background to show through when the image is viewed on a
Web page) but you have to remember that GIF supports only 1-bit transparency: each
pixel for the given color (so called Alpha Channel )is completely removed. Therefore,
when picking transparency color take under consideration the background color for this
image as it appears in the learning Course, otherwise, you will have an effect of blurred
ringed color transition instead of fading away gradually into the transparent area. The
latest version of GIF format supports animation created by stringing together various
still images. GIF animation can be also employed for creating a learning Module. Note,
Even though CourseLab editor does not support playback of GIF animation – only the
first GIF image is displayed on the Slide while in editing mode, in the Learning Course
GIF animation fragment will be displayed completely.


JPG (JPEG, Joint Photographic Experts Group)
JPG is also one of the most common formats for graphic images on the Internet
supported by all browsers and majority of the graphic editors. When JPG compressing is
executed, the source image is divided into square blocks with specific color and
brightness information (so called chrominance/luminance scheme) created for each
block, which enables coding of this area. The human eye is more sensible to the details
of shapes than to color information therefore JPG compression reduces color
information to variable size while using 256-grade brightness scale. Usually, not all of
the colors of the entire image are used within compressed area; therefore the color
information is quite small (it also depends on the user defined quality setting). Having
said that, JPG format is very practical for displaying smooth color transitions and very
well suited for compressing photos and pictures with high color gradient areas. However,
if source image has multiple contrasting color changeovers, the compressed image will
degrade depending on the level of compression (there will be mottled areas around
color’s edges). JPG allows the user to choose the balance between file size and image
quality, and one could choose better quality, but in this case the size of the file will be
excessively big, which makes this format inefficient. Unlike GIF, JPEG does not support
transparency.


PNG (Portable Network Graphics)
The Portable Network Graphics (PNG) format was designed for internet usage to replace
the older and simpler GIF and JPG formats. When saving to 8-bit depth palette image
(PNG-8) format is comparative to GIF (in general, provides about 15% better
compression ratio than GIF, since PNG-8 performs compression along both horizontal
and vertical axes). When saving to a 24-bit depth palette image (PNG-24) format
provides high-quality of displaying color changeovers and very good level of file
compression. PNG supports transparency and preserves quality of the color changeovers
regardless of the underlying color. In fact, the only disadvantage of PNG format is

                                                                                          33
limited support by older versions of Internet Browsers and limited support by some of the
       graphic editors. Nevertheless, since the older versions of Browsers are not supported in
       CourseLab learning Courses we strongly encourage using this format if possible.


       Other Formats
       When designing the learning Module, you can use other graphical formats supported by
       Internet Browsers, such as BMP, WMF, and others. However, consider the fact that some
       of the Browsers can display these formats incorrectly. Besides, BMP files (and other non-
       compressed formats) are very big in size. The choice is yours - if you are confident that
       images will be displayed correctly and network traffic permits it – you may use these
       types of format in your Course.



5.3.2.3. Change the Size of Picture
Once picture is inserted, you may format picture within CourseLab using “Size” tab on the
“Format Picture” dialog window.




Things to consider:
   •   By enlarging the picture you are not decreasing the amount of information stored in the
       image file, therefore the quality will definitely suffer.
   •   The browser’s formatting capability that is used for minimizing pictures is far from
       perfect if compared to graphic editing tools. Besides that, remember that any formatting
       changes you apply to Slide’s picture will not affect the size of the loaded image file.
Therefore we do not recommend making significant changes to the format of the picture when
editing a Slide. With respect to the size of the file and image quality correlation, if one of the
picture parameters is to be modified by more than 10-20%, we suggest using external graphic

                                                                                               34
editing tool. Internal CourseLab format editing feature should only be used for slight formatting
purposes (not to exceed 10-20% modifications in size). And again, the best formatting solution is
to use external graphic editing tool.


5.3.2.4. Optimizing Pictures
                                     After the picture is inserted and its size is changed to fit
                                     Slide layout it is recommended to optimize file size of
                                     picture. Use Tools – Compress Images menu to optimize
                                     Module image files.
                                     All scaled pictures in Module will be automatically resized
                                     to fit user-defined width and height exactly with maximal
                                     possible picture quality and re-saved. Besides, pictures in
                                     BMP, WMF, EMF formats will be converted and re-saved
                                     in PNG format to minimize file sizes.




5.3.3. Section “Clip Art”
For inserting frequently used pictures it is very convenient to use “Clip Art” section in the tasks
area.
Clip Art is the panel in the tasks area. It displays images thumbnails from the folder on the
computer. To add picture into the Slide, drag image thumbnail into the working area.
Unlike using the Insert Picture From File menu, the above mentioned picture inserting method
eliminates the inconvenience of specifying the path to the picture file each time within “Open”
dialog box.
                  Use Insert – Picture – Clip Art (or use “Insert Clip Art” icon on the toolbar)
                  sub-menu to start using Clip Art section.
In the right part of the main editor window, tasks area will open up displaying the selected
section “Images collection”.
Click “Browse…” link at the bottom of the “Clip Art” section to specify folder containing
pictures which will be accessible from the Clip Art panel. In the opened “Browse For Folder”
dialog box, select folder containing pictures.



5.4. AutoShapes
AutoShapes is a group of special objects based on vector controls (arrows, stars, curves,
rectangles etc.). Based on the vector structure AutoShapes can be resized to any size without
loosing on the form and quality.
AutoShapes objects are accessible within the CourseLab Task Panel. Use Insert – Picture –
Autoshape sub-menu to start using Autoshapes section. To insert an object, select the desired
tab in the AutoShapes section on the Task Panel and double-click on the object.

                                                                                                35
5.5. Complex Objects


5.5.1. External Elements



5.5.1.1. “External File” Object
“External File” object enables opening external files such as: document, pictures, movie, etc., in
a separate Browser window.
What types of files are supported by the Object?
Object is not limited by the file types. At the same time, Browser restricts opening some of the
file types; therefore, in a separate Browser window you may open any file which is NOT
RESTRICTED BY BROWSER. For some conventional file types Object can place the
corresponding icon into the Frame. In case of undefined file type, Text document icon will be
displayed.




After inserting object into Frame, specify path to the file, which you are going to open. Next,
File will be copied into the “Images” folder of current learning Module. Input file’s Caption and
choose location of the Caption with respect to position of the icon.
Select the activation event to open file:
   •   mouse click only on Icon;
   •   mouse click only on Caption;
   •   mouse click either on Icon or on Caption.
Example of External File appearance on the Frame:




                                                                                               36
5.5.1.2. External URL




External URL object is used for opening an external Link in a separate Browser window. The
exceptional feature of the “External URL” object is an ability to fully control browser settings of
the window being opened. The settings are: size of the Browser window and Browser navigation
restrictions (limited availability since Microsoft introduced additional Security settings in
Windows XP SP2).
After inserting object into the Frame, specify URL which you are going to open. Remove
checkmark, in case you prefer not to use standard icon. After “Display Icon” field becomes
active select desired image, file will be copied into the “Images” folder of learning Module.
Select size for the browser window to be opened, and other settings as appropriate.
Example of External File appearance on the Frame:


5.5.1.3. IFRAME

IFRAME object is used for opening an external web-content (from file or distant server) into the
area on the Frame.

       WARNING! This object must be placed on top of ALL other objects on the Frame -
       otherwise errors may arise due to specific nature of this HTML Element.

       NOTE! This object is capable to load content from other domains, therefore browser's
       security restrictions (i.e. cross-domain security) may apply to this object. There's no
       possibility to override browser security settings from content.

Example of IFRAME appearance in Edit area:




                                                                                                 37
The same IFRAME in Runtime mode:




After inserting object into the Frame, specify URL or file which you are going to open and
specify appearance settings, if necessary.




                                                                                             38
Object Methods

The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

           Method name                                   Execution Result

REPLACE SOURCE                         Replaces URL of IFRAME content.




5.5.2. Popup Windows
Such objects as Popup windows are used for displaying various explanations to the text on the
Slide. Basically, text size for explanations is considerably bigger than the one used for the
similar Balloon type of objects. Therefore, Popup window can be activated by clicking on the
link or button. It does not close automatically, it remains open. Compared to Balloon type of
object, Popup window type has its own windows closing mechanism.



5.5.2.1. “Relief” Popup Window
Once object is inserted into the Frame, open “Format Object” dialog window.




                                                                                          39
Select color scheme for the object. The “Base color” refers to the color of the window title and
border. The background color for the part of the window containing the main text is usually
white.
Input text for the header and the main part of the window. By default, header text is centered
and has a font corresponding to the default font of selected learning Module. You can change
these settings while in editing mode.
Specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the window and
text block.
Define window closing rule: it can be closed by clicking on popup window “Close” button
(which looks similar to conventional Windows “Close” button) or by clicking anywhere within a
popup window. Note, you can omit selecting closing rule, but in this case, it will be your
responsibility to define closing procedure.
Example of Relief Popup Window appearance on the Frame:




Depending on the purpose of inserted popup window, it might be necessary to disable display of
popup right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of popup window.

Object Events
Since “Convex” popup object has its own closing mechanism, it is capable of generating the
closing Event. While building Frame, we can use closing event for initiating various actions.




                                                                                             40
Reference in the Action Editor                             Triggered Upon

On Close Popup                           Right after user initiates object closing




5.5.2.2. “Standard” Popup Window
Once object is inserted into the Frame, open “Format Object” dialog window.




Select color scheme for the object. The “Base color” refers to the color of the window title and
border. The background color for the part of the window containing the main text is usually
white.
Input text for the title and the main part of the window. By default, title text is centered and has
a font corresponding to the default font of selected learning Module. You can change these
settings while in editing mode.
Specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the window and
text block.
Define window closing rule: it can be closed by clicking on popup window “Close” button
(which looks similar to conventional Windows “Close” button) or by clicking anywhere within a
popup window. Note, you can omit selecting closing rule, but in this case, it will be your
responsibility to define closing procedure.
Example of Standard Popup Window appearance on the Frame:




                                                                                                 41
Depending on the purpose of inserted popup window, it might be necessary to disable display of
popup right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of popup window.

Object Events
Since “Convex” popup object has its own closing mechanism, it is capable of generating the
closing Event. While building Frame, we can use closing event for initiating various actions.

  Reference in the Action Editor                            Triggered Upon

On Close Popup                          Right after user initiates object closing



5.5.3. Balloons
Balloon objects are used for opening various instructions for a text on the Slide. In general,
amount of text in Balloon instruction is relatively small (smaller than the instructions used for
the similar Popup window types of objects). Balloon object is intended to open up when the
user’s mouse moves over affected area versa the mouse click and closes when the user’s mouse
moves away from the active area. Therefore, Balloon types of objects do not have their own
closing mechanism. Compared to Popup window type of object, Balloon objects can have
pointer arrow.


5.5.3.1. “Simple” Balloon
After inserting object into the Frame, adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame
structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                               42
Select color scheme with respect to the overall design of the Slide. Press “Apply” button to
observe changes. Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text.
If necessary, specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between window
border and the text.
After you are done with parameters settings, place Balloon the way that arrow points right into
the link or active area. Balloon opens up when the user’s mouse moves over that link or active
area.
Example of Simple Balloon appearance on the Frame:




Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon, it might be necessary to disable display of
Balloon right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of Balloon.



5.5.3.2. “Standard” Balloon
After inserting object into the Frame, adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame
structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Select color scheme with respect to the overall design of the Slide. Press “Apply” button to
observe changes. Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text.
If necessary, specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between window
border and the text.



                                                                                               43
After you are done with parameters settings, place Balloon the way that arrow points right into
the link or active area. Balloon opens up when the user’s mouse moves over that link or active
area.
Example of Standard Balloon appearance on the Frame:




Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon, it might be necessary to disable display of
Balloon right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of Balloon.



5.5.3.3. “Convex” Balloon
After inserting object into the Frame, adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame
structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Select color scheme with respect to the overall design of the Slide. Press “Apply” button to
observe changes. Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text.
If necessary, specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between window
border and the text.
After you are done with parameters settings, place Balloon the way that arrow points right into
the link or active area. Balloon opens up when the user’s mouse moves over that link or active
area.
Example of Convex Balloon appearance on the Frame:

                                                                                               44
Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon, it might be necessary to disable display of
Balloon right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of Balloon.



5.5.3.4. “Gradient” Balloon
After inserting object into the Frame, adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame
structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Select color scheme with respect to the overall design of the Slide. Press “Apply” button to
observe changes. Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text.
If necessary, specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between window
border and the text.
After you are done with parameters settings, place Balloon the way that arrow points right into
the link or active area. Balloon opens up when the user’s mouse moves over that link or active
area.
Example of Gradient Balloon appearance on the Frame:




                                                                                               45
Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon, it might be necessary to disable display of
Balloon right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of Balloon.



5.5.3.5. “Think” Balloon
After inserting object into the Frame, adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame
structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Select color scheme with respect to the overall design of the Slide. Press “Apply” button to
observe changes. Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text.
If necessary, specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between window
border and the text.
After you are done with parameters settings, place Balloon the way that arrow points right into
the link or active area. Balloon opens up when the user’s mouse moves over that link or active
area.
Example of Think Balloon appearance on the Frame:




                                                                                               46
Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon, it might be necessary to disable display of
Balloon right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of Balloon.



5.5.4. Design Elements
Design Elements is group of objects that is used for decorating and other purposes. In fact, these
are the simplest objects used for creating learning material.



5.5.4.1. Gradient areas
The Gradient areas types of objects are generally used for decoration purposes.




After inserting object into the Frame, adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame
structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                               47
Select color for the start and the end of the Gradient areas with respect to the selected design
of the Slide. Click “Apply” to view changes.
Select direction of the gradient – vertical or horizontal.

5.5.4.2. Click Area

The Click Area type of objects is used for defining transparent click area anywhere on the
Frame. Transparent by default, click area can be made visible (and blinking) using object
methods. This may be useful, for example, to highlight click area in case of incorrect click.

The object is invisible by default; therefore object's placeholder is displayed in Edit mode:




After inserting object into the Frame, adjust object's size and position in relation to the Frame
structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




On the Highlighting tab you can select blinking timer, background color, border parameters and
opacity of the object in the Highlight mode. Check the Preview highlighted checkmark to
preview object's Highlight mode. Be aware that there's no possibility to display transparency for
this object in CourseLab Edit mode, therefore only background and border can be previewed.

Object Methods

The state of the Object can be modified using methods.




                                                                                                48
Method name                                     Execution Result

HIGHLIGHT ON                             Turns the object in the Highlight mode.

HIGHLIGHT OFF                            Turns the object back to Invisible mode.



5.5.4.3. Notifier

The Notifier type of objects is used to attract learner's attention to the part of the Frame. There
are three different shapes, which can be used as (optionally blinking) notifier: arrow, transparent
rectangle with visible corners and colored transparent rectangular area.

Examples of Notifier appearance:




After inserting object into the Frame, open “Properties” dialog screen. Depending on selected
object appearance, you can change various parameters:




For arrow you can select arrow direction and color.




                                                                                                 49
For Corners you can select corners size and color.




For Transparent area you can select blinking timer, background color, border parameters and
opacity of the object. Be aware that there's no possibility to display transparency for this object
in CourseLab Edit mode, therefore only background and border can be viewed.




                                                                                                  50
5.5.5. Title-Slide Objects
Title-Slide group of objects is used strictly on the Title-Slide.



5.5.5.1. Start Module Button
Start Module Button appears in inactive state on the Title-Slide while the main block of Module
is loading and becomes active only when Module is fully loaded.
Select the Title-Slide. Insert object into the Frame (double click on icon in the “Object” panel or
drag object with the mouse).
Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties”
option from the context menu).




By default, the standard Start Module Button is used. If you wish to use different button, then
create 2 images using any graphical editor:
   •   First picture will be displayed while the main block of Module is loading (specify path in
       the “Picture before loading” field).
   •   The second picture will be displayed after the main block of Module is loaded (specify
       path in the “Picture after loading” field).
Example of standard Start Module Button appearance on the Title-Slide:




                                                                                                51
5.5.5.2. Title-Slide Popup
Title-Slide Popup button and window appears on the Title-Slide and may be useful for providing
descriptions or help instructions. Examples of Title-Slide Popup button object appearance:




Select Title Slide. Insert object into the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




On the Popup window tab you can define popup window size and border, window header and
text (these are RichText fields). If On open close other popups checkmark is set, then only one
(last opened) popup window will be displayed.




By default, the standard Start Module button is used. If you wish to use different button, then
create 2 corresponding images using any graphical editor.

                                                                                                  52
5.5.6. Rich Media objects



5.5.6.1. Flash-Movie
Flash-movie object is used for playing Adobe Flash Movies or video clips converted to Flash.
Adobe Flash movie files have .swf extension.
       IMPORTANT! The Adobe Flash Player software should be installed on the computer for
       playing Flash-movie. You can get the latest free of charge version of Adobe Flash Player
       at http://www.adobe.com/). To insure correct functionality of the learning Course
       remember to turn on the feature, which checks whether or not Flash Player has been
       installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module (menu “Module –
       Runtime Settings – Checks”).
Insert Flash-movie object into the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Specify Flash-movie source. There are three options:

   •   Local file ( file will be automatically copied into the “Images” folder of learning
       Module);
   •   URL - full URL of Flash-movie;
   •   Code - this option allows you to insert code from YouTube and similar services. Object
       will try to determine Flash-movie URL from this code. However, use this option with
       great care, because is potentially erroneous.

Be aware, that URL and Code options refer to external content, therefore this Flash-movie
becomes the subject for Flash Player security settings (cross-domain security).

Select the playing mode. Adobe Flash Player supports the following window modes for playing
the movie:
   •   Opaque, on top of all layers (Window Mode). Flash movie plays in its own virtual
       window in the Frame above the core browser display window, therefore no other objects

                                                                                            53
in the Frame can cover Flash-movie object. Background color for the Flash-movie
       precisely corresponds to the one selected by the user.
   •   Transparent layer (Transparent Mode). Flash movie plays in the separate layer of the
       Frame and overlaps other objects placed underneath. However, the objects placed on top
       can overlap Flash movie. In case the background color for the Frame is not defined by
       user and Flash movie has transparent areas, then the objects layered underneath will be
       showing through the transparent portions of the movie. However, be aware that
       transparent mode is resource consuming, animation performance might be slower.
   •   Opaque layer (Opaque Mode). Flash-movie plays in the separate layer of the Frame
       and overlaps other objects placed underneath. However, the objects placed on top can
       overlap Flash-movie. Compared to transparent mode Flash-movie in opaque mode will
       always have the background color defined, even if you do not explicitly specify
       Background color (White is default color).
If necessary, you can specify background color for the Flash-movie object.
       LIMITATION: During insertion of the Flash-movie object, the content for this object is
       unknown to the CourseLab editor; therefore Flash-movie placeholder will be displayed in
       the editing mode instead.

Object Methods
Flash-movie playback can be controlled using object’s built-in methods.



Method Name                    Execution Result

PLAY            Starts Flash-movie playback

STOP            Stops Flash-movie playback.

REWIND          Rewinds Flash-movie to the beginning frame.

PAUSE           Pauses Flash-movie playback.

CONTINUE        Continues Flash-movie playback (from PAUSE)



5.5.6.2. Shockwave-movie
Shockwave-movie object is used for playing Adobe Shockwave movies created using Adobe
Shockwave technology. Adobe Shockwave movie files have .dcr extension. Adobe Shockwave
technology is far more versatile than Flash. The wider range of features has a drawback in terms
of size of the Shockwave movie, complexity of creation, and requirement to have Adobe
Shockwave player installed. Although, Adobe Shockwave player is distributed free of charge, it
has a bigger size and it is less universal compared to Flash Player. Nevertheless, if you have a
Shockwave movie you can insert it into the Frame just as easy as Flash-movie.
       IMPORTANT! The Adobe Shockwave Player software should be installed on the
       computer for playing Shockwave-movies. You can get the latest free of charge version of
       Adobe Shockwave Player at http://www.adobe.com). To insure correct functionality of

                                                                                             54
the learning Course remember to turn on the feature, which checks whether or not
       Shockwave Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning
       Module (menu “Module – Runtime Settings – Checks”).
Insert Shockwave-movie object into the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Specify path to the Shockwave-movie file, which you are going to insert. Next, file will be
automatically copied into the “Images” folder of current learning Module.
       LIMITATION: During insertion of the Shockwave-movie object, the content for this
       object is unknown to the CourseLab editor; therefore movie placeholder will be displayed
       in the editing mode instead.



5.5.6.3. Video Clip

Video clip object is used for playing Video clips in the different formats.

Windows Media Player is used by default for playing MPEG, AVI, and WMV formats. For
FireFox browser family it is recommended to install lates version of Microsoft Windows Media
Player plugin from Port 25 Team (http://port25.technet.com/pages/windows-media-player-
firefox-plugin-download.aspx).

QuickTime Player is used by default for playing QuickTime MOV and 3gp formats. Note, that
QuickTime Player must be installed on learner's computer (free download at
http://www.apple.com/quicktime/).

Real Player is used by default for playing clips in Real Media RM, RAM and RPM files. Note
that RealMedia Player must be installed on learner's computer (free download at
http://www.real.com/).

       IMPORTANT! Additional software should be installed on the computer for playing video
       clips. To insure correct functionality of the learning Course remember to turn on the
       feature, which checks whether or not required software has been installed on the target


                                                                                             55
machine before loading the learning Module (“Module menu – Runtime Settings –
       Checks”).

       LIMITATION: During insertion of the Video clip object, the content for this object is
       unknown to the CourseLab editor; therefore Video clip placeholder will be displayed in
       the editing mode instead.

Insert Video clip object into the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Specify Video source. There are two options:

   •   File - then specify path to the Video clip file, which you are going to insert (file will be
       automatically copied into the “Images” folder of learning Module).
   •   URL - full URL to video file.

Be aware, that URL option refers to external content; therefore this Video clip becomes the
subject for browser security settings (cross-domain security).

Player selection option allows you to define desired player software explicitly. Note, that
depending on this option and selected video source object placeholder may change the
appearance. For example, this is Windows Media Player placeholder on the picture.




                                                                                                      56
Display of the player controls can be further adjusted.

In case Movie Autostart check box is selected, Video clip is launched as soon as it is loaded,
otherwise user should manually select “Play” button using video controls, or object methods.

Windowless mode enables to launch Windows Media Player as inline element (i.e. in this case it
can be overlapped by other objects), otherwise it will be launched in window mode (and by
default it cannot be overlapped by other objects). Note, that not all players and browsers support
windowless mode, however.

Invisible mode enables to launch player software as a hidden element. This mode may be useful
for playing audiofiles.

Object Events

Object “Video Clip” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and
interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed
for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of
the Object “Video Clip”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation
mechanism (yellow cells contain events used only for streaming media).

Reference in the Action
                                                      Triggered Upon
        Editor

Playing Tick               Fires every second while the player is playing media. Use it with
                           currentPosition property to create time-binded actions.

Change Play State          Fires at the moment when playing state of the media is changed (state
                           itself doesn't matter - just changed).

Play Stopped               At the moment when playing of media stops (no matter was it learner's
                           click or the end of media).

Play Paused                At the moment when playing of media becomes paused.

Play Started               At the moment when playing of media starts (position doesn't matter).



                                                                                                 57
Play Begin                 At the moment when playing of media starts from the beginning.

Play Resumed               At the moment when playing of media starts from the paused state.

End Of Media               At the moment when playing of media stops on the end of media.

Position Changed           Fires when current position is changed by slider control or method.

Media Changed              At the moment when player media is changed.

Media Error                At the moment when player generates media error.

Waiting Server Response At the moment when player starts for waiting server responce.

Reconnect To Server        At the moment when player starts reconnecting to server.

Start Buffering Media      At the moment when player starts buffering.

Preparing Media            At the moment when media is loaded and player starts preparing.

Media Is Ready             At the moment when media is loaded and player is ready to start.



Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

    Method name                                     Execution Result

PLAY                    Start playing clip.

STOP                    Stops playing clip.

PAUSE                   Pauses playing. Use PLAY method to continue from paused.

SET PROPERTY            Sets one of the player properties.

REPLACE MEDIA           Replaces video source of player.



Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID).
Note, that these properties are available only for Windows Media Player and QuickTime Player
(not for Real Player).


Property                                      Returns                         Syntax

autoStart               Returns 1 if AutoStart is set to true, 0 otherwise.   $OBJ_ID.autoStart


                                                                                                 58
mute                    Returns 1 if mute sound is set to true, 0 otherwise.   $OBJ_ID.mute

volume                  Returns current sound volume (range 0-100).            $OBJ_ID.volume

currentMedia            Returns current media name (if exists), empty string $OBJ_ID.currentM
                        otherwise.                                           edia

duration                Returns full media duration in seconds.                $OBJ_ID.duration

currentPosition         Returns current position in media in seconds.          $OBJ_ID.currentP
                                                                               osition

currentState            Returns current object state (tokens: "undefined",     $OBJ_ID.currentSt
                        "stopped", "paused", "playing" ,"forward",             ate
                        "backward", "buffering", "waiting", "ended",
                        "preparing", "ready", "reconnect").

url                     Returns current media URL if available.                $OBJ_ID.url

isOnline                (WMP only) Returns 1 if player object has access       $OBJ_ID.isOnline
                        to the network, 0 otherwise.



5.5.6.4. Java Applet
Java Applet object is used for inserting Java Applets into the learning Course.
       IMPORTANT! Java Virtual Machine should be installed on the computer for running
       Java Applets (free download at http://www.sun.com/). To insure correct functionality of
       the learning Course, remember to turn on the feature, which checks whether or not Java
       has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module (menu
       “Module – Runtime Settings – Checks”).
Insert Java Applet object into the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                                59
Specify path to the Java Applet, which you are going to insert. Depending on applet it can be
single JAR-archive or set of files. You should specify path to archive and main (start) file in first
case, and main class file and all additional files in second case. Next, Applet file(s) will be
automatically copied into the “Images” folder of current learning Module.




On the Parameters tab you can define horizontal and vertical margins (the space between the
Object border and actual Java Applet window), alternate text (will be displayed for the user, in
case Java environment is not installed), and applet parameters (will be transferred to applet
upon applet start).




                                                                                                  60
On the Java tab you can specify preferred Java Virtual Machine (Sun or Microsoft).
       LIMITATION: During insertion of the Java Applet, the content for this Applet is unknown
       to the CourseLab editor; therefore Java Applet placeholder will be displayed in the
       editing mode instead.




5.5.7. Navigation Objects
Navigation Objects enable transition among Slides and Frames. The majority of Navigation
objects have certain usage limitations, therefore be cautious when implementing.



5.5.7.1. Navigation Menu
Navigation Menu enables tracing of the current Slide name and an instant transition to another
Slide upon selecting its name (if there are no restrictions for such transition by other conditions)
       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Example of Navigation Menu appearance:


Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




You can modify different Navigation menu display settings.
The marker “Show Slide hierarchy” enables to modify display mode of the Slide’s structure in
the Module.


                                                                                                 61
Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the
Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the frame were
played back.
Strict slide order message will be displayed if the learner will try to jump more than one slide
further and strict slide order mode is enabled in Module run-time settings.

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                            Execution Result

DISABLE ACCESS                Restrict access to Navigation menu.

ENABLE ACCESS                 Permit access to Navigation menu.

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                               Returns                       Syntax

disabled           Returns 1 if object is currently disabled; 0      $OBJ_ID.disabled
                   otherwise.

selectedID         Returns ID of current Slide                       $OBJ_ID.selectedID

selectedName       Returns slidename of current Slide                $OBJ_ID.selectedName

selectedNumber     Returns number of current Slide                   $OBJ_ID.selectedNumber

totalEntries       Return total number of selector options           $OBJ_ID.totalEntries



5.5.7.2. Current Position

Current Position object enables tracing of the Slide number against the total number of Slides.

       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.

Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                                  62
By default, object displays the following label: “POSITION: N/M” (where N is a Slide number,
and M is a total number of Slides). You can modify text, divider, and some other display
parameters with respect to the overall design of the learning Module.


Example of Navigation Menu appearance:

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                              Returns                    Syntax

currentPosition      Returns number of current Slide             $OBJ_ID.currentPosition




5.5.7.3. “Contents” tab
Contents tab enables displaying the list of the Slide names within Module and transition to other
Slides by selecting their names (unless transition to selected Slide is in agreements with other
conditions).
       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                               63
On the Display tab you can specify tab’s displaying parameters. In case the default tab set is
used, you can select color, change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object,
and specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive tabs.
If default tab set marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs, change
object’s border size, and color.




                                                                                              64
On the Parameters tab you can specify additional parameters.
Use standard Slides icons marker enables you to replace Slide’s icons, if desired. The marker
“Show Slide hierarchy” enables to modify display mode of the Slide’s structure in the Module.
Besides, you can replace images, which represents hierarchy connectors, if desired. Strict
Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was
opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played
back. Strict slide order message will be displayed if the learner will try to jump more than one
slide further and strict slide order mode is enabled in Module run-time settings.
Example of Contents Tab appearance:




                                                                                             65
Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                           Execution Result

DISABLE ACCESS              Restrict access to Contents Tab.

ENABLE ACCESS               Permit access to Contents Tab.

OPEN TAB                    Opens Tab (if access is not disabled)

CLOSE TAB                   Closes Tab

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                 Returns                             Syntax

disabled   Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.           $OBJ_ID.disabled

open       Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise.               $OBJ_ID.open

5.5.7.4. “Help” tab
“Help” tab enables displaying the Help information block for the Module.




       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.


                                                                                              66
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.
On the Display tab you can specify tab’s displaying parameters. In case the default tab set is
used, you can select color, change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object,
and specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive tabs.
If default tab set marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs, change
object’s border size, and color.
On the Parameters tab you can modify label of the Help tab and insert Help text into the text
editable field.
Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the
Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame
were played back. By default, Strict Navigation Mode for the “Help” tab is turned off.




Example of Help Tab appearance:




                                                                                               67
Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                           Execution Result

DISABLE ACCESS              Restrict access to Contents Tab.

ENABLE ACCESS               Permit access to Contents Tab.

OPEN TAB                    Opens Tab (if access is not disabled)

CLOSE TAB                   Closes Tab

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                 Returns                             Syntax

disabled   Returns 1 if object is currently disabled; 0 otherwise.           $OBJ_ID.disabled

open       Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise.               $OBJ_ID.open




                                                                                              68
5.5.7.5. “Calculator” tab
 “Calculator” tab enables displaying the Calculator, which can be used for calculations inside
the Module.
       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




On the Display tab you can specify tab’s displaying parameters. In case the default tab set is
used, you can select color, change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object,
and specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive tabs.
If default tab set marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs, change
object’s border size, and color.




                                                                                               69
On the Parameters tab you can modify label of the “Calculator” tab and insert instructions on
using Calculator into the text-editable field.
Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the
Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame
were played back. By default, Strict Navigation Mode for the “Calculator” tab is turned off.
Example of Calculator Tab appearance:




                                                                                          70
Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                           Execution Result

DISABLE ACCESS              Restrict access to Contents Tab.

ENABLE ACCESS               Permit access to Contents Tab.

OPEN TAB                    Opens Tab (if access is not disabled)

CLOSE TAB                   Closes Tab

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                 Returns                              Syntax

disabled   Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.            $OBJ_ID.disabled

open       Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise.                $OBJ_ID.open

value      Returns current value from calculator display                      $OBJ_ID.value



5.5.7.6. “Settings” tab
“Settings” tab enables displaying current Settings for the Module.
        LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                               71
In case the default tab is used, you can select color, change vertical margin with relation to the
top border of the object, and specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled
tabs.

If default tab marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs, change
object’s border size, and color.

You can modify header of the Settings tab and insert description texts into the Rich Text fields.

Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the
Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame
were played back.




                                                                                                 72
On the Objectives tab you can select which Module parameters will be displayed.




                                                                                  73
On the Objectives terms tab you can define messages and tooltips that will be presented to
learner.




Example of Settings Tab appearance:




                                                                                             74
Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                           Execution Result

DISABLE ACCESS              Restrict access to Contents Tab.

ENABLE ACCESS               Permit access to Contents Tab.

OPEN TAB                    Opens Tab (if access is not disabled)

CLOSE TAB                   Closes Tab

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                 Returns                              Syntax

disabled   Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.            $OBJ_ID.disabled

open       Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise.                $OBJ_ID.open



5.5.7.7. “About” tab
“About” tab enables displaying the information text block for the Module
       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                               75
On the Display tab you can specify tab’s displaying parameters. In case the default tab set is
used, you can select color, change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object,
and specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive tabs.
If default tab set marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs, change
object’s border size, and color.




                                                                                              76
On the Parameters tab you can modify label of the Help tab and insert Help text into the Rich
Text editable field. Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from
the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel
of the Frame were played back. By default, Strict Navigation Mode for the “About Course” tab
is turned off.
Example of About Tab appearance:




Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                         Execution Result

DISABLE ACCESS             Restrict access to Contents Tab.

ENABLE ACCESS              Permit access to Contents Tab.

OPEN TAB                   Opens Tab (if access is not disabled)

CLOSE TAB                  Closes Tab


                                                                                            77
Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                 Returns                               Syntax

disabled    Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.            $OBJ_ID.disabled

open        Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise.                $OBJ_ID.open



5.5.7.8. “Next” Button
“Next” Button Object is a special object which enables transition to the next Slide.
       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




By default, standard “Next” button is used. In case you prefer to use different button, remove the
check mark “Use default button set”. Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active.
Use any graphic editor to create following four pictures:
   •   The first picture displays the button in enabled state (specify path to the image under
       “Enabled Button”)
   •   The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled
       button (specify path to the image under “OnMouseOver Button”).
   •   The third picture displays the disabled button (specify path to the image under “Disabled
       Button”)



                                                                                               78
•   The fourth picture displays the button being pressed (specify path to the image under
       “OnClick Button”)
You can specify mouse over tool tip messages for both enabled and disabled buttons.
Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the
Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame
were played back.
Example of Next Button appearance:

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                    Execution Result

DISABLE ACCESS                Restrict access to Button.

ENABLE ACCESS                 Permit access to Button.

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                Returns                               Syntax

disabled   Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.            $OBJ_ID.disabled



5.5.7.9. “Previous” Button
“Previous” Button Object is a special object, which enables transition to the previous Slide from
the current Slide.
       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                               79
By default, standard “Previous” button is used. In case you prefer to use different button, remove
the check mark “Use default button set”. Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active.
Use any graphic editor to create following four pictures:
   •   The first picture displays the button in enabled state (specify path to the image under
       “Enabled Button”)
   •   The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled
       button (specify path to the image under “OnMouseOver Button”).
   •   The third picture displays the disabled button (specify path to the image under “Disabled
       Button”)
   •   The fourth picture displays the button being pressed (specify path to the image under
       “OnClick Button”)
You can specify mouse over tool tip messages for both enabled and disabled buttons.
Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the
Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame
were played back.
Example      of     Previous      Button                    appearance:

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                    Execution Result

DISABLE ACCESS                 Restrict access to Button.

ENABLE ACCESS                  Permit access to Button.



                                                                                               80
Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                 Returns                               Syntax

disabled    Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.            $OBJ_ID.disabled




5.5.7.10. Slide Name

Slide Name object enables to automatically display the current Slide name defined in the Editor.

       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer (usually, located on the top portion
of the Master Slide, just like heading). Open “Properties” dialog screen.




There you can modify background color and font settings for the Slide Name with respect to the
overall design of the learning Module.
       LIMITATION: The Slide Name will be displayed completely only while playing the actual
       Course. Name substitute will be displayed in the editing mode instead.
Example of Slide Name appearance:




Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

                                                                                                81
Property                              Returns                         Syntax

slideName      Returns slidename of current Slide                     $OBJ_ID.slideName



5.5.7.11. “Sound” Button
“Sound” Button object is a special object, which enables turning on and off the audio feature of
the Module.
       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




By default, standard “Sound” button is used. In case you prefer to use different button, remove
the checkmark “Use default button set”. Fields for specifying path to the pictures become
enabled. Use any graphic editor to create following four pictures:
   •   The first picture displays the “Sound” button in On state and the button can be pressed to
       turn the Sound Off (specify path to the image under “Enabled Off Button”)
   •   The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled
       button (specify path to the image under “OnMouseOver Off Button”).
   •   The third picture displays the “Sound” button in “Off” state and the button can be pressed
       to turn the Sound On (specify path to the image under “Enabled On Button”)
   •   The fourth picture will replace the third one, in case user moves mouse over the enabled
       turn On button (specify path to the image under “OnMouseOver On Button”).

You can also specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive buttons.

Example of Sound Button appearance:

                                                                                               82
Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                             Execution Result

TOGGLE SOUND              Toggles sound on and off

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                              Returns                              Syntax

soundOn Returns 1 if object is sound is currently on, 0 otherwise.         $OBJ_ID.soundOn




5.5.7.12. “Close Module” Button
“Close Module” Button object is a special object, which enables correct closing of the learning
Module.
       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




By default, standard “Close Module” button is used. In case you prefer to use different button,
remove the checkmark “Use default button set”. Fields for specifying path to the pictures
become enabled. Use any graphic editor to create the following three pictures:
   •   The first picture displays the button in enabled state (specify path to the image under
       “Enabled Button”).
   •   The second picture will replace the first one when user navigate mouse over the button
       (specify path to the image under “OnMouseOver button”).
   •   The third picture will replace the second one when button is pressed (specify path to the
       image under “OnClick button”).


                                                                                               83
You can also specify mouse over tool tip messages for active button and notification text to be
displayed before closing the Module.


Example of Close Module Button appearance:

5.5.7.13. “Replay Slide” Button
“Replay Slide” Button object is a special object, which enables current Slide reloading (for
example, to repeat animation used in the Slide).
       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




By default, standard “Replay Slide” button is used. In case you prefer to use different button,
remove the checkmark “Use default button set”. Fields for specifying path to the pictures
become enabled. Use any graphic editor to create the following four pictures:

   •   The first picture displays the button in enabled state (specify path to the image under
       “Enabled Button”)
   •   The second picture will replace the first one, in case user moves mouse over the enabled
       button (specify path to the image under “OnMouseOver Button”).
   •   The third picture displays the button being pressed (specify path to the image under
       “OnClick Button”)
   •   The fourth picture displays the disabled button (specify path to the image under
       “Disabled Button”)
You can also specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive buttons.




                                                                                               84
Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the
Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame
were played back.

Example of Close Module Button appearance:

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using DISABLE ACCESS and ENABLE ACCESS
methods.

Method name                                    Execution Result

DISABLE ACCESS                Restrict access to Button.

ENABLE ACCESS                 Permit access to Button.

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                Returns                               Syntax

disabled   Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.            $OBJ_ID.disabled



5.5.7.14. “Simple” Progress Bar
“Simple” Progress Bar is a special object, which indicates amount of the visited Slides relative
to the overall amount of the Slides.
       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.
Example of Simple Progress Bar appearance:




                                                                                               85
By default, the standard Slide’s icons are used. If you wish to use different icons – uncheck the
marker. Fields for inserting pictures become available. Create 3 images using any graphical
editor:
   •   The first image will be displayed indicating already visited Slide.
   •   The second image will be displayed indicating the current Slide.
   •   The third image will be displayed indicating the Slides which are yet to be displayed.
You can also modify appearance parameters for background of the progress-indicator.




                                                                                                86
5.5.7.15. “Extended” Progress Bar
 “Extended” Progress Bar is a special object, which indicates amount of the visited Slides
relative to the overall amount of the Slides. Unlike “Simple” progress-indicator, “Extended”
Progress Bar displays the name of the current Slide; it also enables exploring the names of other
Slides and enables transition to them.
       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




By default, the standard Slide’s icons are used. If you wish to use different – uncheck the
marker. Fields for inserting pictures become available. Create 3 images using any graphical
editor:
   •   The first image will be displayed indicating/in the place of already visited Slide.
   •   The second image will be displayed indicating the current Slide.
   •   The third image will be displayed indicating the Slides which are yet to be displayed.
In case standard elements are used, you can modify their appearance.
You can also, modify appearance parameters for background of the progress-indicator.




                                                                                                87
On the Parameters tab you can specify which Slide parameters will be displayed.
Example of Extended Progress Bar appearance:


5.5.7.16. “Help” Popup Window
“Help” Popup window object enables display of the help content for the learning Module.
Object consists of two parts: button to call the object and popup window with help content. Only
“Help” button is visible in editing mode.
       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position “Help” button the way you prefer. Open “Properties”
dialog screen.




                                                                                             88
In the opened dialog you can select the base color for the object with respect to the overall
design of the learning Module. Also, you can modify title text and style.
You may input the Help content into the “Window text” field, which is in Rich Text Format
mode that enables insertion of the formatted text, tables, pictures, and so on. Please be advised
that width of the text area is limited; therefore avoid using tables and pictures that exceed 450
pixels in width. You can modify size and location of pop up Help window with respect to the
design of the learning Module, however, there are technical limitations for significant width and
height changes.
Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the
Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame
were played back.




On the Buttons tab you can specify buttons properties. In case “Use default button set” marker is
unchecked you can use custom images for displaying buttons.
You can also specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive buttons.




                                                                                              89
Example of Help Popup Window appearance:




Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using DISABLE ACCESS and ENABLE ACCESS
methods.

Method name                                    Execution Result

DISABLE ACCESS                Restrict access to Button.

ENABLE ACCESS                 Permit access to Button.

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                Returns                              Syntax

disabled   Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.           $OBJ_ID.disabled

open       Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise.               $OBJ_ID.open




                                                                                              90
5.5.7.17. “Contents” Popup Window

“Contents” popup window enables displaying current Module contents, indicates visited
Slides, and allows navigation within a Module. Object consists of two parts: button to call the
object and “Contents” popup window. Only “Contents” button is visible in editing mode.

       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position “Contents” button the way you prefer.           Open
“Properties” dialog screen.




In the opened dialog you can select the base color for the object with respect to the overall
design of the learning Module. Also, you can modify title text and style.
You can modify size and location of pop up Help window with respect to the design of the
learning Module; however there are technical limitations for significant width and height
changes.




                                                                                            91
On the Buttons tab you can specify buttons properties. In case ”Use default button set” marker is
unchecked you can use custom images for displaying buttons.
You can also specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive buttons.




On the Parameters tab you can specify displaying parameters. Use default slide icon set marker
enables you to replace Slide’s icons, if desired.

                                                                                              92
The marker “Show slide hierarchy” enables to modify display mode of the Slide’s structure in
the Module. Besides, you can replace images, which represents hierarchy connectors, if desired.
Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the
Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame
were played back.
Strict slide order message will be displayed if the learner will try to jump more than one slide
further and strict slide order mode is enabled in Module run-time settings.

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                          Execution Result

DISABLE ACCESS                Restrict access to Contents Tab.

ENABLE ACCESS                 Permit access to Contents Tab.

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                Returns                               Syntax

disabled   Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.            $OBJ_ID.disabled

open       Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise.                 $OBJ_ID.open


Example of Contents Popup Window appearance:




                                                                                               93
5.5.7.18. Frame Navigator
Frame Navigator is a special object, which indicates amount of the visited Frames in particular
Slide relative to the overall amount of the Frames in the Slide.
Add object to the Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                            94
By default, standard button set is used. In case you prefer to use different button, remove the
check mark “Use default button set”. Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active.
Use any graphic editor to create pictures.
Example of Frame Navigator objects appearance:



5.5.7.19. Comments Object

Comments object enables to automatically display comments to the current Slide, that defined by
the author (or imported from PowerPoint). Object default parameters are optimized for "Import"
templates (intended for importing PowerPoint presentations), but this is not limitation - object
can be used on any other template.

       LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.

Example of Comments object appearance:




                                                                                             95
Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it on the left window border. Open “Properties” dialog
screen.




In case the Use default comments tab is checked, then you can select default tab color, change
comments window size, specify mouse over tooltip messages and message, that appears when no
comments to slide is present. Note, that window background color will be used for all
comments, except for those imported from PowerPoint where background color is explicitly
specified in PowerPoint source.

If Use default comments tab marker is unchecked, then you can use custom images for
displaying tabs, change object’s border size, and color.

Checkmark Hide object on slides with no comments can be useful to attract learner attention. If
it is checked (default state), then object will appear only on slides where comments are present.

5.5.7.20. Comments Tab Object

Comments Tab object enables to automatically display comments to the current Slide, that
defined by the author (or imported from PowerPoint). Object default parameters are optimized
for "Standard" templates, but this is not limitation - object can be used on any other template.

LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE.

                                                                                                   96
Examples of Comments Tab object appearance:




Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it on the left window border. Open “Properties” dialog
screen.




In case the Use default comments tab is checked, then you can select default tab color, specify
mouse over tooltip messages and message, that appears when no comments to slide is present.
Note, that window background color will be used for all comments, except for those imported
from PowerPoint where background color is explicitly specified in PowerPoint source.

If Use default comments tab marker is unchecked, then you can use custom images for
displaying tabs, change comments window size, change object’s border color.



                                                                                              97
5.5.8. Characters

5.5.8.1. “Agent” Character
“Agent” is an animated character with a set of basic actions; these actions can be launched using
Object’s methods.
       IMPORTANT! The Agent is created using Adobe Flash technology, thus make sure to
       turn on the feature, which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the
       target machine before loading the learning Module.
Example of Agent appearance:




You can specify Agent’s appearance and display parameters (similar to Flash-movie display
settings, in fact Agent is a Flash-movie).




Agent control
Use methods of the objects to control Agent.
By default, Agent is displayed in “idle” mode for indefinite period of time. Object methods, i.e.
functions embedded in the object, which modify the state of the Agent, are used to control
Agent. Please see example provided below.




                                                                                              98
Picture the situation when we have both question and Agent character presented in the Slide. The
Agent’s task is to applaud when provided answer to the question is correct. Here is the sequence
of the necessary actions:
   1. Memorize character ID and open “Actions” screen for the “Question” object.
   2. Select “Correct Answer” in the “Event” panel.
   3. Select “METHOD” in the “Action” panel.
   4. Specify parameters for the selected action – select character ID; in the “Select Method”
      screen specify “ACTION” with the following parameters: “Applaud” and “Return upon
      completion”. Confirm your choice. At this point, configuration of the relationship among
      the objects is completed.




                                                                                             99
In the described example the event of the “Question” object has been used for launching Action.
However, any other events or delayed actions can be employed for the very same purpose.
Object methods
The following methods can be used when working with Agent Character:
   •   ACTION – forces Agent to execute some of the actions defined in the object. It has 2
       parameters: action itself, which needs to be executed and option for returning back to the
       idle state (Agent can automatically return to the idle state or remain in the current state
       awaiting the return command).

                                                                                              100
•   RETURN TO THE IDLE STATE – takes Agent back to the idle mode.
   •   SHOW/HIDE – is used to turn on/off display of the object with effects.
   •   TELEPORTATION - relocates Agent into the specified by coordinates location using
       effects.
Let us review “ACTION” method in greater details. Almost all actions embedded into the object
have 2 execution phases: action execution and return to idle state. When you select automatic
return into the idle mode, above mentioned action phases will be automatically executed
consequently one after another. When we select wait for signal to return to idle mode, only the
first phase - execution of the action itself is launched; return to idle mode phase is postponed
until you use “RETURN TO THE IDLE STATE” method, or by launching any other action (in
this case, before the new action can be executed object returns to the idle state automatically).
Things to consider, when working with actions:
Actions: Talk, Walk left/right cannot automatically return to the idle mode. Agent will continue
talking and walking until ordered to terminate action.
Such actions as Yawn, Head-nod in agreement, Head-shake in disagreement (so called
simple actions, marked with *), will always return to the idle state upon completion.


Sequence of actions
In case agent receives command for new action while it is not in the idle mode, meaning it is in
the process of completion of previous action, such command is stored in the agent’s “commands
queue” and new action is postponed until the previous one is finishing execution. The
“Command queue” of the “Agent” role is based on the FIFO (First In First Out) data handling
concept: i.e. each new incoming action command is added to the end of the execution line.
Therefore, by employing “Command queue” you can create any sequence of actions for the
character.


5.5.8.2. “Talking Head” Character
Talking Head is an animated character with a set of basic actions; these actions can be launched
using Object’s methods.
       IMPORTANT! The Talking Head is created using Adobe Flash technology, thus make
       sure to turn on the feature, which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed
       on the target machine before loading the learning Module.
Example of Talking Head appearance:




                                                                                             101
You can specify Talking Head’s appearance and display parameters (similar to Flash-movie
display settings, in fact it is a Flash-movie).




Talking Head control
Use methods of the objects to control Talking Head.
By default, Talking Head is displayed in “idle” mode for indefinite period of time. Object
methods, i.e. functions embedded in the object, which modify the state of the Agent, are used to
control Talking Head. Please see example provided below.




                                                                                            102
Picture the situation when we have both question and Talking Head character presented in the
Slide. The Talking Head’s task is to amaze when provided answer to the question is incorrect.
Here is the sequence of the necessary actions:

   1.   Memorize character ID and open "Actions" screen for the "Question" object.
   2.   Select "Correct Answer" in the "Event" panel.
   3.   Select "METHOD" in the "Action" panel.
   4.   Specify parameters for the selected action – select character ID; in the "Select Method"
        screen specify "ACTION" with the following parameters: "Amazement" and "Automatic"
        return to idle state. Confirm your choice. At this point, configuration of the relationship
        among the objects is completed.

In the above described example the event of the "Question" object has been used for launching
Action. However, any other events or delayed actions can be employed for the very same
purpose.




                                                                                               103
104
In the described example the event of the “Question” object has been used for launching Action.
However, any other events or delayed actions can be employed for the very same purpose.


Object methods

The following methods can be used when working with Talking Head Character:

   •   ACTION – forces Talking Head to execute some of the actions defined in the object. It
       has 2 parameters: action itself, which needs to be executed and option for returning back
       to the idle state (Talking Head can automatically return to the idle state or remain in the
       current state awaiting the return command).
   •   RETURN TO IDLE – takes Talking Head back to the idle mode.
   •   TELEPORT - relocates Talking Head into the specified by coordinates location using
       effects.

Let us review "ACTION" method in greater details. Almost all actions embedded into the object
have 2 execution phases: action execution and return to idle state. When you select automatic
return into the idle mode, above mentioned action phases will be automatically executed
consequently one after another. When we select wait for signal to return to idle mode, only the
first phase - execution of the action itself is launched; return to idle mode phase is postponed
until you use "RETURN TO IDLE" method, or by launching any other action (in this case,
before the new action can be executed object returns to the idle state automatically).

Things to consider, when working with actions:

Action Talk cannot automatically return to the idle mode. Talking Head will continue talking
until ordered to terminate action.

                                                                                              105
Such actions as Agree, Disagree (so called simple actions, marked with *), will always return
to the idle state upon completion.

Sequence of actions

In case Talking Head receives command for new action while it is not in the idle mode, meaning
it is in the process of completion of previous action, such command is stored in the Talking
Head’s "commands queue" and new action is postponed until the previous one is finishing
execution. The "Command queue" of the "Talking Head" character is based on the FIFO (First In
First Out) data handling concept: i.e. each new incoming action command is added to the end of
the execution line.

Therefore, by employing "Command queue" you can create any sequence of actions for the
character.

5.5.9. Lists

5.5.9.1. Bulleted List

Bulleted List object is used for creating sequentially appearing list of statements. It contains the
list of items with built-in display manipulation mechanisms.

       IMPORTANT! Since Bulleted list object contains built-in display mechanisms, the actual
       duration might not be in accordance with the duration specified in the Time panel for the
       Frame.

Example of Bulleted list appearance:




Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure and
amount of text. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                                  106
Set button top margin (if you plan to use it) and divider lines between list items.

Fill in the statements list. You can select bullet type and other appearance parameters for each
list item.




Select “Display mode” tab in “Properties” dialog screen to set parameters of item displaying.


                                                                                                107
Depending on selected display mode parameters list on this tab will be different. Default mode is
On user click (this mode include text link, form and image buttons - all controls that activated
with mouse click). Define button or link parameters.




In Delayed auto mode the only available parameter is Item display delay (in seconds).




                                                                                             108
Third mode - On external call - means that no list controls will be displayed and items will
appear only when object's method NEXT ITEM will be used. The only parameter here is
Display first item automatically.




                                                                                               109
Select “Effects” tab.




                        110
In case “Use Transitions” check box is marked, you can choose any of the standard transition
effects. Positive numbers (greater than 0) are used to set Time of the transition in seconds.
   LIMITATIONS: Due to lack of transition support in some browsers, transition effects
   might be substituted to closest available in browsers other than Internet Explorer.

Object Events
Object “Bulleted List” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and
interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed
for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of
the Object “Bulleted List”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the Action Editor                              Triggered Upon

On Display Item                          At the moment when Item begins to display

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                        Execution Result


                                                                                             111
NEXT ITEM               Start displaying of next item in queue.

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                Returns                          Syntax

lastItem         Returns number of last displayed item.                  $OBJ_ID.lastItem

nextItem         Returns number of next displayed item.                  $OBJ_ID.nextItem

totalItems       Returns total number of items.                          $OBJ_ID.totalItems



5.5.9.2. “Simple” List

Simple List object is used for creating sequentially appearing list of statements. It contains the
list of items with built-in display manipulation mechanisms.

       IMPORTANT! Since Simple list object contains built-in display mechanisms, the actual
       duration might not be in accordance with the duration specified in the Time panel for the
       Frame.

Example of Simple list appearance:




Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure and
amount of text. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                                112
Fill in the statements list. You can select item appearance parameters for each list item.




Select “Display mode” tab in “Properties” dialog screen to set parameters of item displaying.

Depending on selected display mode parameters list on this tab will be different. Default mode is
On user click (this mode include text link, form and image buttons - all controls that activated
with mouse click). Define button or link parameters.

                                                                                                113
In Delayed auto mode the only available parameter is Item display delay (in seconds).




                                                                                        114
Third mode - On external call - means that no list controls will be displayed and items will
appear only when object's method NEXT ITEM will be used. The only parameter here is
Display first item automatically.




                                                                                               115
Select “Effects” tab.




                        116
In case “Use Transitions” check box is marked, you can choose any of the standard transition
effects. Positive numbers (greater than 0) are used to set Time of the transition in seconds.
   LIMITATIONS: Due to lack of transition support in some browsers, transition effects
   might be substituted to closest available in browsers other than Internet Explorer.

Object Events
Object “Simple List” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and
interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed
for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of
the Object “Simple List”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the Action Editor                              Triggered Upon

On Display Item                          At the moment when Item begins to display

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                        Execution Result



                                                                                             117
NEXT ITEM              Start displaying of next item in queue.

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                               Returns                         Syntax

lastItem        Returns number of last displayed item.                 $OBJ_ID.lastItem

nextItem        Returns number of next displayed item.                 $OBJ_ID.nextItem

totalItems      Returns total number of items.                         $OBJ_ID.totalItems




5.5.9.3. “Standard” List
 “Standard” List object is used for creating sequentially appearing list of statements. Object
consists of “Standard” list items. It contains the list of items with built-in display manipulation
mechanisms.

       IMPORTANT! Since Standard list object contains built-in display mechanisms, the actual
       duration might not be in accordance with the duration specified in the Time panel for the
       Frame.

Example of Standard list appearance:




Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure and
amount of text. Open “Properties” dialog screen (Double click on object or select “Properties”
item from the context menu).




                                                                                               118
Select border color for the list items with respect to the overall design.
Select marker type for the list Item.
Input text for the list items.
Specify value for inner margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the window
and text block.
Select “Display” tab in “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                      119
Object enables displaying the list of items either consecutively, in automatic mode with user
defined time delays or by accepting user input in a form of pressed button or clicked text link.
On external call mode means that no list controls will be displayed and items will appear only
when object's method NEXT ITEM will be used. The only parameter here is Display first item
automatically.

Select “Effects” tab.




                                                                                             120
In case “Use Transitions” check box is marked, you can choose any of the standard transition
effects. Positive numbers (greater than 0) are used to set Time of the transition in seconds.
   LIMITATIONS: Due to lack of transition support in some browsers, transition effects
   might be substituted to closest available in browsers other than Internet Explorer.

Object Events
Object “Standard List” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and
interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed
for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of
the Object “Standard List”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the Action Editor                              Triggered Upon

On Display Item                          At the moment when Item begins to display

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                        Execution Result


                                                                                             121
NEXT ITEM               Start displaying of next item in queue.

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                Returns                         Syntax

lastItem         Returns number of last displayed item.                 $OBJ_ID.lastItem

nextItem         Returns number of next displayed item.                 $OBJ_ID.nextItem

totalItems       Returns total number of items.                         $OBJ_ID.totalItems




5.5.9.4. “Standard” Block-List
“Standard” Block-List object is used for creating lists of semantically related block statements,
which will be displayed simultaneously. Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an
object in relation to the Frame structure and amount of text.
Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Select border color for the list block with respect to the overall design.
Select marker type for the list Item.
Input text for the list items.


                                                                                             122
Specify value for inner margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the window
and text block.
Example of Standard Block-List appearance:




5.5.9.5. “Standard” List Item
Standard List Item object is used for creating Lists, which contain clearly highlighted statements.
Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure and
amount of text. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Select border color of item with respect to the overall design.
Select marker type for the List Item.
Input text for the list item.
Specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the window and
text block.
Example of Standard List Item appearance:




5.5.9.6. “Simple” List Item
Simple List Item object is used for creating Lists, which contain clearly highlighted statements.

                                                                                               123
Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure and
amount of text. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Select item background color and border color with respect to the overall design.
Select marker type for the List Item.
Input text for the list item.
Specify value for inner margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the window
and text block.
Example of Simple List Item appearance:




5.5.10. Text Boxes

5.5.10.1. Shadow Text Box
Shadow Text Box object enables placing desired text box with modified display settings
(including shadow effects). Compared to embedded regular text box, Shadow Text Box enables
using special effects for text appearance.
       IMPORTANT! Internet Explorer 5.5 and above should be used for correct shading
       display, however, text box will be visible in older versions of browser.
Add object to the Frame. By default, object is placed in the center of the Frame. Adjust size and
position an object with respect to the prospective Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog
screen.




                                                                                              124
To input text into the text box, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input
area of the Text box is Rich Text, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved
as you type the text in.
If desired, modify value for inner margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the
box and text.
You can change text box background color.
You can modify style, color, and width for the text box border.
Finally, you can modify opacity of the main box. Please be advised that any changes applied to
the opacity, affects the border of the text box as well. In case text box Shading is on, it is not
recommended to use opacity less than 100%.




                                                                                                 125
Use “Shadow” tab to specify display settings for shading effect. The key control is “Display Box
Shadow” check box. In case “Display Box Shadow” check box is not marked then all other
settings are disabled for editing
In case text box Shading is on, you can specify vertical and horizontal Shadow Shift with
relation to the main box as well as opacity. We recommend using opacity of 40%, which is a
default opacity value.
The next check box is “Shadow copies the main box”. In case this check box is marked, such
shading box settings as background color, style, color, and width of the box border will be
copied from the main box settings (it will look more natural when combined with 40% opacity).
However, if you need to change shading display with regards to main block, you can uncheck the
“Shadow copies the main box” check box, then shading box settings become available for
editing.




                                                                                            126
On the “Effects” tab you can enable character iteration display mode for the text in the main box.
In this case you can specify text occurrence frequency rate.
Example of Shadow Text Box appearance:




5.5.10.2. “Relief” Text Box

Relief Text Box enables placing the desired text into the box with convex border. Compared to
embedded regular text box, this Text Box enables using special effects and scrolling for text
occurrence.

       Note, that this object is capable to make text substitution in Rich Text. Text substitutions
       can be variable values and object properties. Because Rich Text format is quite complex,
       additional markers for substitution area are used - double curle brackets. Text
       substitutions will be applied only for double curle brackets areas. For example
       {{$OBJ_19.x}} will be substituted by value of X coordinate of OBJ_19 object's top-left
       corner, and {{#att_left}}will be substituted by value of CourseLab variable named
       att_left. If no substitution is found, all double curle brackets area will remain intact.

Example of Relief Text Box objects appearance:




                                                                                                127
Add object to the Frame. By default, object is placed in the center of the Frame. Adjust size and
position an object with respect to the prospective Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog
screen.




Select color of the box border with respect to the overall design.
To input text into the text box, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input
area of the Text box is Rich Text, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved
as you type the text in.
If needed, modify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between box border and
text. By default, text margin is equal to 5 pixels. Set Overflow style if needed - default value
Autoscroll is suitable for most cases.
If appropriate checkbox is marked, text box can be closed on mouse click anywhere within a
box.




                                                                                                 128
On the “Effects” tab you can enable character iteration display mode for the text in the main box.
In this case you can specify text occurrence frequency rate.

Object Events
Object is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the
actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up
intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the Action
                                                          Triggered Upon
Editor

Object Closed                   Object is closed

Text Refreshed                  After text is refreshed

Text Added                      After text is added

Typewriter End                  After the moment when typewriter effect types last text character.

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                           Execution Result

CLOSE OBJECT              Closes the object.

RESIZE OBJECT             Changes the size of the object. Note, that top-left corner position of the
                          object is fixed.

REFRESH TEXT              Refreshes the text in the object, Can be useful if the text contains
                          dynamically changed substitutes.

ADD TEXT                  Adds the text to the current text. Note, that the style of closest
                          paragraph will be used for new text.



5.5.10.3. “Simple” Text Box

Simple Text Box enables placing the desired text into the box with optional border and different
scrolling settings. Compared to embedded regular text box, this Text Box enables using scrolling
and special effects for text occurrence.

       Note, that this object is capable to make text substitution in Rich Text. Text substitutions
       can be variable values and object properties. Because Rich Text format is quite complex,
       additional markers for substitution area are used - double curle brackets. Text
       substitutions will be applied only for double curle brackets areas. For example
       {{$OBJ_19.x}} will be substituted by value of X coordinate of OBJ_19 object's top-left
       corner, and {{#att_left}}will be substituted by value of CourseLab variable named
       att_left. If no substitution is found, all double curle brackets area will remain intact.


                                                                                                   129
Example of Simple Text Box objects appearance:




Add object to the Frame. By default, object is placed in the center of the Frame. Adjust size and
position an object with respect to the prospective Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog
screen.




Select color and other settings of the box border with respect to the overall design.

To input text into the text box, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input
area of the Text box is Rich Text, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved
as you type the text in.

If needed, modify value for inner margin. Inner margin defines the space between box border
and text. By default, text margin is equal to 5 pixels. Set Overflow style if needed - default value
Autoscroll is suitable for most cases.

If appropriate checkbox is marked, text box can be closed on mouse click anywhere within a
box.




                                                                                                 130
On the “Effects” tab you can enable character iteration display mode for the text in the main box.
In this case you can specify text occurrence frequency rate.

Object Events
Object is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the
actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up
intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the Action
                                                          Triggered Upon
Editor

Object Closed                   Object is closed

Text Refreshed                  After text is refreshed

Text Added                      After text is added

Typewriter End                  After the moment when typewriter effect types last text character.

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                           Execution Result

CLOSE OBJECT         Closes the object.

RESIZE OBJECT Changes the size of the object. Note, that top-left corner position of the
              object is fixed.

REFRESH TEXT         Refreshes the text in the object, Can be useful if the text contains
                     dynamically changed substitutes.


                                                                                                   131
ADD TEXT             Adds the text to the current text. Note, that the style of closest paragraph
                     will be used for new text.




5.5.11. Form Controls

5.5.11.1. Text Field
Text Field enables user to input text using keyboard. Inserted values are accessible in a form of
variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions.
Example of Text Field appearance:




Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure.
Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Specify variable name, which will be used for storing user input.
       LIMITATION: Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters, and numbers,
       and must not start with a digit. Variable names must be unique within a Slide.
If necessary, specify default text, which will be displayed in the field once the Object loads up.
If necessary, you may set restrictions on user-input length of value in characters.

                                                                                                132
Use “Display Settings” tab to specify the field’s appearance.

Object Events
Object “Text Field” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and
interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed
for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of
the Object “Text Field”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the Action
                                                            Triggered Upon
Editor

On Leave Field                   At the moment when text is inserted and cursor leaves field

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                         Execution Result

DISABLE INPUT               Restrict access to input field.

ENABLE INPUT                Permit access to input field.

SET VALUE                   Set input field value

Object Specific Properties


                                                                                               133
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                 Returns                                Syntax

disabled    Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.             $OBJ_ID.disabled

value       Returns current input field value.                                  $OBJ_ID.value




5.5.11.2. Hidden Text Field
Hidden Text Field enables user to input text or numbers using keyboard. At display input text is
replaced with bullets. Moving forward, inserted values are accessible in a form of variables
within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions.

Example of Hidden Text Field appearance:

Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure.
Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Specify variable name, which will be used for storing user’s input.
        LIMITATION: Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters, and numbers,
        and must not start with a digit. Variable names must be unique within a Slide.
If necessary, specify default text, which will be displayed in the field once the Object loads up.
If necessary, you may set restrictions on user-input length of value in characters.



                                                                                               134
Use “Display Settings” tab to specify the field’s appearance.

Object Events
Object “Hidden Text Field” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and
interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed
for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of
the Object “Hidden Text Field”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the Action
                                                            Triggered Upon
Editor

On Leave Field                   At the moment when text is inserted and cursor leaves field

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                         Execution Result

DISABLE INPUT               Restrict access to input field.

ENABLE INPUT                Permit access to input field.

SET VALUE                   Set input field value

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):


                                                                                               135
Property                                Returns                             Syntax

disabled   Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.          $OBJ_ID.disabled

value      Returns current input field value.                               $OBJ_ID.value




5.5.11.3. Text Area
Text Area enables user to enter large amount of text using keyboard. Moving forward, inserted
values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different
actions.
Example of Text Area appearance:




Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure.
Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Specify variable name, which will be used for storing user’s input.
        LIMITATION: Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters, and numbers,
        and must not start with a digit. Variable names must be unique within a Slide.



                                                                                           136
If necessary, specify default text, which will be displayed in the text area once the Object loads
up.
If necessary, specify text wrapping rules. The default behavior for Text Area is to automatically
move to a new line, once the length of text line exceeds the right margin. This is rather “Virtual”
text wrapping, in fact, if you enlarge Text Area text will wrap at the different position. Other
wrapping rules:
   •   Automatically move to a new line and insert CRLF (carriage return /line feed) character,
       once the length of text line exceeds the right margin. If Text Area is enlarged, wrap point
       will remain at the same position.
   •   Move to a new line only when “Enter” button is pressed, otherwise, horizontal scroll bar
       will be displayed, once the length of text line exceeds the right margin.
       Note: By pressing the “Enter” key, “Hard Return” is inserted in either one of the above
       mentioned cases.




Use “Display Settings” tab to specify the Text Area display.

Object Events
Object “Text Area” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and
interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed
for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of
the Object “Text Area”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the Action
                                                         Triggered Upon
Editor

On Leave Field                   At the moment when text is inserted and cursor leaves field

                                                                                               137
Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                         Execution Result

DISABLE INPUT               Restrict access to input field.

ENABLE INPUT                Permit access to input field.

SET VALUE                   Set input field value

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                Returns                              Syntax

disabled   Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.           $OBJ_ID.disabled

value      Returns current input field value.                                $OBJ_ID.value




5.5.11.4. CheckBox
CheckBox enables user making Yes/No selections. Inserted values are accessible in a form of
variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions.
Example of CheckBox appearance:



Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure.
Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                            138
Specify variable name, which will be used for storing user’s input.
       LIMITATION: Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters, and numbers,
       and must not start with a digit. Variable names must be unique within a Slide.
Specify value for the variable, in case user marks CheckBox.
Specify initial condition, which is whether or not CheckBox is marked after Object loads up.




Use “Display Settings” tab to specify the CheckBox display.

The essential CheckBox is “Show description”. In case it is not marked, all other tab parameters
are disabled for editing, therefore only CheckBox will be displayed on the Slide.

In case “Show description” CheckBox is selected, you can input description text into the field,
which is in Rich Text Format mode. If needed, modify value for text margin. Text margin
defines the space between CheckBox border and text. Additionally, you can specify position
(right or left) of the text description with regards to the CheckBox.

Object Events
Object “CheckBox” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and
interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed
for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of
the Object “CheckBox”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the
                                                    Triggered Upon
Action Editor

On Check                User sets checkmark

On Uncheck              User removes checkmark

On Change State         User sets or removes checkmark. This event is triggered right before
                        events mentioned above.

                                                                                               139
Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                    Execution Result

DISABLE INPUT               Restrict access to checkbox.

ENABLE INPUT                Permit access to checkbox.

SET STATE                   Set checkbox state

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                Returns                              Syntax

disabled   Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.           $OBJ_ID.disabled

value      Returns 1 if object is currently checked, 0 otherwise.            $OBJ_ID.value




5.5.11.5. Group of Radio Buttons
Group of Radio Buttons enables user making single Yes/No selection for one out of several
values. Inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be
employed in different actions.
Example of Group of Radio Buttons appearance:




Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure.
Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                            140
Specify variable name, which will be used for storing user’s input.
       LIMITATION: Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters, and numbers,
       and must not start with a digit. Variable names must be unique within a Slide.
Fill in the list of possible variable values. Open Input screen by clicking on the “+” icon. Enter
the text description for the selected value into the field, which is in Rich Text Format mode.
Specify value for the variable, in case user marks Radio Button.
Specify initial condition, which is whether or not Radio Button is checked after Module loads
up.
       LIMITATION: No more than one value should be initially selected for this type of object.




Use “Display” tab to specify the Radio Button display.



                                                                                              141
The essential CheckBox is “Show description”. In case it is not marked, all other tab parameters
are disabled for editing, therefore only Radio Buttons will be displayed on the Slide.

In case “Show description” CheckBox is selected, description text of radio buttons will be
displayed. If needed, modify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between
Radio Button and text. Additionally, you can specify position (right or left) of the text
description with regards to the Radio Buttons.

Object Events
Object “Group of Radio Buttons” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions
and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be
employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current
state of the Object “Group of Radio Buttons”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the Action Editor                                 Triggered Upon

On Change State                             User sets checkmark on Radio Button.

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                       Execution Result

DISABLE INPUT               Restrict access to radio group.

ENABLE INPUT                Permit access to radio group.

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                Returns                              Syntax

disabled   Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise.           $OBJ_ID.disabled

value      Returns value of currently checked radio button.                  $OBJ_ID.value



5.5.11.6. Drop-down Menu
Drop-down Menu enables user making single choice selections out of a multiple values.
Inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in
different actions.
Example of Drop-down Menu appearance:




                                                                                            142
Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure.
Open “Properties” dialog screen.




Specify variable name, which will be used for storing user’s input.
       LIMITATION: Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters, and numbers,
       and must not start with a digit. Variable names must be unique within a Slide.
Fill in the list of possible variable values. Open Input/Edit screen by clicking on the “+” icon.
Enter the text description for the selected value into the field.
Specify value for the variable, in case user selects particular menu item.
Specify initial condition, which is whether or not Menu-Item is selected after Module loads up.
       LIMITATION: No more than one value should be initially selected for this type of object.




                                                                                             143
Use “Display” tab to specify the Drop-down menu display.
       Note: these settings will affect all menu-items.

Object Events
Object is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the
actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up
intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the Action Editor                                       Triggered Upon

On Select Item                                            User selects Menu Item

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                        Execution Result

DISABLE INPUT                Restrict access to input field.

ENABLE INPUT                 Permit access to input field.

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                 Returns                         Syntax


                                                                                                   144
disabled           Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0        $OBJ_ID.disabled
                   otherwise.

value              Returns currently selected value.                   $OBJ_ID.value

selectedName       Returns currently selected item description.        $OBJ_ID.selectedName




5.5.11.7. Button
Pressed Button enables triggering of the previously created actions.
Example of Button appearance:



Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure.
Open “Properties” dialog screen.




The only parameter on the first tab to fill is the button label.




                                                                                           145
Use “Display” tab to specify the Button display.

5.5.12. Simulations
 “Simulation” group of objects includes special objects, which enable creation of the tests for the
correct sequence of actions based on the software simulations.


5.5.12.1. “Task controller” object
 “Task controller” object is a special object, which contains correct scenario for the multi step
interactive task. Object is not visible to the student.
“Task controller” object works in close cooperation with “Test Structure” object by forwarding
the status information about completion of the exercise.

       LIMITATIONS: Only one “Task controller”objects per Slide.

Since this is invisible object, allocation within a Slide does not matter. Open “Properties” dialog
screen.




                                                                                               146
On the “Task” tab fill in fields that are specific to task.
Task ID is unique within module identifier of the task (for example, it can be assembled using
identifiers of the Chapter, Topic, and so on).
Chapter/Topic/Group ID – indicates the level of test structure hierarchy.
Marker “Mandatory” – if selected, then specified exercise will have the best chances to be
included into the collection of the tasks, which will be offered to the user at the start up of the
test (depends on the method of the selection specified for the Test Structure object).
Attributes are additional parameters independent of the Chapter/Topic/Group hierarchy. These
parameters are used when building more complicated selections of tasks upon test start up.




                                                                                               147
The step by step task instructions are described on the “Task sequence” tab. Step is one
necessary action performed by the user (mouse click or text input).




                                                                                    148
Right after the Slide is launched, the object is waiting for the user’s response for conditions of
the first step. In case condition was successfully fulfilled by the user, object automatically
switches its mode to the waiting mode for the user to provide response for the next step
conditions, and so on, until the sequence of the correct steps is performed.
Step parameters
Step ID is used to specify step in the list of steps. It should be unique within one task.
Number of attempts – defines the number of unsuccessful tries, after reaching this limit, task
execution will be ended with failure.
Time limit on step – terminate task execution, if user exceeds the time allocated for the step
completion (it is recommended to use only if necessary).
Check on the next step – verification check for the current step will be “postponed” and will be
executed for both current and next step together. Such verification method is typically used for
the text fields input (it is almost impossible to correctly define the moment when user is finished
with its input. Hence, verification is only performed, for example, when user presses “OK”
button on the next step).
Step can have “multiple paths”: one or more different correct variants of the actions can be
defined. Let us review how to specify the action variant.




Variant ID is unique identifier within a step.
Check marker defines whether or not certain event (for example, mouse click or keyboard input)
will be checked.
Source – defines identifier of the event’s source (source identifier is used for calling action
METHOD – REDIRECT ACTION of the Test Structure object) or source of the text being
verified (in this case, source identifier is a variable name of the text field).
In case check text input is selected, then both fields for the checked string and “Match Case”
marker become accessible.

                                                                                               149
If upon completion of the action, which corresponds to certain alternative, it is necessary to
switch to the waiting mode for the action different from the next in the line from the list of steps,
then it is possible to precisely specify identifiers of the step and variant, waiting mode for which
needs to be established. In case these fields are not filled, the transition to the next step occurs
(default behavior). In case only “Next Step” field is filled the system will be awaiting for all
possible variants of this step to be executed. In case both fields are filled, the system will be
awaiting only for specified variant of specified step to be executed.




On the Scoring tab you can specify one or more objectives to which task score will be recorded.
Note, that you can specify different values for objectives.
Object events
“Task Structure” object is a complex type of object, which is capable of generating events,
depending on user’s actions and also depending on the interpretation of these actions by the
object. In combination with actions these events can be employed for building up intellectual
behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the object
                                                    Triggered Upon
Reference in the
 Action Editor
On Attempt          At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation
On Success          At the moment of action (step) evaluation, in case the action is correct.
On Failure          At the moment of action (step) evaluation, in case the action is incorrect.
On Step End         At the moment of current step completion, before transition to the waiting
                    mode for the next step.
On Attempts Limit After action (step) evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to
                  zero.
On Task End         Task completion is finished (no matter how successful or unsuccessful it
                    was).

                                                                                                  150
5.5.12.2. “Test Structure” object
 “Test Structure” object is a special object, which manages tasks selection and display with
regards to predefined conditions. This object appears in a form of the “Next Question” button.



 “Test Structure” object functions in close cooperation with “Task Controller” objects by
receiving from them the status information about completion of the task.
       LIMITATIONS: This object must be located only on the Master Slide.
Insert object into the Slide. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




The Chapter List contains the list of Chapters headings to which tasks are linked. You can
define the number of questions to be displayed for each chapter and for every topic within a
chapter.
       ATTENTION! IDs of the chapters used for selecting tasks, must precisely match IDs
       used for tasks specifications.
Attributes are additional filters independent of the Chapter/Topic/Group hierarchy. These filters
will be applied to selections of tasks.
Task selection – method of selection, which will be used for building test during Module
launching.
   •   Standard selection – specifically corresponds to the chosen number of the tasks from
       each topic/chapter.



                                                                                             151
•   Mandatory selection – selects all tasks marked as mandatory from each topic/chapter. In
       addition, if quantity allowance is not exceeded, selection will supplement with other
       additional tasks.
   •   All groups selection – selects single question from each group.
   •   Fast selection – selects single question from each chapter, and is used for tuning
       purposes.


Object methods

 Reference in the Action Editor                           Execution Method

REDIRECT ACTION                      Any action that needs to be verified is forwarded into the
                                     Test Structure object, which automatically defines current
                                     Task Controller object and redirects action to it.




5.5.12.3. “Results by selections” object
“Results by selections” object enables providing results upon test completion for the different
objectives of the module, counting only exercises which participate in current selection. Under
such conditions, the maximum possible result on the objective scale is not the maximum value
specified upon setting objectives for the Module, but rather maximum available score points
which can be received for the current objective within just completed test (i.e. maximum for
selection).




“Results by selections” object functions in close cooperation with the “Test Structure” object by
receiving from it information about content of the selections.
Insert object into the Slide. Open “Properties” dialog screen.




                                                                                             152
The list of available objectives enables specification of appearance settings for each objective, as
well as providing informal description for displaying in the table. If required, you can check
marker Normalize to 100% for better results representations.




You can use “Display” tab for selecting parameters for the appearance of the object itself and its
scales.




                                                                                                153
5.5.13. Questions
The current version of CourseLab supports the following types of questions:
   •   single choice
   •   multiple select
   •   ordered items
   •   numerical fill-in-blank
   •   text fill-in-blank
   •   matching pairs
You can insert a separate question of certain type as well as test (using “Test” Object) which
contains any combination of the above listed questions. Let us describe these objects in more
detail.




5.5.13.1. Object Single Choice Question
Single Choice question object enables user to choose one correct item from a list of possible
answers.




Creating Question
Add Question Object to the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object
within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu).




                                                                                          154
In the opened dialog select “Question” tab. To input question’s text, press “TE” button of the
corresponding field. The format of input area is RichText, therefore all font settings (size, color,
and style) will be saved as you type the text in.
Use "+" button to specify as many possible answers as needed. In the opened sub-dialog screen
press “TE” button of the corresponding field and insert text of the possible answer. Select
checkbox for correct answer.
       LIMITATION: No more than one answer should be marked as the correct one otherwise
       result will be incorrect.
Alternatively, you can edit entered answers by pressing “Edit” button under the “List” menu.

Select “Shuffle variants on display” check box in case you want answers to be displayed in
random order. Otherwise, answers will be displayed in order they were inserted. Use “Up” and
“Down” arrows to change order.




                                                                                                155
Use “Limitations” tab to set the following restrictions:

   1. Number of attempts. In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined
      automatically (i.e. checkbox “Define automatically” is not checked), “Number of
      Attempts” field is available for input. There you can specify the number with respect to
      the level of question complexity or testing methodology. The following formula is used
      for Automatic attempts calculation: number of attempts equals to number of possible
      answers minus one (for example, 3 attempts for question with 4 answers, 4 attempts for
      questions with 5 answers, and so on). In case automatic attempts calculation is selected,
      the number specified in the “Number of Attempts” field is ignored.
   2. Time limit for the answer. Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further
      answer selections, and the question will be validated for correctness even if “Check
      Answer” button is not pressed. If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration,
      it will be credited to the user.
   3. Possibility to skip the question. In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the
      question by pressing “Skip Question” button. The author of the course can specify
      whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to
      provide the answer later) or counted as failed (without a chance for another attempt).
   4. Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again (recurring
      approaches).

                                                                                              156
Use “Scoring” tab to specify scoring parameters for the question. The essential CheckBox is
“Credit Question”. In case it is not marked, all other scoring parameters are disabled, therefore
they will be ignored when presenting question to the user. Such questions are referred as not
credited questions. These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide
Topic, to keep the user focused, and so forth.

In case of the credited question the following options are available:

   •   Base weight of a question/attempt – base number of points for the question (or attempt
       for regression method). This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question.
       If fixed crediting method is used, the base weight of question equals the total score.
   •   The following crediting methods can be used:
            o Fixed (Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number
               of attempts. This score is equal to the base weight)
            o Regression method (In this case user is getting the highest possible score for
               providing the correct answer from the first try; the number of points is decreasing
               on the second try and so forth, until all tries are used). The maximum number of
               points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the
               number of attempts. Regression method enables more accurate performance
               evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters.
               It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the


                                                                                              157
automatically calculated one (which is number of possible answers minus one);
               otherwise regression method will become ineffective.
   •   Objectives. Received points can be stored in one or several objectives simultaneously.
       Remember, that only objective “total” always exists (which is inserted into the list of
       objectives by default). The “total” objective is used to store scores for ALL the questions,
       which will be used to determine the final score for completing the learning Module.
       Should you decide to record points for the current question into the additional objectives,
       make sure that the corresponding objective is created (Go to menu “Module” - “Runtime
       Settings” - select “Objectives” tab).




Use “Feedback” tab to specify feedback options, which define what shall be displayed upon
another attempt to respond (correct or incorrect) and after completing the question.
You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking
corresponding check box. If student has used off all the attempts for response, or if the time has
expired then the correct answer will be displayed; user will not be credited for this answer. This
option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing.

You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback
messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small
window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the

                                                                                               158
coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner) Note, that there is a check box
displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of
feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid
overloading the question Object with too many details.




On the "Display" and "Messages" tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit
the information and warning messages.




                                                                                             159
Object Events
Object “Single Choice Question” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions
and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be
employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current
state of the Object “Single Choice Question”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the
                                                    Triggered Upon
Action Editor

On Display Question      The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are
                         displayed

On Change Choice         User changes selected item

On Attempt               At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation

On Success               At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct.

On Failure               At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is incorrect.



                                                                                              160
On Time Out              At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined)

On Attempts Limit        After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to
                         zero.

On Skip Question         After “Skip Question” button is pressed

On Question Answered After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left (on timeout or on
                     attempts limit)

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                             Returns                       Syntax

questionMode Returns current question mode (tokens: "normal", $OBJ_ID.questionMode
             "review").

questionType    Returns "choice".                                  $OBJ_ID.questionType

questionDurati Returns allowed question duration in seconds (if    $OBJ_ID.questionDuration
on             exists).

questionTimer Returns current question timer value in seconds (if $OBJ_ID.questionTimer
              exists).

itemQuantity    Returns total variants quantity.                   $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity

questionValue Returns current question value (spot values          $OBJ_ID.questionValue
              divided by "~": for example, "0~1~0~0" - 0
              corresponds to empty spot, 1 - to checked spot).
              Note, that the order of spots is always as it was
              defined in object - no matter shuffled or not.

attemptsLast    Returns current number of attempts.                $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast

attemptsTotal   Returns allowed number of attempts.                $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal




                                                                                            161
5.5.13.2. Object “Multiple Select Question”
Multiple Select Question object enables user to choose one or several correct items from a list
of possible answers.




Creating question
Add Question Object to the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object
within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu).




                                                                                           162
To input question’s text, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input area
is RichText, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved as you type the text
in.

Use "+" button to specify possible answers as many as needed. In the opened sub-dialog screen
press “TE” button of the corresponding field and insert text of the possible answer. Select
checkbox for correct answer.

Alternatively, you can edit entered answers by pressing “Edit” button under the “List” menu.

Select “Shuffle variants on display” check box in case you want answers to be displayed in
random order. Otherwise, answers will be displayed in order they were inserted. Use “Up” and
“Down” arrows to change order.




                                                                                                163
Use “Limitations” tab to set the following restrictions:

   1. Number of attempts. In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined
      automatically (i.e. checkbox “Define automatically” is not checked), “Number of
      Attempts” field is available for input. There you can specify the number with respect to
      the level of question complexity or testing methodology. The following formula is used
      for Automatic attempts calculation: number of attempts equals to number of possible
      answers minus one (for example, 3 attempts for question with 4 answers, 4 attempts for
      questions with 5 answers, and so on). In case automatic attempts calculation is selected,
      the number specified in the “Number of Attempts” field is ignored.
   2. Time limit for the answer. Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further
      answer selections, and the question will be validated for correctness even if “Check
      Answer” button is not pressed. If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration,
      it will be credited to the user.
   3. Possibility to skip the question. In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the
      question by pressing “Skip Question” button. The author of the course can specify
      whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to
      provide the answer later) or counted as failed (without a chance for another attempt).
   4. Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again (recurring
      approaches).



                                                                                              164
Use “Scoring” tab to specify scoring parameters for the question. The essential CheckBox is
“Credit Question”. In case it is not marked, all other scoring parameters are disabled, therefore
they will be ignored when presenting question to the user. Such questions are referred as not
credited questions. These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide
Topic, to keep the user focused, and so forth.

In case of the credited question the following options are available:

   •   Base weight of a question/attempt – base number of points for the question (or attempt
       for regression method). This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question.
       If fixed crediting method is used, the base weight of question equals the total score.
   •   The following crediting methods can be used:
            o Fixed (Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number
               of attempts. This score is equal to the base weight)
            o Regression method (In this case user is getting the highest possible score for
               providing the correct answer from the first try; the number of points is decreasing
               on the second try and so forth, until all tries are used). The maximum number of
               points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the
               number of attempts. Regression method enables more accurate performance
               evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters.
               It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the


                                                                                              165
automatically calculated one (which is number of possible answers minus one);
               otherwise regression method will become ineffective.
   •   Objectives. Received points can be stored in one or several objectives simultaneously.
       Remember, that only objective “total” always exists (which is inserted into the list of
       objectives by default). The “total” objective is used to store scores for ALL the questions,
       which will be used to determine the final score for completing the learning Module.
       Should you decide to record points for the current question into the additional objectives,
       make sure that the corresponding objective is created (Go to menu “Module” - “Runtime
       Settings” - select “Objectives” tab). .




Use “Feedback” tab to specify feedback options, which define what shall be displayed upon
another attempt to respond (correct or incorrect) and after completing the question
You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking
corresponding check box. If student has used off all the attempts for response, or if the time has
expired then the correct answer will be displayed; user will not be credited for this answer. This
option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing.

You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback
messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small
window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the
coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner) Note, that there is a check box
displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of

                                                                                               166
feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid
overloading the question Object with too many details.




On the "Display" and "Messages" tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit
the information and warning messages.




                                                                                            167
Object Events
Object “Multiple Select Question” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions
and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be
employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current
state of the Object “Multiple Select Question”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the
                                                     Triggered Upon
Action Editor

On Display Question       The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are
                          displayed

On Change Choice          User changes selected item (set or removes any checkmark)

On Attempt                At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation

On Success                At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct.

On Failure                At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is incorrect.



                                                                                               168
On Time Out              At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined)

On Attempts Limit        After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to
                         zero.

On Skip Question         After “Skip Question” button is pressed

On Question Answered After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left (on timeout or on
                     attempts limit)

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                Returns                      Syntax

questionMode        Returns current question mode (tokens:           $OBJ_ID.questionMode
                    "normal", "review").

questionType        Returns "select".                                $OBJ_ID.questionType

questionDuration    Returns allowed question duration in seconds $OBJ_ID.questionDuration
                    (if exists).

questionTimer       Returns current question timer value in          $OBJ_ID.questionTimer
                    seconds (if exists).

itemQuantity        Returns total variants quantity.                 $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity

questionValue       Returns current question value (spot values      $OBJ_ID.questionValue
                    divided by "~": for example, "0~1~1~0" - 0
                    corresponds to empty spot, 1 - to checked
                    spot). Note, that the order of spots is always
                    as it was defined in object - no matter
                    shuffled or not.

attemptsLast        Returns current number of attempts.              $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast

attemptsTotal       Returns allowed number of attempts.              $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal




                                                                                             169
5.5.13.3. Object “Ordered Items Question”
Ordered Items types of questions require from the user to specify the right order of presented
items.




Creating question
Add Question Object to the Frame. By default, object is placed in the center of the Frame. Adjust
size and position an object with respect to the prospective Frame structure. Open “Properties”
dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the
context menu).




                                                                                             170
To input question’s text, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input area
is RichText, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved as you type the text
in.

Use "+" button to specify possible answers as many as needed. In the opened sub-dialog screen
press “TE” button of the corresponding field and insert text of the variant.

Alternatively, you can edit entered answers by pressing “Edit” button under the “List” menu.

Note, that for this type of question the correct Order of Items will be the order specified by
author. Question items are ALWAYS presented randomly to the user. Use “Up” and ”Down”
arrows to change items order.




                                                                                                171
Use “Limitations” tab to set the following restrictions:

   1. Number of attempts. In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined
      automatically (i.e. checkbox “Define automatically” is not checked), “Number of
      Attempts” field is available for input. There you can specify the number with respect to
      the level of question complexity or testing methodology. The following formula is used
      for Automatic attempts calculation: number of attempts equals to number of possible
      answers minus one (for example, 3 attempts for question with 4 answers, 4 attempts for
      questions with 5 answers, and so on). In case automatic attempts calculation is selected,
      the number specified in the “Number of Attempts” field is ignored.
   2. Time limit for the answer. Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further
      answer selections, and the question will be validated for correctness even if “Check
      Answer” button is not pressed. If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration,
      it will be credited to the user.
   3. Possibility to skip the question. In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the
      question by pressing “Skip Question” button. The author of the course can specify
      whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to
      provide the answer later) or counted as failed (without a chance for another attempt).
   4. Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again (recurring
      approaches).



                                                                                              172
Use “Scoring” tab to specify scoring parameters for the question. The essential CheckBox is
“Credit Question”. In case it is not marked, all other scoring parameters are disabled, therefore
they will be ignored when presenting question to the user. Such questions are referred as not
credited questions. These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide
Topic, to keep the user focused, and so forth.

In case of the credited question the following options are available:

   •   Base weight of a question/attempt – base number of points for the question (or attempt
       for regression method). This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question.
       If fixed crediting method is used, the base weight of question equals the total score.
   •   The following crediting methods can be used:
            o Fixed (Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number
               of attempts. This score is equal to the base weight)
            o Regression method (In this case user is getting the highest possible score for
               providing the correct answer from the first try; the number of points is decreasing
               on the second try and so forth, until all tries are used). The maximum number of
               points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the
               number of attempts. Regression method enables more accurate performance
               evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters.
               It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the


                                                                                              173
automatically calculated one (which is number of possible answers minus one);
               otherwise regression method will become ineffective.
   •   Objectives. Received points can be stored in one or several objectives simultaneously.
       Remember, that only objective “total” always exists (which is inserted into the list of
       objectives by default). The “total” objective is used to store scores for ALL the questions,
       which will be used to determine the final score for completing the learning Module.
       Should you decide to record points for the current question into the additional objectives,
       make sure that the corresponding objective is created (Go to menu “Module” - “Runtime
       Settings” - select “Objectives” tab).




Use “Feedback” tab to specify feedback options, which define what shall be displayed upon
another attempt to respond (correct or incorrect) and after completing the question
You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking
corresponding check box. If student has used off all the attempts for response, or if the time has
expired then the correct answer will be displayed; user will not be credited for this answer. This
option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing.

You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback
messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small
window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the

                                                                                               174
coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner) Note, that there is a check box
displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of
feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid
overloading the question Object with too many details.




On the "Display" and "Messages" tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit
the information and warning messages.




                                                                                             175
Object Events
Object “Ordered Items Question” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions
and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be
employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current
state of the Object “Ordered Items Question”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the
                                                    Triggered Upon
Action Editor

On Display Question      The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are
                         displayed

On Move Item             User moves any item

On Attempt               At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation

On Success               At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct.

On Failure               At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is incorrect.



                                                                                              176
On Time Out              At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined)

On Attempts Limit        After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to
                         zero.

On Skip Question         After “Skip Question” button is pressed

On Question Answered After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left (on timeout or on
                     attempts limit)

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                               Returns                     Syntax

questionMode        Returns current question mode (tokens:         $OBJ_ID.questionMode
                    "normal", "review").

questionType        Returns "range".                               $OBJ_ID.questionType

questionDuration    Returns allowed question duration in           $OBJ_ID.questionDuration
                    seconds (if exists).

questionTimer       Returns current question timer value in        $OBJ_ID.questionTimer
                    seconds (if exists).

itemQuantity        Returns total variants quantity.               $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity

questionValue       Returns current question item order (spot   $OBJ_ID.questionValue
                    numbers starting from 0 divided by "~": for
                    example, "3~1~0~2" - "0~1~2~3" in this
                    case corresponds to correct order).

attemptsLast        Returns current number of attempts.            $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast

attemptsTotal       Returns allowed number of attempts.            $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal




                                                                                            177
5.5.13.4. Object “Numeric Fill-in-Blank Question”

Numeric fill-in-blank questions require from the user to enter the correct number into the
answer field using keyboard.




Creating question
Add Question Object to the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object
within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu).




                                                                                      178
To input question’s text, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input area
is RichText, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved as you type the text
in.

Use "+" button to specify possible answers as many as needed.

Specify the approximate length of the entry field in symbols. We recommend allowing some
extra space for that purpose. For example, if desired answer is 3.224 then the field size is 5
symbols (including decimal point). We recommend using double size of the desired length (4
symbols in this example) so that user does not get a hint about the correct answer.

If necessary, enter description message for the answer field. Description message appears to the
left of the answer field and may contain for example, units of measure for the answer. Specify
conditions for the correct answer. Use "+" menu button to add conditions to the list of
conditions menu as many as needed. Fill in the list of conditions for validating an answer in the
opened sub-dialog screen. In the simple case only single condition is used (for example, when
entered answer must exactly match some number).

In case you need to specify the interval of numbers (for example when the answer should be the
number in the range of 7 to 8) you should specify two conditions: a) greater than 7 b) less than 8.
Therefore any number in the range of 7 to 8 (excluding 7 and 8 otherwise different conditions
should be used: greater or equal to 7 AND less or equal to 8) will be treated as correct answer.

                                                                                                179
IMPORTANT! When user’s response is checked, there is no difference whether comma
       or dot symbols are used as a decimal separator. However, for specifying the correct
       answer in CourseLab editor, it is recommended to use decimal POINT.




Use “Limitations” tab to set the following restrictions:

   1. Number of attempts. “Number of Attempts” field is always available for input (there is
      no automatic attempts calculation rule). There you can specify the number of answer
      attempts with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology.
   2. Time limit for the answer. Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further
      answer selections, and the question will be validated for correctness even if “Check
      Answer” button is not pressed. If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration,
      it will be credited to the user.
   3. Possibility to skip the question. In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the
      question by pressing “Skip Question” button. The author of the course can specify
      whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to
      provide the answer later) or counted as failed (without a chance for another attempt).
   4. Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again (recurring
      approaches).

                                                                                              180
Use “Scoring” tab to specify scoring parameters for the question. The essential CheckBox is
“Credit Question”. In case it is not marked, all other scoring parameters are disabled, therefore
they will be ignored when presenting question to the user. Such questions are referred as not
credited questions. These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide
Topic, to keep the user focused, and so forth.

In case of the credited question the following options are available:

   •   Base weight of a question/attempt – base number of points for the question (or attempt
       for regression method). This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question.
       If fixed crediting method is used, the base weight of question equals the total score.
   •   The following crediting methods can be used:
            o Fixed (Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number
               of attempts. This score is equal to the base weight)
            o Regression method (In this case user is getting the highest possible score for
               providing the correct answer from the first try; the number of points is decreasing
               on the second try and so forth, until all tries are used). The maximum number of
               points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the
               number of attempts. Regression method enables more accurate performance
               evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters.
               It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the


                                                                                              181
automatically calculated one (which is number of possible answers minus one),
               otherwise regression method will become ineffective.
   •   Objectives. Received points can be stored in one or several objectives simultaneously.
       Remember, that only objective “total” always exists (which is inserted into the list of
       objectives by default). The “total” objective is used to store scores for ALL the questions,
       which will be used to determine the final score for completing the learning Module.
       Should you decide to record points for the current question into the additional objectives,
       make sure that the corresponding objective is created (Go to menu “Module” - “Runtime
       Settings” - select “Objectives” tab).




Use “Feedback” tab to specify feedback options, which define what shall be displayed upon
another attempt to respond (correct or incorrect) and after completing the question
You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking
corresponding check box. If student has used off all the attempts for response, or if the time has
expired then the correct answer will be displayed; user will not be credited for this answer. This
option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing.

You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback
messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small
window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the
coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner) Note, that there is a check box
displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of

                                                                                               182
feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid
overloading the question Object with too many details.




Use “Display” tab to select color scheme for the main elements of the question with respect to
the Module design.




                                                                                          183
Use “Messages” tab to modify texts of notifications and warnings for the question.


Object Events
Object “Numerical Fill-in-Blank Question” is capable generating events with regards to the
user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events
can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the
current state of the Object “Numerical Fill-in-Blank Question”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

    Reference in the
                                                    Triggered Upon
     Action Editor

On Display Question      The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are
                         displayed

On Attempt               At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation

On Success               At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct.



                                                                                              184
On Failure                At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is incorrect.

On Time Out               At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined)

On Attempts Limit         After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to
                          zero.

On Skip Question          After “Skip Question” button is pressed

On Question Answered After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left (on timeout or on
                     attempts limit)

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                                 Returns                    Syntax

questionMode        Returns current question mode (tokens:          $OBJ_ID.questionMode
                    "normal", "review").

questionType        Returns "numeric".                              $OBJ_ID.questionType

questionDuration Returns allowed question duration in seconds       $OBJ_ID.questionDuration
                 (if exists).

questionTimer       Returns current question timer value in seconds $OBJ_ID.questionTimer
                    (if exists).

itemQuantity        Returns total variants quantity.                $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity

questionValue       Returns current question field value (if there is $OBJ_ID.questionValue
                    more than one input field, then returns string:
                    values divided by "~").

attemptsLast        Returns current number of attempts.             $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast

attemptsTotal       Returns allowed number of attempts.             $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal




                                                                                              185
5.5.13.5. Object “Text Fill-in-Blank Question”

Text fill-in-blank types of questions require from the user to fill in the correct answer into the
blank spaces using the keyboard. In general, entered text can contain numbers, but when user’s
response is evaluated, the numbers are interpreted as text characters rather than numbers.




Creating question
Add Question Object to the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object
within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu).




                                                                                                186
In the opened dialog select “Question” tab. To input question’s text, press “TE” button of the
corresponding field. The format of input area is RichText, therefore all font settings (size, color,
and style) will be saved as you type the text in.

Use "+" button to specify possible answers as many as needed.

Specify the approximate length of the entry field in symbols. We recommend allowing some
extra space for that purpose.

If necessary, enter description message for the answer field. Description message appears to the
left of the answer field and may contain answer format instructions, for example, “Use capital
letter to answer”.

Specify conditions for the correct answer. In the conditions list menu add as many conditions
as needed using "+" menu button. Fill in the list of conditions for validating an answer in the
opened sub-dialog screen. In the simple case, only single condition is used (for example, when
entered answer must exactly match the specified word). You can also set condition “Contain”. In
this case entered answer will be validated on whether or not it contains the character string
specified by author. For example, if “Contain” “point” condition is set, either one of the
following words will be considered as correct answers: Pointing, pointless, and pinpoint. Lastly,
you can set the “Match Case” condition to match case when validating the answer. In this case,


                                                                                                187
for above mentioned example the word “Pointing” which starts from the capital letter will not be
considered as correct answer.




Use “Limitations” tab to set the following restrictions:

   1. Number of attempts. “Number of Attempts” field is always available for input (there is
      no automatic attempts calculation rule). There you can specify the number of answer
      attempts with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology.
   2. Time limit for the answer. Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further
      answer selections, and the question will be validated for correctness even if “Check
      Answer” button is not pressed. If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration,
      it will be credited to the user.
   3. Possibility to skip the question. In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the
      question by pressing “Skip Question” button. The author of the course can specify
      whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to
      provide the answer later) or counted as failed (without a chance for another attempt).
   4. Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again (recurring
      approaches).




                                                                                              188
Use “Scoring” tab to specify scoring parameters for the question. The essential CheckBox is
“Credit Question”. In case it is not marked, all other scoring parameters are disabled, therefore
they will be ignored when presenting question to the user. Such questions are referred as not
credited questions. These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide
Topic, to keep the user focused, and so forth.

In case of the credited question the following options are available:

   •   Base weight of a question/attempt – base number of points for the question (or attempt
       for regression method). This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question.
       If fixed crediting method is used, the base weight of question equals the total score.
   •   The following crediting methods can be used:
            o Fixed (Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number
               of attempts. This score is equal to the base weight)
            o Regression method (In this case user is getting the highest possible score for
               providing the correct answer from the first try; the number of points is decreasing
               on the second try and so forth, until all tries are used). The maximum number of
               points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the
               number of attempts. Regression method enables more accurate performance
               evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters.
               It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the


                                                                                              189
automatically calculated one (which is number of possible answers minus one),
               otherwise regression method will become ineffective.
   •   Objectives. Received points can be stored in one or several objectives simultaneously.
       Remember, that only objective “total” always exists (which is inserted into the list of
       objectives by default). The “total” objective is used to store scores for ALL the questions,
       which will be used to determine the final score for completing the learning Module.
       Should you decide to record points for the current question into the additional objectives,
       make sure that the corresponding objective is created (Go to menu “Module” - “Runtime
       Settings” - select “Objectives” tab).




Use “Feedback” tab to specify feedback options, which define what shall be displayed upon
another attempt to respond (correct or incorrect) and after completing the question
You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking
corresponding check box. If student has used off all the attempts for response, or if the time has
expired then the correct answer will be displayed; user will not be credited for this answer. This
option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing.

You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback
messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small
window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the
coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner) Note, that there is a check box
displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of

                                                                                               190
feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid
overloading the question Object with too many details.




Use “Display” tab to select color scheme for the main elements of the question with respect to
the Module design.




                                                                                          191
Use “Messages” tab to modify texts of notifications and warnings for the question.


Object Events
Object “Text Fill-in-Blank Question” is capable generating events with regards to the user's
actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can
be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the
current state of the Object “Text Fill-in-Blank Question”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

    Reference in the
                                                    Triggered Upon
     Action Editor

On Display Question      The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are
                         displayed

On Attempt               At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation

On Success               At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct.



                                                                                              192
On Failure               At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is incorrect.

On Time Out              At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined)

On Attempts Limit        After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to
                         zero.

On Skip Question         After “Skip Question” button is pressed

On Question Answered After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left (on timeout or on
                     attempts limit)

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                              Returns                       Syntax

questionMode        Returns current question mode (tokens: $OBJ_ID.questionMode
                    "normal", "review").

questionType        Returns "text".                                 $OBJ_ID.questionType

questionDuration    Returns allowed question           duration   in $OBJ_ID.questionDuration
                    seconds (if exists).

questionTimer       Returns current question timer value in $OBJ_ID.questionTimer
                    seconds (if exists).

itemQuantity        Returns total variants quantity.                $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity

questionValue       Returns current question field value (if there $OBJ_ID.questionValue
                    is more than one input field, then returns
                    string: values divided by "~").

attemptsLast        Returns current number of attempts.             $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast

attemptsTotal       Returns allowed number of attempts.             $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal




                                                                                            193
5.5.13.6. Object “Matching Pairs Question”

Matching pairs type of questions require from the user to match the provided question items.




Creating question
Add Question Object to the Frame.
       IMPORTANT! Matching pairs type of question is space consuming when placed into the
       Frame, therefore we do not recommend setting the width of the object to less than 700
       pixels.
Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties”
option from the context menu).




                                                                                           194
In the opened dialog select “Question” tab. To input question’s text, press “TE” button of the
corresponding field. The format of input area is RichText, therefore all font settings (size, color,
and style) will be saved as you type the text in. Considering specifics of matching pairs
questions, it is not always necessary to display the text of the question (Object description will
always be displayed in the Slide). Remove corresponding check mark, in case you want the
question text not to be displayed.

Specify variants of matching question items. In the list of answers menu add as many variants
of matching question items as needed using "+" menu button. In the opened sub-dialog pairs
editor screen press “TE” button of the corresponding field and insert text of base item and its
corresponding match which is in RichText format. Please remember, that there are size
limitations for entering both the base items and matches, therefore try using short texts and small
fonts. Inserted question items appear in the List of items. If desired, you can edit entered items
by pressing “Edit” button under the “List” menu.

Note, that in matching pairs types of questions the correct matching pairs will be the ones
specified by author. Unlike the question base items, which will be displayed in order they were
inserted, the matches will ALWAYS be displayed in random order.




                                                                                                195
Use “Limitations” tab to set the following restrictions:

   •   Number of attempts. In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined
       automatically (i.e. checkbox “Define automatically” is not checked), “Number of
       Attempts” field is available for input. There you can specify the number with respect to
       the level of question complexity or testing methodology. The following formula is used
       for Automatic attempts calculation: number of attempts equals to number of possible
       answers minus one (for example, 3 attempts for question with 4 answers, 4 attempts for
       questions with 5 answers and so on). In case automatic attempts calculation is selected,
       the number specified in the “Number of Attempts” field is ignored.
   •   Time limit for the answer. Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further
       answer selections, and the question will be validated for correctness even if “Check
       Answer” button is not pressed. If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration,
       it will be credited to the user.
   •   Possibility to skip the question. In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the
       question by pressing “Skip Question” button. The author of the course can specify
       whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to
       provide the answer later) or counted as failed (without a chance for another attempt).
   •   Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again (recurring
       approaches).



                                                                                               196
Use “Scoring” tab to specify scoring parameters for the question. The essential CheckBox is
“Credit Question”. In case it is not marked, all other scoring parameters are disabled, therefore
they will be ignored when presenting question to the user. Such questions are referred as not
credited questions. These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide
Topic, to keep the user focused, and so forth.

In case of the credited question the following options are available:

   •   Base weight of a question/attempt – base number of points for the question (or attempt
       for regression method). This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question.
       If fixed crediting method is used, the base weight of question equals the total score.
   •   The following crediting methods can be used:
            o Fixed (Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number
               of attempts. This score is equal to the base weight)
            o Regression method (In this case user is getting the highest possible score for
               providing the correct answer from the first try; the number of points is decreasing
               on the second try and so forth, until all tries are used). The maximum number of
               points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the
               number of attempts. Regression method enables more accurate performance
               evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters.
               It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the


                                                                                              197
automatically calculated one (which is number of possible answers minus one),
               otherwise regression method will become ineffective.
   •   Objectives. Received points can be stored in one or several objectives simultaneously.
       Remember, that only objective “total” always exists (which is inserted into the list of
       objectives by default). The “total” objective is used to store scores for ALL the questions,
       which will be used to determine the final score for completing the learning Module.
       Should you decide to record points for the current question into the additional objectives,
       make sure that the corresponding objective is created (Go to menu “Module” - “Runtime
       Settings” - select “Objectives” tab).




Use “Feedback” tab to specify feedback options, which define what shall be displayed upon
another attempt to respond (correct or incorrect) and after completing the question
You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking
corresponding check box. If student has used off all the attempts for response, or if the time has
expired then the correct answer will be displayed; user will not be credited for this answer. This
option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing.

You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback
messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small
window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the

                                                                                               198
coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner) Note, that there is a check box
displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of
feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid
overloading the question Object with too many details.




On the "Display" tab you can select appearance settings for the object.




                                                                                             199
Use “Messages” tab to modify texts of notifications and warnings for the question.

Object Events
Object “Numerical Fill-in-Blank Question” is capable generating events with regards to the
user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events
can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the
current state of the Object “Numerical Fill-in-Blank Question”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

    Reference in the
                                                    Triggered Upon
     Action Editor

On Display Question      The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are
                         displayed

On Move Item             User moves any item

On Attempt               At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation

On Success               At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct.


                                                                                              200
On Failure                At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is incorrect.

On Time Out               At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined)

On Attempts Limit         After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to
                          zero.

On Skip Question          After “Skip Question” button is pressed

On Question Answered After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left (on timeout or on
                     attempts limit)

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                               Returns                      Syntax

questionMode        Returns current question mode (tokens: $OBJ_ID.questionMode
                    "normal", "review").

questionType        Returns "oto" (one-to-one match).               $OBJ_ID.questionType

questionDuration Returns allowed question duration in seconds $OBJ_ID.questionDuration
                 (if exists).

questionTimer       Returns current question timer value in $OBJ_ID.questionTimer
                    seconds (if exists).

itemQuantity        Returns total variants quantity.                $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity

questionValue       Returns current match item order (match $OBJ_ID.questionValue
                    numbers starting from 0 divided by "~": for
                    example, "3~1~0~2" - "0~1~2~3" in this case
                    corresponds to correct order).

attemptsLast        Returns current number of attempts.             $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast

attemptsTotal       Returns allowed number of attempts.             $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal




                                                                                             201
5.5.14. Tests

5.5.14.1. Test
“Test” object is the structured set of questions (or single question in the simple case).
“Test” object supports every type of the questions used in CourseLab:

   •   single choice
   •   multiple select
   •   ordered items
   •   numeric fill-in-blank
   •   text fill-in-blank
   •   matching pairs


Creating Test
Add Object to the Frame.
       LIMITATION: During editing the substitute of the object is displayed.
Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties”
option from the context menu).




                                                                                            202
Use “Questions” tab to add any number of questions to the list of the questions by pressing “+”
button. The opened edit screen practically duplicates the object “Question” edit window of the
corresponding type, the only difference is that some common to all test parameters are missing.
Please see the corresponding question object descriptions for more details.
       WARNING! If you plan to use this module within an LMS, limits on amount of stored data
       may apply depending on e-learning standard used and LMS properties. Every test
       question stores its data (and length of data depends on complexity of question), therefore
       it is recommended not to exceed 30-40 questions in test. The only standard that allows
       large amount of data to be stored is SCORM 2004.




                                                                                             203
You can set the test as “not credited”, if needed (for example when the test is a part of the
learning process or an additional exercise rather than knowledge testing) by removing “Scored
Test” mark on the “Limitations and Scoring” tab. You can permit or restrict timing questions
(Use “Enable time limitation for test” check box) if timing is defined. In addition, you can
specify time limit for the whole test (use “Limit test duration” check box and corresponding
field).
You can permit the option of skipping the question by marking corresponding check box;
however, question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to provide the answer later).
Besides that, you can allow the second run for the test. If this option is unchecked, the user will
be prompted with message stating that test had already been taken and only test results can be
viewed. In case this option is marked, the student will be prompted with the same as above
warning message, but with the two options available to choose from: one is to take test again and
second is to see test results. If test is taken again, all previous test results are discarded. At last,
you can permit or restrict display of pictures related to the questions for the entire Test.
       IMPORTANT! You can not set up Objective for storing results of the entire test, instead,
       when editing each question specifies parameters settings for required Objective(s). Such
       approach allows maximum flexibility when evaluating test results.



                                                                                                   204
You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback
messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small
window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the
coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner). Note, that there is a check box
displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of
feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid
overloading the question Object with too many details.




                                                                                              205
On the "Display" tab you can select appearance settings for the object.

On the "Messages" and "Texts" tabs you can edit the information and warning messages of the
test.




                                                                                          206
207
On the "Buttons" and "Spots" tabs you can define custom question and test buttons and active
spots for single choice, multiple select and order type of questions.




                                                                                           208
209
Object Events
Object “Numerical Fill-in-Blank Question” is capable generating events with regards to the
user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events
can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the
current state of the Object “Numerical Fill-in-Blank Question”.
Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism.

Reference in the Action
                                                      Triggered Upon
Editor

On Display Question         The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are
                            displayed

On Choice Change            Item configuration changed in single choice question

On Select Change            Item configuration changed in multiple select question

On Item Order Change        Item configuration changed in order question

On Numeric Value            Value changed in numeric question


                                                                                                210
Change

On Text Value Change        Value changed in text question

On Matching Change          Item configuration changed in matching pairs question

On Attempt                  At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation

On Success                  At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct.

On Failure                  At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is
                            incorrect.

On Question Time Out        At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined for
                            question)

On Attempts Limit           After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to
                            zero.

On Skip Question            After “Skip Question” button is pressed

On Question End             After answer is evaluated and no more activities left in this question

On Test Timer Tick          Every second while test timer is active

On Test Time Out            At the moment of time expiration for the whole test (if defined)

On Test End                 After all questions are answered or test timeout

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                               Returns                   Syntax

testMode                 Returns current test mode (tokens:      $OBJ_ID.testMode
                         "normal", "review").

questionNumber           Returns current question number        $OBJ_ID.questionNumber
                         (starting from 0, first question has 0
                         number).

totalQuestionQuantity    Returns total questions quantity in     $OBJ_ID.totalQuestionQuantity
                         current test.

testDuration             Returns allowed test duration in        $OBJ_ID.testDuration
                         seconds (if exists).

testTimer                Returns current test timer value in     $OBJ_ID.testTimer
                         seconds (if exists).

questionType             Returns current question type           $OBJ_ID.questionType
                         (tokens: "choice", "select", "range",

                                                                                               211
"numeric", "text", "oto").

questionDuration         Returns allowed question duration in $OBJ_ID.questionDuration
                         seconds (if exists).

questionTimer            Returns current question timer value $OBJ_ID.questionTimer
                         in seconds (if exists).

itemQuantity             Returns total variants quantity.        $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity

questionValue            Returns current question answer         $OBJ_ID.questionValue
                         value (format corresponds to
                         question type).

attemptsLast             Returns current number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast

attemptsTotal            Returns allowed number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal



5.5.14.2. Current Results
“Current Results” object is used for displaying to the user current results for the one of the
objectives.




       Note, that this object is created when the Slide is loaded, therefore it cannot display score
       changes automatically. Therefore, use REFRESH object method if you wish to display
       up-to-date values.

Add Object to the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide
or select “Properties” option from the context menu).




                                                                                                212
The field for specifying objective is the main field on the “Parameters” tab. You can precisely
specify parameters that should be displayed and modify description messages to each of them.
Marker Normalize to 100% enables presenting the number of points not only as actual number,
but also as a percentage from the maximum number of points.




Use “Display” tab to select color scheme for the main elements of the object, and also specify
font settings for displaying points.

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                    Execution Result

REFRESH                 Refreshes current score values.

Object Specific Properties
Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used
in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

Property                               Returns                          Syntax

objectiveID    Returns objective identifier.                            $OBJ_ID.objectiveID

rawScore       Returns raw objective score.                             $OBJ_ID.rawScore

scaledScore    Returns scaled objective score (if can be calculated).   $OBJ_ID.scaledScore

maxScore       Returns maximal objective score (if defined).            $OBJ_ID.maxScore




                                                                                              213
5.5.14.3. Results by objectives
 “Results by objectives” object is used for displaying current results by several objectives
simultaneously.




       Note, that this object is created when the Slide is loaded, therefore it cannot display score
       changes automatically. Therefore, use REFRESH object method if you wish to display
       up-to-date values.

Insert object into the frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a
Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu).




Use “Scales” tab for defining list of objectives results for which should be presented and specify
parameters for displaying results. Marker Normalize to 100% enables presenting the number of
points not only as actual number, but also as a percentage from the maximum number of points.




                                                                                                214
Use “Display” tab to select color scheme for the main elements of the object, and also specify
font settings for displaying points.

Object Methods
The state of the Object can be modified using methods.

Method name                                 Execution Result

REFRESH                Refreshes current score values.




                                                                                          215
5.6. Scenarios
Scenario presents itself as a template for building interactions between multiple objects.
Scenarios enable author of the course to define necessary parameters and get a filling for the
slide right away.
Even though the same task can be accomplished by placing text, pictures, and by specifying
interactions between them, the usage of scenarios significantly speeds up the process.
Let us review scenario utilization by using example of “Products catalogue” scenario.
To place “Products catalogue” into the Slide, open “scenario” section on the tasks pane. Use
context menu of the scenario icon to choose “Insert” item.
To change parameters of the scenario, open “Frame structure” section on the task pane. Select
“Edit scenario…” item from the context menu on the scenario identifier. Dialog window opens
up, where you can specify parameters for scenario.
For each product the following is defined:

   •   Name of the product.
   •   File containing the picture of the product.
   •   Formatted text describing the product.

Upon completion of all parameters, there will be list of the product’s names displayed on the
Slide. When one of the product’s names from the list is selected, the card for corresponding
product opens up.



5.7. Cursors
                                     The learning Courses designed for training on using
                                     software programs can contain software simulations.
                                     Usually, simulation is the sequence of the frames. For
                                     example, a moving cursor points to the predefined menu
                                     item. Then mouse click is imitated, and after that the next
                                     frame displays the result.
                                     For illustration of mouse movements the special object
                                     “Cursor” is employed.
                                     If during recording of simulation the marker “Capture
                                     Cursor” is checked, cursor object will be inserted into the
                                     frames automatically. However, cursor object can be added
                                     to the existing frames as well. To do so, select Cursor item
                                     from the “Insert” menu.
                                     Cursor will be placed on the current Frame.




                                                                                             216
Cursor movement path
The blue line that comes toward cursor represents cursor movement path.




To change starting point of the cursor movement, hold down Ctrl key and double-click into the
wanted point within a frame. In such a way you can modify the starting point of the cursor only
on the first Frame within a Slide. For all subsequent frames the starting point of the cursor
movement will be the cursor’s end point on the previous Frame.
In order to modify cursor’s end point, simply drag the cursor icon using mouse into the desired
point within a Slide.
Select “Previous Frame” menu item from the cursor context menu to merge the final position of
the cursor with the cursor’s end position on the previous Frame.
Select “Next Frame” menu item from the cursor context menu to merge the final position of the
cursor with the cursor’s end position on the next Frame.


Time of cursor movement
It is possible to specify cursor movement starting time and duration of the cursor’s movement.
Select “Format Cursor” menu item from the cursor context menu. “Format” dialog screen
opens up.




                                                                                           217
The “Display” field contains information regarding duration of the cursor movement.
The “Appear after” field contains information regarding cursor movement starting time.
Within the same Frame it is possible to create complex multiple cursors movement paths by
adding several cursors. It is obvious, that for each subsequent cursor the movement start time
must be later than the movement end time of previous cursor.
For all cursors with the “Display mouse click” setting turned on, the duration of the click is
0.7 second. This time period needs to be considered when defining display time for the Frame,
and when specifying setting “Appear After” for the next cursor in the frame.




                                                                                          218
6. Handling Objects


6.1. Common settings of all objects. Object allocation within a
Frame.
In the previous chapters of this manual we have described the specific properties of different
objects. In addition, there are properties that are common to all objects. Such properties can be
accessed using “Format Object” (“Format Picture”, “Format TextBox”, and “Format
AutoShape”) from the context menu.



6.1.1. Object’s background and border color. Opacity.
When you insert any Object into the Frame, it is placed into the rectangular placeholder. Use
“Color” tab on the “Format” screen to specify placeholder’s background color.




Note that these parameters are pertaining only to the object’s placeholder, rather than object
itself. If objects fit entire rectangular placeholder (for example pictures), it is appropriate to
specify placeholder’s background color only when pictures contain transparent areas.
       Exceptions: AutoShapes Objects, where changes to placeholder’s background and
       border color apply to the AutoShapes directly.
On the same “Color” tab move “Transparency” slider to modify opacity of the object’s
placeholder as well as opacity of the objects itself.


                                                                                              219
6.1.2. Sizing and Scaling.
The simplest method to change the size of the object is to click and drag the sizing handle inside
of the editor window. The size of the object’s placeholder will change evidently. However, for
precise sizing use “Format Object” item from the context menu.




Use “Size” tab on the “Format” screen to specify size of the object’s rectangular placeholder.
Depending on the object type, there are three variants of object allocation within the Rectangular
Placeholder:
   •   Object fills up all available space inside the placeholder.
   •   Object will resize its width to fit the Rectangular Placeholder and automatically adjust its
       height size to fit content (for example, depending on the amount of the text).
   •   Object will not change its size despite the placeholder’s size modifications (for example,
       some buttons are fixed-size).
You can also change the size using relative values of the scale parameters in proportion or by
length or height only.



6.1.3. Rotating Object
Any object in the learning module can be entirely rotated by any angle.
       LIMITATION: Object rotating can be correctly displayed only using Internet Explorer –
       in any other browser object will not be rotated.
                    Use mouse to grab rotating (green color) handle and rotate the object right
                    inside of the editor window.
                    However, for specific angle settings use “Format Object” item from the
                    context menu. Use “Size” tab on the “Format” screen to specify precise
                    rotating angle.

                                                                                               220
IMPORTANT! The Browser’s capabilities are used for object rotating, when displaying
       the learning Module. Due to some limitations of the browser rotating capability the
       quality of the rotated object can be affected.


6.1.4. Object position within a Frame and permission to move object.
Use “Position” tab on the “Format” screen to set the initial position for the top left corner of the
Object placeholder within frame.




                                                                                                221
The term “initial” is used intentionally, because ultimately you can make object to be dragged by
the mouse when checking mark “Can be dragged by mouse” on the same tab – in this case,
learner can drag specified object within a frame.
       LIMITATION: The Object that can be dragged cannot be moved by MOVE-START action



6.1.5. Modifying common settings for the group of the objects.
If you select group of objects on the frame, you can modify common settings for the entire
group. In the opened “Format” dialog screen the only filled in fields are those that have identical
parameter values pertaining to all objects Otherwise, in case fields are empty, it means that
parameter values for selected objects are different or not defined.


6.1.6. Aligning Objects

Two or more Objects on the Slide can be aligned relative to each other using toolbar buttons.




Horizontal Alignment

      Align Left. This button aligns the selected objects horizontally, relative to the border of
      the left most object from the selection
      Align Center. This button aligns vertical centerlines of the selected objects, based on the
      centerline of the widest object from the selection.
      Align Right. This button aligns the selected objects horizontally, relative to the border of
      the right most object from the selection.

Vertical Alignment

      Align Top. This button aligns the selected objects vertically, relative to the border of the
      top most object from the selection.
      Align Middle. This button aligns horizontal centerlines of the selected objects, based on
      the centerline of the highest object from the selection.
      Align Bottom. This button aligns the selected objects vertically, relative to the border of
      the lowest object from the selection.

6.1.7. Distributing Objects evenly
Three or more Objects on the Slide can be evenly distributed using toolbar buttons.


       Distribute Horizontally. This button distributes the selected objects evenly between the
       left and right outermost objects from the selection.
       Distribute Vertically. This button distributes the selected objects evenly between the top
       and bottom outermost objects from the selection.
       NOTE: In fact, Objects placeholders are distributed, therefore some inaccuracy may
       occur if Object does not fills up all available space inside the placeholder.


                                                                                                222
6.1.8. Changing Objects Z-Order
Objects within a Slide appear sequentially. It is very illustrative in case objects are positioned
using cascading (see picture below). The newly created objects displayed first, therefore they are
covered by objects, which have been created later.




To modify the sequence of the objects (Z-Order), use the context menu Order




or one of the toolbar buttons:

      Bring to Front. Selected object will be placed on the top of all other Objects.
      Send to Back. Selected Object will be placed beneath any other Object.
      Bring Forward. Selected Object will be moved one step up.
      Send Backward. Selected Object will be moved one step down.

                                                                                              223
6.2. Effects. Controlling display time.
6.2.1. Objects display time. Timeline Panel.
For the objects on the Slide it is possible to define the start time for displaying the object and
also, the duration of the objects display. Moreover, it is possible to specify that object should be
displayed only when initiated by certain event.
To modify object display start time and duration of the object display select Format… item from
the object context menu. “Format” dialog screen opens up.




On the “Display” tab of the “Format” window you can define the following parameters:
   •   Object display mode You can choose one out of four options:
           o None – object will not be displayed at all. This mode is used when object needs to
                be displayed only upon certain action from the user.
           o Rest of Frame – object will be shown from the moment display was turned on,
                up until transition to the next Frame within the same Slide (or to another Slide, in
                case current Frame is the last one or the only one on the Slide).
           o Rest of the Slide - object will be shown from the moment display was turned on,
                up until transition to the next Slide
           o Specified time – object will be shown from the moment display was turned on
                until specified time.
   •   Appear after. Defines delay of the object display start time relative to the Frame display
       start time.
Besides explicitly specifying object’s display time, there is also a possibility to use visual
controls on the “Timeline” panel.


                                                                                                224
Select View – Timeline to open “Timeline” panel. On the top portion of the module’s window
“Timeline” panel opens up.




On the panel there is a timetable containing all objects of the current Frame. The thin grey
colored vertical line represents time limit for the Frame display end time. In case Slide consists
of several Frames, at this particular time transition to the next Frame occurs. Frame display time
can be modified by dragging grey colored vertical line to the left or to the right along the time
scale.
Stripe lines with object’s identifiers in the “Frame timing” panel represent the time duration of
the object display. Left boundary of the stripe line represents object display start time. Right
boundary of the stripe line represents the time when object will disappear. You can change
object display start time and duration of the object display by dragging (using mouse) the borders
of the stripe lines or the stripe line itself. In case the object display mode is set to “Rest of the
Slide” stripe line ends with small grey triangle outside time limit of current Frame.
Stripe lines with mouse cursors on it represent the time duration of the cursors movement.      The
empty spots on the stripe lines represent time during which the cursor remains still.
       IMPORTANT! In case “Display Click” setting is specified in the cursor’s properties, you
       should define the pause before the next cursor move or before Frame display end time is
       not less than 0.7 seconds.



6.2.2. Object entry and exit effects
By default objects are entirely displayed on the frame. However, to make the learning process
even more interactive, specify effects at display.
Use “Display” tab on the “Format” screen to specify object entry transition. The CourseLab (and
consequently the CourseLab player) contains 24 options of built-in entry transitions.
       LIMITATION: The full set of effects displays correctly only in Internet Explorer browser,
       in all other browsers the set of effects is limited. In case selected effect is not supported
       by particular browser CourseLab player will automatically replace such effect with the
       one supported by current browser.
For each effect out of all (entry or exit) specify duration in seconds.




                                                                                                 225
Important to remember, that:
   •   Unlike the time of entry effect execution, which is included into the time of object
       execution, the time of exit effect is not included into the time of object execution, thus
       such effect will be carried out in “overtime”.
   •   In fact, effects as well as other common settings are applicable to the object’s
       placeholder. Therefore, if placeholder’s size is much bigger than size of actual object,
       then effect execution against an empty placeholder space might take some extra time.
   •   Effects can be used not only at the time of object appearance, but also, at object display
       (or closing) initiated by DISPLAY action.




6.3. Binding sounds to Objects
In the learning Module created by the CourseLab you can bind audio files with any object. Use
“Sound” tab on the “Format” dialog screen, select audio file to be bound with the object (file will
be automatically copied into the “Images” folder of current learning Module).




                                                                                               226
By default, sound starts playing right after the object appears on the frame. This feature can be
turned off by marking “Disallow autoplay” check box. In this case audio file will be bound to the
object, however for playing the sound special action “SOUND” should be used.
The following audio formats can be used: Adobe Flash (*.swf), or any format supported by
Windows Media Player (*.wav, *.wma, *.mp3 and so on).
          IMPORTANT! When using audio files, make sure to turn ON the feature under (“Module
          menu – Runtime Settings”), which checks whether or not system has required component
          for playing specific audio formats.



6.4. Object Properties
Object Properties are parameters of object, which can be used in actions and text substitution.

6.4.1. Common Object Properties
Common Object Properties are properties that belong to every CourseLab object, and can be
used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID):

 Property                                   Returns                              Syntax

      x        Returns X coordinate of top-left corner of object's position on the $OBJ_ID.x
               Frame. For moving object it is always start position, defined in
               Edit mode.

      y        Returns Y coordinate of top-left corner of object's position on the $OBJ_ID.y
               Frame. For moving object it is always start position, defined in
               Edit mode.

     w         Returns width of the object in pixels.                            $OBJ_ID.w

                                                                                               227
h      Returns width of the object in pixels.                                $OBJ_ID.h



6.4.2. Specific Object Properties

Specific Object Properties are parameters of object, which can be used for actions and text
substitutions. Depending on the type of the object there could be different set of specific
properties (or none). Read corresponding object's topic to find which properties are available.




                                                                                                  228
7. Multiframe animation
At first, the Slide contains only the single Frame. It is possible to achieve animation effect by
creating the sequence of the Frames with predefined duration of playback assigned to each
Frame.



7.1. Using Frames
                       Use “Frames” panel for managing the Frames on the Slide. To open
                       “Frames” panel, select View – Frames.




In the bottom part of the Module window the “Frames” panel opens up.




Add as many frames as necessary. Make appropriate changes to each of them to reflect
animation sequence.



7.2. Frame display time
                                       Each individual Frame has its own display time. To
                                       modify display time in the “Frames” panel select
                                       Advance… item from the frame’s context menu.




                                       “Advance” dialog screen opens up.

                                                                                             229
Define display time in seconds.
       IMPORTANT! Specified Frame’s display time has a higher priority over the display time
       of the objects within the same Frame – in case this time is less than the display time of
       some objects, then such objects will not be displayed at all.
Specify method of transition to the next Frame – “Advance” setting. By default, transition to the
next Frame takes place upon expiration of the frame’s display time (setting “Immediate”)
Alternative setting is “Wait for Action” – it means stopping upon finishing frame’s display. In
this case, creation of action, which will trigger transition to the next Frame, will be of your
responsibility.




                                                                                             230
8. Actions and Events
8.1. “Event – Action” Mechanism
All interactions between objects within learning modules created by CourseLab are based/built
on “Event – Action” mechanism.
Event is a signal originated either by the object or by the course player at the certain time.
Generally, events are generated at the moment of changing the state of the object (for example,
at the moment of object appearance) otherwise events are generated externally (for example, by
mouse click within the object).
Events are used for triggering the actions when composing relations inside the module.
Actions are predefined changes of the object state and/or module variables, which are used for
composing complex object behavior.
The Event trigger could be either Frame or Slide or one of the objects on the Frame. In first case
all events are generated by CourseLab player, in the second case the common events for all
objects are generated by the CourseLab player and all object specific events are generated
directly in the object’s code.
For illustration purposes and to better understand “Event – Action” mechanism let us review the
following example: Picture for yourself a street with pedestrian crosswalk equipped with tow
traffic lights, one for pedestrians, and another one for vehicles. At the red signal of the traffic
light for vehicles the traffic stops, and starts again when red signal switches its color to green.
Respectively, the pedestrians start crossing the crosswalk on the green signal and stop at red. In
the example described above in the event of “red signal of the traffic light for vehicles” “Car”
type of objects performed action “Stop”; and alternatively in the event of “green signal of the
traffic light for vehicles” “Car” type of objects performed action “Start”. “Pedestrians” type of
objects performs similar actions but using events of its own traffic light. The source for the
events in both cases is two traffic lights.



8.2. Events generated by the CourseLab Player
8.2.1. Slide and Frame Events




Each Slide and Frame of the Learning Module is generating the following two events:



                                                                                               231
•    “beforedisplay” event arises at the moment when all objects of the current Frame are
       fully loaded, right before displaying the first object from the list (remember, that even in
       case all objects should be displayed simultaneously, practically the first object to be
       displayed is the one which is located underneath of all other objects). Even though both
       Slide’s “beforedisplay” events and Slide’s first Frame “beforedisplay” events occur
       virtually simultaneously, the order of triggering is as follows: The Slide’s
       “beforedisplay” event will occur first, and next, the Frame’s “beforedisplay” event will
       follow.
   •    “afterdisplay” event occurs at the moment of finishing display of the last object from
       the list on the current Frame. Please note, that “afterdisplay” event indicates that all
       objects intended for automatic display have been displayed and this event has no relation
       with transition to the next Frame or Slide. Even though “afterdisplay” events for the last
       Frame and Slide occur virtually simultaneously, the order of triggering is as follows: The
       Frame’s “afterdisplay” event will occur first, and next, the Slide’s “DISPLAY END”
       event will follow.
Please note that in the most common case scenario when Slide contains only one Frame, the
“beforedisplay” and “afterdisplay” events occur virtually simultaneously.


8.2.2. Events common to all objects




Any object located on the Frame can be source for the following events:
   •   “onclick” event is generated by the user at the moment of left mouse click directly within
       an object.
   •    “ondblclick” event is generated at the moment of mouse double-click directly within an
       object. The pause between the clicks which indicates whether this is double-click rather
       than two single clicks precisely corresponds to the mouse properties defined under the
       operating system settings on the user’s computer.
   •    “onlmousedown” event is generated at the moment when left mouse button is pressed
       down within an object.


                                                                                               232
•   “onlmouseup” event is generated at the moment when pressed left mouse button is
       released within an object..
   •   “onrmousedown” event is generated at the moment when right mouse button is pressed
       down within an object.
   •   “onrmouseup” event is generated at the moment when pressed right mouse button is
       released within an object..
   •    “onmouseover” event is generated at the moment when mouse cursor reaches the
       outside border of the object, i.e. at the object’s “Entry” point.
   •    “onmouseout” event is generated at the moment when mouse cursor reaches the inside
       border of the object, i.e. at the object’s “Exit” point.
   •    “ondrop” event is generated at the moment when the dragged object is dropped. It is
       important to understand, that in case one object is dragged and dropped over another
       object, the second (target) object would be the source of generated event.
   •   “beforedisplay” event is generated right before displaying the current object
   •   “afterdisplay” event is generated at the moment of finishing object display (after
       complete finishing effect execution, in case the transition effect has been used at display)




8.3. Object Custom Events
Besides general events, which are common to all objects, there is a set of objects (usually these
are pretty complex objects, for example, questions), which can generate custom events (specific
to this Object). For example, “Question” type of objects can generate the following events: On
Success, On Failure, On Attempts Limit, and other events specific to the test questions.
However, when it comes to managing these events are absolutely similar to any other events.
Objects custom events are described in the corresponding sections under the “Object”.



8.4. Actions
To create actions you can either employ built-in actions (which are listed in the Action Panel),
or use JavaScript if you are familiar with this language.

8.4.1. Variables and object properties in action parameters
If the action parameter is the plain text string or number (i.e. not an Object ID, Slide ID or time),
then it can contain CourseLab variable values and/or other object’s property values.
Syntax for variables: #var_name (where var_name is the name of variable and # means that
variable value should be used).
Syntax for properties: $OBJ_ID.property (where OBJ_ID is object ID, property is property
name and $ means that property value should be used).
       Note, that if corresponding variable or property does not exist, then the string will
       remain intact!

8.4.2. Built-in actions
Actions vary depending on the target they imply to; they are classified as execution actions (in
fact, executing some actions against the objects) and service actions (intended for managing
execution of other actions or assigning variables).

                                                                                                 233
Some of the service actions can have dependant actions, i.e. execution of such actions depends
on the execution results of the given service action. Dependant actions in the sequence of actions
are distinguished by right indent with regards to the parent action.


8.4.2.1. Execution actions


EXTERNAL URL
EXTERNAL URL action enables opening resource external to the Learning Module in the new
Browser Window. EXTERNAL URL action has a single parameter, which is URL for opening
in the new Window. URL should be specified with respect to the internet addressing rules,
specifying the protocol, for example: http://www.courselab.com/ .


RETURN
Action RETURN performs transition to the Slide where action CALL was previously executed.
It does not have any parameters.


ROTATE - START


ROTATE - START action initiates object rotating. ROTATE - START action has three
parameters:
   •   Object ID is the identifier of the object which will be rotated. Object ID can be either
       selected from the “Select Object” dialog (press button next to the field to open this
       dialog), or inserted as a text input (sometimes this approach is more convenient).
   •   Angle is a numerical field, which indicates the angle and direction in degrees (input items
       can only be digits; no special characters are allowed). The positive value refers to rotating
       clockwise; alternatively the value with “minus” symbol (negative) refers to rotating
       counter-clockwise. Actually, you can rotate the object more than one full turn, specifying
       angle parameter of more than 360 degrees.
   •   Duration – numeric field, which defines time of rotation in seconds. Zero value
       corresponds to the instant rotation of the object.


   Limitations:
           •   Objects rotation is supported only by Internet Explorer Browsers, rotation is not
               supported by other Browsers.
           •   The object, which can be dragged by mouse, can not be rotated. For this type of
               objects this action will be ignored.




ROTATE - STOP


                                                                                                234
ROTATE - STOP action discontinues object rotating. ROTATE STOP action has two
parameters:


   •   Object ID is the identifier of the object which will be rotated. Object ID can be either
       selected from the “Select Object” dialog (press button next to the field to open this
       dialog), or inserted as a text input (sometimes this approach is more convenient).
   •   All Objects is a field with «Yes/NO» value options. In case “Yes” is selected, rotating of
       all currently rotating objects will be interrupted; the value of the Object ID parameter will
       be ignored. In case “No” is selected, only rotating of the object specified in Object ID
       parameter will be interrupted.
   Limitations:
          •   Objects rotation is supported only by Internet Explorer Browsers, rotation is not
              supported by other Browsers.
          •   The object, which can be dragged by mouse, can not be rotated. For this type of
              objects this action will be ignored.


CALL
CALL action initiates transition to the specified Frame of any Slide. CALL action has two
parameters:
   •   Frame is the identifier of the Frame where transition will be performed to. Frame ID can
       be either selected from the “Select Slide and Frame” dialog (press button next to the field
       to open this dialog), or inserted as a text input (sometimes this approach is more
       convenient). Note that this parameter is valid only if Option parameter is set to
       “Specified Frame”.
   •   Option parameter determines the Frame where transition will be performed to. In case
       “Specified Frame” (default value) is selected, transition will be performed to the Frame
       specified in Frame parameter. In case any other value (“Next Frame”, “Next Slide”,
       “Previous Frame”, “Previous Slide”) is selected, Frame parameter will be ignored.


During execution of the CALL action, identifier of the current Slide remains in memory as a
parameter for the RETURN action.


MOVE - START


MOVE - START action initiates moving of the object within a frame. There are five parameters:
   •   Object ID is the identifier of the object, which will be moved. Object ID can be either
       selected from the “Select Object” dialog (press button next to the field to open this
       dialog), or inserted as a text input (sometimes this approach is more convenient).
   •   X – is a numerical field, which defines Object’s horizontal shift in pixels, depending on
       the Additive parameter this value can be either absolute (i.e. counted off frame’s top left
       corner), or relative to the current value. Inserted value can be located within a Frame as
       well as outside the Frame (in this case object will be moved outside the Frame and will
       become invisible).


                                                                                                235
•   Y – is a numerical field, which defines Object’s vertical shift in pixels, depending on the
       Additive parameter this value can be either absolute (i.e. counted off frame’s top left
       corner), or relative to the current value. Inserted value can be located within a Frame as
       well as outside the Frame (in this case object will be moved outside the Frame and will
       become invisible).
   •   Additive – is a field with «Add/Replace» value options. In case “Add” is selected,
       inserted X and Y shifts will be added to the current X and Y coordinates (i.e. the object
       will be moved with regards to added coordinates relative to the object’s current position).
       In case “Replace” is selected, specified X and Y shifts define the absolute coordinates of
       the point where the object will be moved.
   •   Duration – is a numeric field which defines time in seconds of object relocation. Zero
       value corresponds to instant object relocation.


       Limitation: The object, which can be dragged by mouse, can not be moved. For this type
       of objects this action will be ignored.




MOVE - STOP


MOVE - STOP action interrupts movement of the selected object or all currently moving
objects. MOVE - STOP action has the following two parameters:
   •   Object ID is the identifier of the object, which movement needs to be interrupted.
       Object ID can be either selected from the “Select Object” dialog (press button next to the
       field to open this dialog), or inserted as a text input (sometimes this approach is more
       convenient to use).In case movement of all objects need to be interrupted (please see “All
       Objects” parameter below) input value for Object field is ignored (and it may be left
       blank).
   •   All Objects is a field with «Yes/NO» value options. In case “Yes” is selected,
       movements of all currently moving objects will be interrupted; input value for Object
       parameter will be ignored. In case “No” is selected, only movement of the Object
       specified in the “Object” parameter will be cancelled.


SOUND


SOUND action either initiates or stops playback of the audio file.
Sound action has three parameters:


   •   Object ID is the identifier of the object with associated audio file, which playback needs
       to be either started, or stopped (binding audio file to the object described in the “Objects”
       section). In case “File” parameter is not empty, input value for this field is ignored (and
       it may be left blank) and action will be performed against the file specified in the “File”
       parameter instead of the object.
   •   Employ “File” parameter to specify path to the audio file, which playback needs to be
       either started or stopped. Use “Select File” dialog (press button next to the field to open

                                                                                                236
this dialog) to specify audio file for playback and it will be automatically copied into the
       “Images” folder of the Module. Audio file can be in Macromedia Flash Player (*.swf)
       format or any other format supported by Windows Media Player (*.mp3, *.wav, *.wma,
       and others). In case “File” parameter is not empty, input value for this field will have
       higher priority than value of the “Object” parameter, thus action will be performed
       against the file specified in the “File” parameter instead of the Object. The value of the
       “Object” parameter will be ignored.
   •   Action parameter is a field with «Start/Stop» value options. In case “Start” is selected,
       selected audio file (explicitly specified or bound with the Object) will start playing.
       “Stop” value will stop playback of the selected audio file.


   IMPORTANT! For playing different audio formats, remember to turn on the feature, which
   checks whether or not required software has been installed on the target machine before
   loading the learning Module (menu “Module – Runtime Settings – Checks”).


METHOD
Method action enables launching execution of methods – actions built into the Object
However, it should be taken into consideration that not all types of objects have built-in Methods
(Usually, only complex types of objects like “Agent” have built-in methods).
There are two steps in specifying parameter for the “Method” action. At the first step, only the
following two parameters are accessible, and they should be specified strictly in the following
order:
   •   Object ID is the identifier of the object, which method should be launched.
   •   Method, which should be launched.
Further, in case the selected method has associated input parameters additional entry fields will
appear for inserting method’s parameters.


NAVIGATION
Navigation action enables turning ON/OFF capability for transition to another Slides of the
Module. For example, the necessity to turn off the transition capability may arise if you wish to
allow user to move to the next Slide only after he/she completes the appointed tasks.
Navigation action has two parameters:
   •   Navigation Objects parameter determines the set of navigation objects, which need to be
       turned ON/OFF.
   •   Action parameter is a field with «Allow/Restrict» value options.


GOTO
GOTO action initiates transition to the specified Frame of any Slide. GOTO action has two
parameters:
   •   Frame is the identifier of the Frame where transition will be performed to. Frame ID can
       be either selected from the “Select Slide and Frame” dialog (press button next to the field
       to open this dialog), or inserted as a text input (sometimes this approach is more


                                                                                               237
convenient). Note that this parameter is valid only if Option parameter is set to
       “Specified Frame”.
   •   Option parameter determines the Frame where transition will be performed to. In case
       “Specified Frame” (default value) is selected, transition will be performed to the Frame
       specified in Frame parameter. In case any other value (“Next Frame”, “Next Slide”,
       “Previous Frame”, “Previous Slide”) is selected, Frame parameter will be ignored.
Unlike the similar CALL action, identifier of the current Slide does not remain in memory.


DISPLAY
Display action enables turning ON/OFF object display. This is the most frequently used action. It
has four parameters:
   •   Object ID is the identifier of the object, which must be either displayed, or hidden.
   •   Display parameter is the field with «Show/Hide» value options.
   •   Effect parameter is the field where you can select effect that will be used for this action.
       In case “Object” value is selected, then effect type will be read from Object’s properties.
   •   Duration is a numeric field which defines effect time in seconds.




MSGBOX
MSGBOX action enables display of the alert message for the user with text specified in the
single “Text” parameter for this action. When necessary, you can use variable #var_name for
insertion into the text (please refer to VARIABLE section). In case the variable with that specific
name is found, variable’s value will replace variable’s name; if not - no changes will occur.




8.4.2.2. Service Actions
IF ... ELSE


Conditional action. Conditional action by itself does not perform any noticeable changes to the
Frame, it is rather intended for managing the execution of other actions. This action enables
launching of different dependant actions (or sequences of actions) with regards to the condition
being evaluated.
Condition is the only parameter for this action. Condition can be any conditional expression,
which results to true or false Boolean values (usually comparisons). If condition is satisfied
(value is true), the dependant actions will be executed.
       NOTE: Conditions are evaluated using JavaScript, therefore Javascript conditional
       operators should be used.
In case alternatives should be used when conditional expression is not satisfied (value is false),
ELSE action can be added as a dependant action to the IF action, and alternative sequence of
actions dependant to the ELSE action is inserted.




                                                                                               238
DELAY


DELAY action that is inserted into the sequence of actions will interrupt actions execution either
for explicitly specified time, or until the next action performed by the user.
There are two parameters for the DELAY action:
   •   Duration parameter defines delay time in seconds for interrupting the sequence of
       actions. In case parameter “Wait for action” is set to “Yes”, then “Delay” parameter
       will be ignored.
   •   Infinite parameter is a field with ”Yes/No“ value options. In case “Yes” is selected,
       sequence of actions will be interrupted indefinitely, until some action from the user is
       performed. Duration parameter in this case will be ignored. In case “No” is selected, the
       sequence of actions will be interrupted for the time specified in the Duration field.


VARIABLE
Variable action defines variable and its value, or, in case variable with specified name already
exists, variable’s value will be changed. There are three parameters:
   •   Name parameter defines variable name, which can be further used in expressions.
       Important: variable name must contain only Latin alphabet letters and numbers, and
       must not start with a digit.
   •   Value parameter defines initial variable value. The Value parameter could be either text
       or number.
   •   Scope parameter is a field with «Current Slide/Entire Module» value options. In case
       “Current Slide” option is selected, variable will be accessible only within currently
       selected Slide; upon transition to any other Slide this variable will be discarded. In case
       “Entire Module” option is selected, variable is accessible for all the Slides within a
       Module.
To modify existing variable’s value, use the same “Variable” action, in this case in the “Name”
field specify name of existing variable.
Variable’s value may be used in various expressions (generally, in the conditional statements for
the IF action). To insert variable value into expression use “#” prefix symbol in front of the
variable name. For example, if variable name is var_name, then #var_name should be used for
inserting variable value into the expression.


CHECKHIT
This action is used for verifying the particular Object that was dropped onto the target Object.
Typically, this action is triggered by ondrop event generated by object-target.
The only parameter for this action is:
   •   Object ID is the identifier of the object being dragged, which is to be verified with
       regards to compliance.
In case identifier of the object being dragged is identical to the specified one, sequence of actions
under the current action will be executed.




                                                                                                 239
SEQUENTIALLY
SEQUENTIALLY action enables launching of dependant actions in strict sequential order, i.e.
each next action will be launched only upon completion of the previous one, unlike the usual
routine, where actions are launched in predefined order; however the previous action may not
even finished.


TIMER
”Timer” action is used for delayed launching of dependant actions. Duration is the only
parameter, and it defines delay time in seconds.


FOR
“FOR” action is used for executing dependant actions specified number of times. There are three
parameters:
   •   “From” is a starting value for the cycle counter
   •   “To” is a stopping value for the cycle counter
   •   “Step” parameter defines iteration step for the cycle counter.
The variable used for the cycle counter has a fixed name cc (shortcut for Cycle Counter) and is
accessible using #cc (please refer to the VARIABLE section).


8.4.2.3. Using JavaScript
If you are familiar with JavaScript programming language you can use JavaScript code by two
ways:

8.4.2.3.1. Action JAVASCRIPT
Action JAVASCRIPT enables execution of JavaScript code. This action has single parameter –
JavaScript text field, which contains submitted JavaScript code. However, you can use only
inline code here (functions are not supported in this action, please read next section).
       Important! Remember, it is your responsibility to verify the correctness of JavaScript
       code you create.


8.4.2.3.2. Including JavaScript in module.js files
Every Module has its own module.js file which can be used for inserting custom JavaScript code,
including custom functions, which can be addressed from JAVASCRIPT actions. File module.js
is located in the Module folder and can be edited using Notepad or any suitable programming
tool.
       Important! Remember, it is your responsibility to verify the correctness of JavaScript
       code you create.


8.4.2.4. Actions with scores and statuses
SET SCORE
                                                                                           240
SET_SCORE action changes score for specified objective.
It has 4 parameters:
   •   Objective is the identifier of the objective, the score of which will be modified as a result
       of execution of SET SCORE action.
   •   Source – text field, which specifies the source of the current score modification. This
       value is used for further score modification. For example, it can contain ID of some two-
       step task, every step of which has different scores. In this case Source parameter of SET
       SCORE action for every step must be the same (because both steps are parts of one task).
   •   Add – indicates on how the value of Score parameter will be used for specified source.
       This parameter is a field with “Add/Replace” value options. In first case, specified score
       will be added to already existing in the given objective score from specified source. In
       second case, the score value from the specified source will be replaced with the new one.
   •   Score – numeric field for assigning value to the score.


SET COMPLETION STATUS
SET COMPLETION STATUS action changes Completion Status for the specified objective.
It has two parameters:
   •   Objective is the identifier of the objective, Completion Status of which will be changed
       as a result of action execution.
   •   Status parameter represents the value assigned to Objective’s Completion Status. The
       Status can have one of the following values:
           o Unknown – No information on completion.
           o Not Attempted – Completion of the objective is not started yet.
           o Incomplete – Completion of the objective is started, but it is not finished yet.
           o Complete – Completion of the objective is finished.
Upon launching of Learning Module the Completion Status for all objectives is set to
“Unknown”.


SET SUCCESS STATUS
SET SUCCESS STATUS action changes Success Status for the specified objective.
It has two parameters:
   •   Objective is the identifier of the objective, Success Status of which will be changed as a
       result of action execution.
   •   Status parameter represents the value assigned to Objective’s Success Status. The Status
       can have one of the following values:
           o Unknown
           o Failed
           o Passed
Upon launching of Learning Module the Success Status for all objectives is set to “Unknown”.


IF SUCCESS STATUS

                                                                                                241
IF SUCCESS STATUS action executes set of dependant actions according to the Success Status
for the specified objective.
It has two parameters:
   •   Objective is the identifier of the objective, Success Status of which must be verified.
   •   Status parameter represents the value, which will be used for verifying correspondence
       of actual objective’s Success Status. The Status can have one of the following values:
           o Unknown
           o Failed
           o Passed




                                                                                            242
9. Scores
Scores in Learning Modules created with CourseLab are based on using objectives.



9.1. Objectives

Objective is a special parameter for evaluating of Learning Module completion.
There might be one or several objectives in the single Module. Technically, there is no limitation
on number of learning objectives; however, such limitations can be introduced when using
certain International standards of data transfer protocols (for example, in SCORM 1.2 the
number of objectives can not exceed 100).
Each objective has a Score, Success Status and Completion Status.
Success Status can have one of the following values:
   •   Unknown
   •   Failed (objective is not accomplished)
   •   Passed (objective is accomplished)
Completion Status can have one of the following values:
   •   Unknown
   •   Not Attempted (completion of the objective is not started yet).
   •   Incomplete (completion of the objective is started, but it is not finished yet)
   •   Complete (completion of the objective is finished).
One of the objectives for the Module must have defined setting “Module objective”. Module
translates results of completion of this objective to the Learning Management Systems as a result
of completion for the entire Module. By default, such objective is named “total”.
During Module execution the properties of the objectives change either by employing special
actions (please refer to 8.4.1.4. Actions with scores and statuses), or by employing actions built-
in into the complex objects (for example, “Question” objects record score into the defined
objective by itself).
To add new objective:
   •   Select Module – Runtime Settings…
   •   In the opened “Runtime Settings” dialog screen go to the “Objectives” tab.
   •   On the “Objectives” tab press “Add” button.
   •   Use “Objective” dialog screen to specify objective’s settings.




                                                                                               243
9.2. Rules

The Rule presents the set of conditions. If conditions are satisfied the status of indicated
objective will change. Using Rules allows transferring control regarding both Success and
Completion Statuses to the runtime player, i.e. statuses will be changed automatically.
To add Rule:
   •   Select Module – Runtime Settings…
   •   In the opened “Runtime Settings” dialog screen go to the “Rules” page.
   •   On the “Rules” tab press “Add” button.
For each Rule specify the following:
   •   Identifier of the objective, which status will be changed due to the Rule execution.
   •   Success Status for specified objective (in case Rule must change it).
   •   Completion Status for specified objective (in case Rule must change it).
   •   Conditions. Each condition defines one of the following checks:
           o Slides Visited. Condition is satisfied if during Module execution all the Slides in
             sequence, including the ones with defined identifiers were viewed by the student.
           o Objective Score. Condition is satisfied if value of the actual objective’s score for
             the defined condition is for example greater or equal to the specified value. For
             comparison of specified score with actual score, the following operators are
             employed: <, >, =, <=, >=, and <>.
           o Objective Success. Condition is satisfied if actual value of the Objective Success
             Status corresponds to the specified one.
           o Objective Completion. Condition is satisfied if actual value of the Objective
             Completion Status corresponds to the specified one.
   •   The logical expression among the conditions. If conditions are satisfied, Rule will be
       executed. The different logical conditions are connected to each other by following
       logical operators: AND, OR, XOR, and NOT. To change logical operation, select desired
       operation from the list and press “Operation” button. The logical operators can be
       grouped by using round parentheses. Select conditions from the list and press “Group”
       button to add parentheses. Select conditions inside of parentheses and press “Ungroup”
       button to remove parentheses.
Rules allow building cascading Rules – when status of the single objective depends on the
statuses of other objectives.
       IMPORTANT! Rules are executed at every slide transition sequentially from first to last
       in the list. This means that the Rule for “strong” Status must be executed later (for
       example, Rule for “Complete” Completion Status must be placed after “Incomplete”
       Rule).




                                                                                              244
10. Screen Capture and creating simulations of other
applications

Learning courses are created for many purposes. One of the most common objectives is
instructing on how to use various software. To facilitate the creation of software simulations
CourseLab contains built-in screen capture feature, therefore no additional software needs to be
installed. Simulations are recorded directly into the internal format of the editor and can be
edited later as usual frames. Internet Browser’s capabilities allow replaying of such animated
simulations. No additional components (Flash, Shockwave, Media Player, etc.) are required.



10.1. What needs to be done prior to recording the simulation?
Create learning Module (or select an already created one) to insert simulation. Select (or create
the new) slide for placing simulation. Editor completely allocates each simulation session into
the single slide and automatically adds necessary frames; there is no need to add frames
manually. Define the size of the free space on the frame within the slide where simulation will be
fitted - this is the requirement for setting up simulation recording.
       IMPORTANT! CourseLab does not support auto scaling for captured screens. Screen
       captures will be performed only within user defined area in scale of 1:1. Therefore, make
       sure that defined size of the captured screen enables recording all required information
       from the target software. In case of size insufficiency, you might need to change template
       of the current slide to increase size of recording area.
Specify graphic format for storing screen captures. Select “Settings” item from the “Service”
menu, on the “Screen Capture” tab specify the desired file format. As long as you do not have
any specific restrictions, we recommend using PNG format for screen capturing, since this
format performs the best in terms of quality/size of the saved files.
Even though you can correct results later on, you should determine screen capturing scenario
beforehand, in order to avoid mistakes.



10.2. Screen Capture Wizard
While on the slide, which is to be used for recording the simulation, select “Capture Screens”
item from the “Tools” menu. Screen Capture Wizard opens up.
From the drop-down menu select program to record the simulation from. Mark “Capture Cursor”
check box if you need to record mouse’s clicks and movements. Clicks and movements will be
captured automatically, once the recording starts. On the next Wizard’s screen specify position
for the top left corner of the area for placing simulations within a Frame. By default, position of
top left corner of the area for recording simulations within a frame is equal to top left corner of
the frame (position 0,0), however there are instances where it is not acceptable. For example, if
there is a title located at the top of the frame, then top left corner of the area for recording should
be placed underneath, by adding frame title’s height in pixels into the “Vertical” field.
The next window of the Wizard defines location and size of the area on the monitor to be
captured. The editor will try to adjust captured application window to the specified size
automatically, if possible.



                                                                                                  245
After specifying these parameters you will come to the Wizard’s last screen before entering
screen capture mode. Before starting capture, familiarize yourself with controls available in the
capture mode, including capture mode exiting option.



10.3. Modify parameters settings while in capture mode
After switching to the capture mode, CourseLab minimizes into the icon on the windows taskbar
and red rectangular enclose appears, which limits the area or capturing.
As mentioned before, the editor will try to adjust captured application window to the specified
area size. However, some programs will not allow doing so. In this case, you can manually
adjust screen capture area to fit the target window, or opposite, target window to fit screen
capture area. You can modify screen capture area by dragging border or by using context menu
of the capture area.
Adjust screen capture area to fit the target window.
Right click within the red enclose which limits capture area. Select “Adjust Enclose” item from
the context menu. Screen capture area will automatically adjust its size to the current window
size of the target application.
Adjust target window to fit the screen capture area.
Right click within the red enclose, which limits capture area. Select “Adjust Window” item from
the context menu. Editor will automatically attempt adjusting size of target window to the size
of screen capture area. If target program did not allow such change, adjust size manually.
Precise sizing of the screen capture area and recording position.
Right click within the red enclose, which limits capture area. Select “Size” item from the context
menu. In the opened window you can modify numerical values for size and position of the screen
capture area. Use another tab of the “Size” screen to modify position of the top left corner of the
area within a frame, where capture recording will be inserted.

10.4. Capture Frames
Make sure that all desired information is well fitted inside of the screen capture area. Press
PrintScrn key, the first frame is captured. Go to the next step in target program, and press
PrintScrn one more time. Using PrintScrn continue capturing all the changes that you apply to
the target program, until you complete recording based on the desired scenario.
       IMPORTANT! If you marked “Capture Cursor” check box before entering the capture
       mode all mouse’s clicks and movements will be recorded automatically. However,
       remember that mouse click does not automatically capture the screen, do not forget
       pressing PrintScrn where appropriate.
Upon capture scenario is completed, double click CourseLab icon from the taskbar. CourseLab
Editor will be restored.



10.5. Special capture mode
In addition to capturing the entire window of the target program, you can also record part of the
screen capture area to the frame as a separate picture without interrupting capturing flow. It can
be useful for example, for drop-down menu imitation (you can save the menu as a separate
picture and further use editor’s capabilities for manipulating this picture).


                                                                                               246
Press “Shift-PrintScrn” combination to enter the special capture mode. The target program
freezes up and in addition to the red you will see the blue enclose frame indicating special
capture mode. Modify size of the special capture area by dragging border and press “PrintScrn”.
The content within blue area will be captured on the current frame as a separate picture. You can
enter or modify identifier name to make it more self-explanatory before saving the picture
(remember, that identifier names should contain only Latin alphabet letters, numbers, and
underscore character).
Use the same technique for “cutting” any number of the pictures from the current captured
screen, by sequentially changing size and location of the blue screen capture area and by
pressing the “PrintScrn”.
After you finish “cutting”, you can go back to the main capture repository by pressing “Shift-
PrintScrn”. The blue enclose frame will disappear and captured program will “unfreeze”; also
“PrintScrn” button will continue capturing the entire area.



10.6. Editing captured frames
So you have your captured screens, and you are back to the CourseLab.
All captured frames are present on the Frame Panel. Sometimes, in case “Capture Cursor” mode
is “On” the very first frame will be empty, it means that capturing mouse movements took place
prior to the first screen capture. You may simply remove this frame.
Review all the captured screens. Make sure that all the necessary screens are captured. Repeat
capturing if any of the screens are missing
The blue tracing lines on the frame are reflections of the mouse movements (they will not be
visible when replaying). When required, you can modify location of the mouse clicks (you can
drag it) and/or remove unwanted clicks completely, in this case trace of the mouse path will be
automatically adjusted.
Note, that you can also modify the cursor shape, speed of movements, and time duration for
holding down the mouse button. To accomplish these modifications, right click on the cursor
image and select “Format Cursor” item from the context menu.
However, the captured set of frames is not quite finished and should be considered as
“groundwork” for future editing. Most likely, you are going to need to provide additional
supporting explanations in a form of balloons or popup windows.
From the editor’s point of view, any of the captured frame is treated as typical frame (the only
difference is recorded mouse movements; please consider this fact). On any of the captured
frames you can insert additional objects from the objects library (balloons, popup, pictures, etc.)
For all the captured frames you can use actions, change timeouts and so on, just like with any
other typical frames.
By default, the replay time for the particular frame is defined by the time spent on mouse
movements. However, you can manually change frame display time, if necessary. Right click on
the necessary frame and use “Transition” item from the context menu. Specify required timeout
for the frame.




                                                                                               247
11. Import Microsoft PowerPoint presentations

                               CourseLab allows importing content of the            Microsoft
                               PowerPoint presentations into the Learning Module.
                               To accomplish import, select “Import from PowerPoint”
                               command from the “Tools” menu.




“Import from PowerPoint” wizard opens up.




Specify path to the MS PowerPoint presentation to be imported and press “Next” button.




                                                                                         248
Specify Master-Slide (press “Master” button to select) which will be the base for imported
presentation. Pink area on the Wizard’s screen represents imported presentation. Press “Position”
button to specify position of imported presentation on the Slide and scaling. You can import
comments to Slides if necessary and position it on the Slide the same way as presentation main
body (grey area represents comments). Press “Next” button to proceed.




                                                                                             249
On the next wizard’s page you can select Slides which will be imported. Hold down Ctrl key to
select needed Slides. Press “Next” button and start processing. Depending on the size of
presentation, it can take up to several minutes to import presentation.




You may want to compress imported images upon import completion (all scaled images will be
automatically resized and converted to PNG format if necessary). Press “Finish” to return in
editing mode.
In general, imported Slides reproduce corresponding PowerPoint slides. You can further modify
these Slides, if desired.




                                                                                         250

More Related Content

PDF
Unigraphics Full.......
PDF
It project development fundamentals
PDF
Report on dotnetnuke
PDF
BizTalk Practical Course Preview
PDF
NX10 for Engineering Design
PDF
Ug recording excelmacros
PDF
SchoolAdmin - School Fees Collection & Accounting Software
DOCX
Foundry technology note
Unigraphics Full.......
It project development fundamentals
Report on dotnetnuke
BizTalk Practical Course Preview
NX10 for Engineering Design
Ug recording excelmacros
SchoolAdmin - School Fees Collection & Accounting Software
Foundry technology note

What's hot (17)

PDF
Kotlin notes for professionals
PDF
Drive size users_manual
PDF
Hibernate Reference
PDF
Atv32 programming manual
PDF
NX9 for Engineering Design
PDF
LG Stylo 2 Owner's Manual (English)
PDF
affTA00 - 10 Daftar Isi
PDF
Omxx810e
PDF
Albpm60 studio reference_guide
PDF
W java81
PDF
Abcsubmit User Manual - Documentation
PDF
2011 GMC Sierra Upfitting Wisconsin - Light Duty Pickups
PDF
MarvelSoft PayrollAdmin Configuration and User Guide
PDF
Manual de programacion PLC Crouzet Millenium
PDF
Smart pass management platform for face&amp;temperature reader complete tutor...
PDF
Datavideo CG-500 SD/HD Advanced Timeline based CG for live/post production
Kotlin notes for professionals
Drive size users_manual
Hibernate Reference
Atv32 programming manual
NX9 for Engineering Design
LG Stylo 2 Owner's Manual (English)
affTA00 - 10 Daftar Isi
Omxx810e
Albpm60 studio reference_guide
W java81
Abcsubmit User Manual - Documentation
2011 GMC Sierra Upfitting Wisconsin - Light Duty Pickups
MarvelSoft PayrollAdmin Configuration and User Guide
Manual de programacion PLC Crouzet Millenium
Smart pass management platform for face&amp;temperature reader complete tutor...
Datavideo CG-500 SD/HD Advanced Timeline based CG for live/post production
Ad

Viewers also liked (6)

PPTX
Incredible final project
DOC
Let's play with reactions
DOCX
Science fair final 2014
PDF
Science activity class_viii
PPT
How to inflate a balloon using baking soda and vinegar.
DOCX
Baking soda and vinegar experiment report
 
Incredible final project
Let's play with reactions
Science fair final 2014
Science activity class_viii
How to inflate a balloon using baking soda and vinegar.
Baking soda and vinegar experiment report
 
Ad

Similar to Course lab 2_guide_eng (20)

PPTX
Courselab
PDF
Ecdl v5 module 6 print
PDF
10. cutipa portillo, edy dany
PDF
Manual De Publisher 2007
PDF
Step by step power point 2007
PPTX
Looking Back-BIM
PDF
Open edX Building and Running a Course
PDF
Project 2010 Basic Student Manual Heffernan
PPT
Introduction to how to make a powerpoint presentation
PPTX
Power point 2016 module 4 ppt presentation
PDF
0500 I G Impress Guide6x9a
PDF
Illustrated Microsoft Office 365 and PowerPoint 2016 Introductory 1st Edition...
DOC
Courselab Quick start guide
PPT
0000ID lecture ON Mid Fi Prototyping.PPT
PDF
Manual smart notebook se
PDF
Adobe in design cs5 basics
PDF
Sample User Manual
PPTX
Your Ultimate Guide to Powerpoint
PPTX
Powerpoint Made Easy Your Ultimate Guide
PDF
Module 6 powerpoint2010
Courselab
Ecdl v5 module 6 print
10. cutipa portillo, edy dany
Manual De Publisher 2007
Step by step power point 2007
Looking Back-BIM
Open edX Building and Running a Course
Project 2010 Basic Student Manual Heffernan
Introduction to how to make a powerpoint presentation
Power point 2016 module 4 ppt presentation
0500 I G Impress Guide6x9a
Illustrated Microsoft Office 365 and PowerPoint 2016 Introductory 1st Edition...
Courselab Quick start guide
0000ID lecture ON Mid Fi Prototyping.PPT
Manual smart notebook se
Adobe in design cs5 basics
Sample User Manual
Your Ultimate Guide to Powerpoint
Powerpoint Made Easy Your Ultimate Guide
Module 6 powerpoint2010

Course lab 2_guide_eng

  • 1. CourseLab 2.3 User Manual COURSELAB 2.3 USER MANUAL .......................................................................................................................... 1  1. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................... 6  1.1. PREREQUISITES ................................................................................................................................................... 6  1.2. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................... 6  2. COURSELAB OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 7  2.1. ABOUT COURSELAB ........................................................................................................................................... 7  2.2. COMPLIANCE TO STANDARDS ............................................................................................................................. 7  3. E-LEARNING COURSE ........................................................................................................................................ 8  3.1. WHAT IS E-LEARNING COURSE? ......................................................................................................................... 8  3.2. E-LEARNING COURSE STRUCTURE: LEARNING MODULES, CHAPTERS ............................................................... 8  3.2.1. Learning Module........................................................................................................................................ 8  3.2.2. Folder......................................................................................................................................................... 9  3.3. LEARNING MODULE STRUCTURE: SLIDE, FRAME ............................................................................................... 9  3.3.1. Slide ........................................................................................................................................................... 9  3.3.2. Frame ....................................................................................................................................................... 10  3.4. SPECIAL SLIDES: TITLE-SLIDE, MASTER-SLIDE ................................................................................................ 10  3.4.1. Title-Slide ................................................................................................................................................. 10  3.4.2. Master-Slide ............................................................................................................................................. 10  4. CREATING LEARNING COURSE – FROM CONCEPTION TO PUBLISHING ....................................... 11  4.1. COURSE SCENARIO. THINGS TO CONSIDER. ...................................................................................................... 11  4.2. CREATE NEW LEARNING COURSE .................................................................................................................... 12  4.3. EDITING MODULE ............................................................................................................................................. 13  4.3.1. Editing Module Design Settings ............................................................................................................... 13  4.3.2. Editing Title-Slide .................................................................................................................................... 16  4.3.3. Editing Master-Slide ................................................................................................................................ 16  4.3.4. Editing Slide ............................................................................................................................................. 17  4.3.4.1. Name of a Slide .................................................................................................................................................. 17  4.3.4.2. Slide ID .............................................................................................................................................................. 17  4.3.4.3. Select the Master-Slide for the Slide .................................................................................................................. 18  4.3.4.4. Slide Content ...................................................................................................................................................... 19  4.3.4.5. Slide Comments ................................................................................................................................................. 19  4.3.4.6. Slide Transition .................................................................................................................................................. 19  4.3.5. Create and remove Slides. Change the order of Slides ............................................................................ 20  4.3.6. Module and Slide Preview ....................................................................................................................... 20  4.4. ADD MODULES. CHANGE THE ORDER OF MODULES. ........................................................................................ 21  4.5. ADD FOLDERS .................................................................................................................................................. 21  4.7. PUBLISH COURSE .............................................................................................................................................. 22  4.7.1. Module runtime settings ........................................................................................................................... 23  4.7.2. Course runtime settings ........................................................................................................................... 25  4.7.3. Wizard “Course Publication” ................................................................................................................. 26  5. OBJECTS ............................................................................................................................................................... 28  5.1. OBJECT AND OBJECT POSITIONING WITHIN A FRAME ........................................................................................ 28  5.2. TYPES OF OBJECTS: INTERNAL AND COMPLEX ................................................................................................. 28  5.3. INTERNAL OBJECTS .......................................................................................................................................... 29  5.3.1. Text Box ................................................................................................................................................... 29  5.3.1.1. Inserting Text Box .............................................................................................................................................. 29  5.3.1.2. Editing Text. Editing Modes .............................................................................................................................. 29  5.3.1.3. Insert a Table into Text....................................................................................................................................... 30  5.3.1.3. Insert a Picture into Text .................................................................................................................................... 32  5.3.2. Pictures .................................................................................................................................................... 32  5.3.2.1. Inserting Picture ................................................................................................................................................. 32 
  • 2. 5.3.2.2. Valid Graphic File Formats ........................................................................................................................... 32  5.3.2.3. Change the Size of Picture ................................................................................................................................. 34  5.3.2.4. Optimizing Pictures ............................................................................................................................................ 35  5.3.3. Section “Clip Art” ................................................................................................................................... 35  5.4. AUTOSHAPES.................................................................................................................................................... 35  5.5. COMPLEX OBJECTS ........................................................................................................................................... 36  5.5.1. External Elements .................................................................................................................................... 36  5.5.1.1. “External File” Object ........................................................................................................................................ 36  5.5.1.2. External URL ..................................................................................................................................................... 37  5.5.1.3. IFRAME ............................................................................................................................................................. 37  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 39  5.5.2. Popup Windows ....................................................................................................................................... 39  5.5.2.1. “Relief” Popup Window ..................................................................................................................................... 39  Object Events ............................................................................................................................................................. 40  5.5.2.2. “Standard” Popup Window ................................................................................................................................ 41  Object Events ............................................................................................................................................................. 42  5.5.3. Balloons ................................................................................................................................................... 42  5.5.3.1. “Simple” Balloon ............................................................................................................................................... 42  5.5.3.2. “Standard” Balloon............................................................................................................................................. 43  5.5.3.3. “Convex” Balloon .............................................................................................................................................. 44  5.5.3.4. “Gradient” Balloon ............................................................................................................................................. 45  5.5.3.5. “Think” Balloon ................................................................................................................................................. 46  5.5.4. Design Elements....................................................................................................................................... 47  5.5.4.1. Gradient areas ..................................................................................................................................................... 47  5.5.4.2. Click Area .......................................................................................................................................................... 48  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 48  5.5.4.3. Notifier ............................................................................................................................................................... 49  5.5.5. Title-Slide Objects.................................................................................................................................... 51  5.5.5.1. Start Module Button ........................................................................................................................................... 51  5.5.5.2. Title-Slide Popup................................................................................................................................................ 52  5.5.6. Rich Media objects ................................................................................................................................... 53  5.5.6.1. Flash-Movie ....................................................................................................................................................... 53  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 54  5.5.6.2. Shockwave-movie .............................................................................................................................................. 54  5.5.6.3. Video Clip .......................................................................................................................................................... 55  Object Events ............................................................................................................................................................. 57  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 58  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 58  5.5.6.4. Java Applet ......................................................................................................................................................... 59  5.5.7. Navigation Objects................................................................................................................................... 61  5.5.7.1. Navigation Menu ................................................................................................................................................ 61  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 62  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 62  5.5.7.2. Current Position.................................................................................................................................................. 62  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 63  5.5.7.3. “Contents” tab .................................................................................................................................................... 63  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 66  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 66  5.5.7.4. “Help” tab........................................................................................................................................................... 66  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 68  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 68  5.5.7.5. “Calculator” tab .................................................................................................................................................. 69  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 71  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 71  5.5.7.6. “Settings” tab...................................................................................................................................................... 71  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 75  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 75  5.5.7.7. “About” tab ........................................................................................................................................................ 75  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 77  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 78  5.5.7.8. “Next” Button ..................................................................................................................................................... 78  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 79  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 79  5.5.7.9. “Previous” Button............................................................................................................................................... 79  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 80  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 81  5.5.7.10. Slide Name ....................................................................................................................................................... 81  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 81  5.5.7.11. “Sound” Button ................................................................................................................................................ 82  2
  • 3. Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 83  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 83  5.5.7.12. “Close Module” Button .................................................................................................................................... 83  5.5.7.13. “Replay Slide” Button ...................................................................................................................................... 84  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 85  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 85  5.5.7.14. “Simple” Progress Bar ...................................................................................................................................... 85  5.5.7.15. “Extended” Progress Bar .................................................................................................................................. 87  5.5.7.16. “Help” Popup Window ..................................................................................................................................... 88  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 90  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 90  5.5.7.17. “Contents” Popup Window .............................................................................................................................. 91  Object Methods .......................................................................................................................................................... 93  Object Specific Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 93  5.5.7.18. Frame Navigator ............................................................................................................................................... 94  5.5.7.19. Comments Object ............................................................................................................................................. 95  5.5.7.20. Comments Tab Object ...................................................................................................................................... 96  5.5.8. Characters ............................................................................................................................................... 98  5.5.8.1. “Agent” Character .............................................................................................................................................. 98  5.5.8.2. “Talking Head” Character ................................................................................................................................ 101  5.5.9. Lists ........................................................................................................................................................ 106  5.5.9.1. Bulleted List ..................................................................................................................................................... 106  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 111  Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 111  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 112  5.5.9.2. “Simple” List .................................................................................................................................................... 112  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 117  Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 117  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 118  5.5.9.3. “Standard” List ................................................................................................................................................. 118  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 121  Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 121  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 122  5.5.9.4. “Standard” Block-List ...................................................................................................................................... 122  5.5.9.5. “Standard” List Item ......................................................................................................................................... 123  5.5.9.6. “Simple” List Item............................................................................................................................................ 123  5.5.10. Text Boxes ............................................................................................................................................ 124  5.5.10.1. Shadow Text Box ........................................................................................................................................... 124  5.5.10.2. “Relief” Text Box ........................................................................................................................................... 127  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 129  Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 129  5.5.10.3. “Simple” Text Box ......................................................................................................................................... 129  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 131  Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 131  5.5.11. Form Controls...................................................................................................................................... 132  5.5.11.1. Text Field ....................................................................................................................................................... 132  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 133  Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 133  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 133  5.5.11.2. Hidden Text Field ........................................................................................................................................... 134  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 135  Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 135  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 135  5.5.11.3. Text Area ........................................................................................................................................................ 136  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 137  Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 138  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 138  5.5.11.4. CheckBox ....................................................................................................................................................... 138  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 139  Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 140  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 140  5.5.11.5. Group of Radio Buttons.................................................................................................................................. 140  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 142  Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 142  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 142  5.5.11.6. Drop-down Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 142  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 144  Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 144  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 144  3
  • 4. 5.5.11.7. Button ............................................................................................................................................................. 145  5.5.12. Simulations........................................................................................................................................... 146  5.5.12.1. “Task controller” object ................................................................................................................................. 146  5.5.12.2. “Test Structure” object ................................................................................................................................... 151  5.5.12.3. “Results by selections” object ........................................................................................................................ 152  5.5.13. Questions ............................................................................................................................................. 154  5.5.13.1. Object Single Choice Question....................................................................................................................... 154  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 160  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 161  5.5.13.2. Object “Multiple Select Question” ................................................................................................................. 162  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 168  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 169  5.5.13.3. Object “Ordered Items Question” ................................................................................................................... 170  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 176  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 177  5.5.13.4. Object “Numeric Fill-in-Blank Question” ...................................................................................................... 178  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 184  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 185  5.5.13.5. Object “Text Fill-in-Blank Question”............................................................................................................. 186  5.5.13.5. Object “Text Fill-in-Blank Question”............................................................................................................. 186  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 192  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 193  5.5.13.6. Object “Matching Pairs Question” ................................................................................................................. 194  5.5.13.6. Object “Matching Pairs Question” ................................................................................................................. 194  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 200  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 201  5.5.14. Tests ..................................................................................................................................................... 202  5.5.14.1. Test ................................................................................................................................................................. 202  Object Events ........................................................................................................................................................... 210  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 211  5.5.14.2. Current Results ............................................................................................................................................... 212  Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 213  Object Specific Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 213  5.5.14.3. Results by objectives ...................................................................................................................................... 214  Object Methods ........................................................................................................................................................ 215  5.6. SCENARIOS ..................................................................................................................................................... 216  5.7. CURSORS ........................................................................................................................................................ 216  6. HANDLING OBJECTS ...................................................................................................................................... 219  6.1. COMMON SETTINGS OF ALL OBJECTS. OBJECT ALLOCATION WITHIN A FRAME. .............................................. 219  6.1.1. Object’s background and border color. Opacity. .................................................................................. 219  6.1.2. Sizing and Scaling. ................................................................................................................................. 220  6.1.3. Rotating Object ...................................................................................................................................... 220  6.1.4. Object position within a Frame and permission to move object. ........................................................... 221  6.1.5. Modifying common settings for the group of the objects. ...................................................................... 222  6.1.6. Aligning Objects..................................................................................................................................... 222  6.1.7. Distributing Objects evenly ................................................................................................................................. 222  6.1.8. Changing Objects Z-Order .................................................................................................................................. 223  6.2. EFFECTS. CONTROLLING DISPLAY TIME. ......................................................................................................... 224  6.2.1. Objects display time. Timeline Panel. .................................................................................................... 224  6.2.2. Object entry and exit effects ................................................................................................................... 225  6.3. BINDING SOUNDS TO OBJECTS ........................................................................................................................ 226  6.4. OBJECT PROPERTIES ....................................................................................................................................... 227  6.4.1. Common Object Properties .................................................................................................................... 227  6.4.2. Specific Object Properties ..................................................................................................................... 228  7. MULTIFRAME ANIMATION .......................................................................................................................... 229  7.1. USING FRAMES ............................................................................................................................................... 229  7.2. FRAME DISPLAY TIME ..................................................................................................................................... 229  8. ACTIONS AND EVENTS .................................................................................................................................. 231  8.1. “EVENT – ACTION” MECHANISM .................................................................................................................... 231  8.2. EVENTS GENERATED BY THE COURSELAB PLAYER ........................................................................................ 231  8.2.1. Slide and Frame Events ......................................................................................................................... 231  8.2.2. Events common to all objects ................................................................................................................. 232  8.3. OBJECT CUSTOM EVENTS ............................................................................................................................... 233  4
  • 5. 8.4. ACTIONS ......................................................................................................................................................... 233  8.4.1. Variables and object properties in action parameters ........................................................................... 233  8.4.2. Built-in actions ....................................................................................................................................... 233  8.4.2.1. Execution actions ............................................................................................................................................. 234  EXTERNAL URL ................................................................................................................................................... 234  RETURN ................................................................................................................................................................. 234  ROTATE - START .................................................................................................................................................. 234  ROTATE - STOP ..................................................................................................................................................... 234  CALL ....................................................................................................................................................................... 235  MOVE - START ...................................................................................................................................................... 235  MOVE - STOP......................................................................................................................................................... 236  SOUND.................................................................................................................................................................... 236  METHOD ................................................................................................................................................................ 237  NAVIGATION ........................................................................................................................................................ 237  GOTO ...................................................................................................................................................................... 237  DISPLAY ................................................................................................................................................................ 238  MSGBOX ................................................................................................................................................................ 238  8.4.2.2. Service Actions ................................................................................................................................................ 238  IF ... ELSE ............................................................................................................................................................... 238  DELAY .................................................................................................................................................................... 239  VARIABLE ............................................................................................................................................................. 239  CHECKHIT ............................................................................................................................................................. 239  SEQUENTIALLY ................................................................................................................................................... 240  TIMER ..................................................................................................................................................................... 240  FOR ......................................................................................................................................................................... 240  8.4.2.3. Using JavaScript ............................................................................................................................................... 240  8.4.2.3.1. Action JAVASCRIPT .............................................................................................................................. 240  8.4.2.3.2. Including JavaScript in module.js files..................................................................................................... 240  8.4.2.4. Actions with scores and statuses ...................................................................................................................... 240  SET SCORE ............................................................................................................................................................ 240  SET COMPLETION STATUS ................................................................................................................................ 241  SET SUCCESS STATUS ........................................................................................................................................ 241  IF SUCCESS STATUS ............................................................................................................................................ 241  9. SCORES ............................................................................................................................................................... 243  9.1. OBJECTIVES .................................................................................................................................................... 243  9.2. RULES ............................................................................................................................................................. 244  10. SCREEN CAPTURE AND CREATING SIMULATIONS OF OTHER APPLICATIONS....................... 245  10.1. WHAT NEEDS TO BE DONE PRIOR TO RECORDING THE SIMULATION? ............................................................. 245  10.2. SCREEN CAPTURE WIZARD........................................................................................................................... 245  10.3. MODIFY PARAMETERS SETTINGS WHILE IN CAPTURE MODE .......................................................................... 246  10.4. CAPTURE FRAMES ........................................................................................................................................ 246  10.5. SPECIAL CAPTURE MODE............................................................................................................................... 246  10.6. EDITING CAPTURED FRAMES ......................................................................................................................... 247  11. IMPORT MICROSOFT POWERPOINT PRESENTATIONS .................................................................... 248  5
  • 6. 1. Introduction 1.1. Prerequisites This manual assumes that intended audience already has working knowledge of Microsoft Windows® operating system and its basic operations, such as handling files and folders, interactions with Dialogs and Menus and has general computer skills such as using Mouse and Keyboard. Graphics, audio, video, and other rich-media objects are external to the CourseLab system therefore we will not go over the details of editing them. For any additional information on these subjects, please refer to the corresponding software vendor’s documentation. 1.2. System Requirements Minimum system requirements for working with CourseLab: • Microsoft® Windows® 2000/XP/2003; • Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher; • 50MB hard drive space; Minimum system requirements for viewing learning modules: • Microsoft® Windows® 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, 2003 (limited support of Microsoft® Windows® 95 *), and Linux; • Internet Explorer 5.0 (Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher recommended), Mozilla FireFox 1.0 or higher, Netscape® 7.2 or higher, limited support** of Opera 9.0 and higher and Safari 3.0 (Win) and higher; • JavaScript enabled; • XML support enabled (Microsoft® XML Parser 3.0 or higher recommended for Internet Explorer***). * Microsoft® XML Parser 3.0 cannot be installed on Microsoft® Windows® 95 system therefore no data will be transferred from the Learning Module to the Learning Management System using AICC protocols. ** Some effects may not work *** Due to the lack of Microsoft® XML Parser 3.0 component some of the objects in Learning Module may malfunction in Internet Explorer. 6
  • 7. 2. CourseLab Overview 2.1. About CourseLab CourseLab is a powerful, yet easy-to-use, e-learning authoring system that offers programming- free WYSIWYG environment for creating high-quality interactive e-learning content which can be published on the Internet, Learning Management Systems (LMS), CD-ROMS and other devices. Key features of CourseLab: • WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) environment for creating and managing high-quality interactive e-learning content. • No HTML or other programming skills required. • Object-oriented Model allows constructing e-Learning content of almost any complexity just as easy as you put together the building blocks. • Scenario feature enables building complex multi-object interactions with one mouse click. • Interface based on an Open Object Model enables to easily extend and enhance existing libraries of objects and templates including those created by the user. • Built-in test creation capabilities. • Embedded mechanisms for objects’ animation. • Add any rich-media content like Macromedia® Flash®, Shockwave®, Java®, and video in different formats. • Easy inserting and synchronization of sound files. • Import PowerPoint® presentations into the learning material (requires optiona PowerPoint Import Pack). • Screen capture mechanism, which enables emulating functionality of different software (requires optional Screen Capture Pack). • Simple intuitive action description language. • Access to additional functionality of the Course Player for advanced users via JavaScript. • No Java® required for Course Player. 2.2. Compliance to Standards Learning modules created using CourseLab are compliant to the following e-Learning standards: • AICC (http://www.aicc.org/ ) • SCORM 1.2 (http://www.adlnet.org/ ) • SCORM 2004 (SCORM 1.3) (http://www.adlnet.org/ ) 7
  • 8. 3. E-Learning Course 3.1. What is e-Learning Course? E-Learning Course encapsulates structured, thematically self-contained learning material, which can be distributed to the learner throughout Internet or using memory devices. Typically, the e-Learning Course accommodates self learning material, but unlike book or manual provides the following: • Powerful multimedia content − graphics, animation and other rich-media material (audio and video in different formats, Flash-movie, Java applications and others). • Interaction – presentation of the learning material may depend on the actions taken by the user. • Different options for assessing and evaluating gathered knowledge (tests, exercises). Incorporation of e-Learning Course into the Learning Management System and intercommunication between them enables the most efficient management of the overall learning process. Within Learning Management System the e-Learning Course is considered as an independent learning unit, which can be assigned for assessing the level of learning. Upon completion of e- Learning Course various reports could be generated by the Learning Management System. From the educational methodology perspective e-Learning Course corresponds to any conventional Learning Course – assuming that e-Learning Course encloses all the necessary self- educational learning material and tests for controlling and evaluating apprehension of the learning material. 3.2. E-Learning Course Structure: Learning Modules, Chapters E-Learning Course consists of structured sets of Learning Modules. Depending on structure of learning content modules can be grouped into Chapters. Chapters can be arranged using the hierarchy Chapters structure. 3.2.1. Learning Module Learning Module is a fundamental building block of the Course hierarchy representing the set of author-structured Slides. During the learning process the learner is led from one Slide to another sequentially, which is default behavior. If desired, author of the learning Module can define different order of the Slides appearance (for example depending on the result of the test). Learning Module can be used for educational purposes (in this case consists of learning material only), besides that, Learning Module can be employed for assessing of the learned lessons (can contain tests and exercises). It is a common practice to combine both learning material and tests in one single Learning Module: In this case upon completion of the learning material learner is tested within the same Learning Module. 8
  • 9. In the Learning Management System the Learning Module is one of the component of the Learning Course and the only dynamic structural unit; system collects information regarding completion of the Learning Module. When processing information about status of all Learning Modules, the system changes the completion state of not only the particular sections of the Course but also Learning Course itself with accordance to the rules defined in the particular Learning Management System. From the educational methodology point of view Learning Module corresponds to lesson or lecture – meaning it supposed to have thematically coherent and completed learning material. 3.2.2. Folder Learning Modules created in CourseLab can be thematically combined in Folders. Folders can be grouped within other Folders resulting in complicated Course hierarchy structure. Although there is no limitation for number of Folders and number of sub Folders within a Folder, it is strongly recommended to avoid using too complex hierarchy structure. The reason is that you do not mean to discourage student from pursuing this Course just because the structure of that Course is too hard to apprehend. Within Learning Management System the Folder is usually displayed as a folder containing Learning Modules and/or other Folders. The Folder for the distance Learning System is a structural entity/unit. There is no information regarding state of the Folder transmitted to the System from the Learning Modules. The system is making changes to the state of the Folders based on state information of its Learning Modules and other Folders. From the educational methodology point of view Folder can be represented as a series of thematically grouped lectures or lessons. 3.3. Learning Module Structure: Slide, Frame 3.3.1. Slide Slide (Interactive page) is the main building block of Learning Module. Slides are used by the author to place learning material, tests, and exercises. The order of Slide correlation is predefined by the author. Slide itself consists of Frames. Depending on complicity the number of Frames can vary (e.g. using animation, software simulation etc. can significantly increase the number of Frames). Any Slide has at least one Frame. Slides are not accessible by the Learning Management System individually. The Learning Module is the smallest system managed unit. From the educational methodology perspective Slide can be employed for expressing single point of view (thought or idea) with regards to the Learning Module. 9
  • 10. 3.3.2. Frame Frame is the smallest structural unit of the Learning Module. In order to create a Learning Module author uses Frames as the foundation for objects. Even though there is no limitation for the number of Frames within a Slide, we recommend not to exceed 30-40 Frames per Slide otherwise the time elapsed for loading up the Slide could be inconveniently slow. Similar to Slides, Frames are not accessible by the Learning Management System individually. The Learning Module is the smallest system managed unit. From the educational methodology perspective Frame is not a self-containing unit - it is rather component of the Slide. 3.4. Special Slides: Title-Slide, Master-Slide Every Module contains the Special Slides: Title- Slide and Master-Slide (one or several). 3.4.1. Title-Slide Title-Slide is an introductory part of the Learning Module which appears on the PC screen right after launching Learning Module. Along with the introductory page the system loads the main part of module on the background, which makes it convenient for user. Important! During display of the Title-Slide introduction the main code for the module is not loaded yet, therefore, not all the complex objects will be displayed. Thus only text, pictures, and special objects “Start Module”button and “Title-Slide Popup” window can be used when editing the Title- Slide. 3.4.2. Master-Slide All the Slides for the Learning Module are created on top of the Master-Slide. The Master slide is the slide that contains elements that are common to all or several slides: Navigation Objects within a Module, Help, etc. There is no limit for the number of Master-Slides and hypothetically each Slide with assessment content might have a Master-Slide, but this is rather inefficient and must be avoided. Practically, one Master-Slide should be enough. 10
  • 11. 4. Creating Learning Course – from conception to publishing 4.1. Course Scenario. Things to consider. The following should be taken under consideration while creating Learning Course: Thematic Presentation of the Learning Course must be strictly consistent. Stay focused. There is no need to pause – do not follow the usual teaching approach of blending some funny story into the studying material. Student himself will set the right pace to absorb the material. Do not provide too many alternatives. A tree-like Course structure is rather disadvantageous if compared to linear type Course. It sends learners different directions therefore some parallel paths of the tree-like structure are in jeopardy of not being revealed at all. The only exception for using more complex structure is in case you need to provide an example, which is relevant to the Main Objective. Note, this example should be just be an additional illustration to the learning material and could be skipped causing no damage to the overall learning process. And again, if above mentioned example is an essential part of the main course, the linear Course structure should be taken into consideration. Ideally, learner should be able to go through the entire Course only by pressing “Next” button. Specifics of delivering Learning Material - pieces of the Learning Material should be reasonably sized. Break down the Learning Material into chunks of learning content. Build the clear hierarchy structure. If learning material is extensive, break it down into Modules with respect to thematic coherence – clear and consistent story lines and content. It is not recommended to group more than one learning subject into one Module; better use more Modules in the Course than overload the Modules with different learning subjects. Use thematic coherence inside each Module to distribute learning assessment into the Slides. One Topic per Slide. The learning material in the Course is divided into the Slides. Although there is a thematic relationship among the slides we do not recommend using several slides for covering a single learning Topic. Ideally, use only one Topic per Slide. Reverse situation: overloading the Slide with several related Topics is not recommended either. Most likely the student will remember none of these concurrent Topics. Not to exaggerate, it does not necessarily mean that entire learning material within one big Topic should be fit into one slide; in many cases it is simply impossible. It is essential that the theme within one slide is clearly outlined, consistent, and not overlapping with other topics. Use Interactive Multimedia features Utilize multimedia illustrations and graphics. E-Learning has a huge advantage over conventional learning since e-Learning introduces multimedia content. Animated schemes or Flash-movie is often more comprehensive than lengthy descriptions and should be used to full extent to explore the Topic within a Slide. Learn as you practice. Allow audience to interact with the system as it significantly improves the process of memorizing the learning material. E-Learning is interactive by its nature, thus use this potential to the full extent. Where appropriate, enable onscreen actions to demonstrate different results by manipulating with parameters. Use quizzes. 11
  • 12. 4.2. Create New Learning Course Start CourseLab. On “Start Page” screen select “Create New Course” (in case the CourseLab is already running, go to menu File – New – Course, or select “New Course” icon, or use Ctrl- Shift-N key combination). New Course Wizard is opened. Click “Next” button to start creating new Course. On the next page of the Wizard: • Insert Course name • Specify folder where Course files will be located (if it does not exist, it will be created automatically) and press “Next” button. NOTE: Unlike naming the Course, where any symbols can be used, when naming the Course Folder, it is not recommended to use special characters (@, #, $, ^, %, &, *, and quotation marks). 12
  • 13. By default, every created Course contains single Module by default (you can add as many Modules as you want later). On the next page of the Wizard: • insert name of the first Module, • Select Module design template and press “Next” button. NOTE: No restrictions on using special symbols when naming Module. Course is created. Press “Finish” button to finish working on the “New Course” wizard. Later on you may add more modules to the Course, as well as Folders. 4.3. Editing Module 4.3.1. Editing Module Design Settings You may change every new Module’s width and height, change default font for every text insertion, Module’s color palette, as well as prefixes of identifiers for Slides, Frames and other objects if necessary. To do that select menu Module – Design Settings or use Alt-F7 key combination. 13
  • 14. Module’s width and height can be changed according to your vision of Module layout. However, since Modules have fixed width and height, you should always consider users display resolution as main limitation – your Course should fit into the smallest display. Built-in CourseLab Module templates are designed to fit into 800x600 pixels (750x530 and 792x536 templates) and 1024x768 pixels (1018x682 templates) display resolutions. Also, keep in mind that changing Module’s width and height might require further adjustment of Title-Slide and Master-Slide for this Module. Thus, change these settings only when absolutely necessary. Module’s color palette is designed to save time when selecting filling colors and contains frequently used colors for this Module. Module is not limited by the number of selected pallette colors – you can always use standard color picker instead. 14
  • 15. Identifiers for Slides, Frames and other objects should not be changed without worthy reason. IMPORTANT! Prefixes for object identifiers must contain only Latin alphabet letters, numbers and underscore character (they must not start with a digit though). Usually, the most frequent change is a change of default font. 15
  • 16. 4.3.2. Editing Title-Slide To turn on Title-Slide editing mode use View – Title sub-menu or corresponding quick switching button in the Slide’s Panel. You may change picture, add Logo, insert Module name and instructions prior to presenting Module (for example, using “Title- Slide Popup” window object), and so on. If necessary, you may modify the look of “Start Module” button. “Start Module” button can be displayed in two ways: Inactive (displayed from the moment system starts loading the Module until Module is loaded) and Active (displayed when the code for the Module is loaded) – arrange the necessary pictures in your Graphic Editor and change corresponding pictures using “Properties” context Menu option. LIMITATION: Title-Slide appears on the screen before the browser loads all of the run- time files necessary for Module and Objects functionality, therefore only the limited number of the objects such as pictures, text boxes, auto shapes, and special objects “Start Module” button and “Title-Slide Popup” window, which do not require run-time files, can be employed. Links, banners, animation effects and other events are not functioning on Title-Slide. Except for mentioned above WYSIWYG editing mode is used for editing Title-Slide. 4.3.3. Editing Master-Slide To turn on Master-Slide’s editing mode use View – Master sub- menu or quick switching button in the Slide’s Panel. If required, change pictures on the Master-Slide, add common Slides background picture, insert Logo, specify Module’s name, and so on. The appearance of the objects on the Master-Slide can be modified with respect to overall design of the Module. LIMITATION: Since Master-Slide is backround for many other Slides, therefore links, animation effects, and events are disabled on the Master-Slide. Besides, there is a limitation on using Objects: you can use only pictures, text boxes, auto shapes and special objects from the “Navigation” folder. All other Master-Slide editing features are based on WYSIWYG editing mode. 16
  • 17. 4.3.4. Editing Slide To turn on regular Slide’s editing mode use View – Normal sub-menu or quick switching button in the Slide’s Panel. The following settings of the Slide can be edited: • Name of the Slide • Slide ID • Select the Master-Slide for the Slide • Content of the Slide • Slide Comments • Next Slide transition settings 4.3.4.1. Name of a Slide Usually, the name of a Slide reflects the main topic of a Slide. The name of a Slide appears on every Frame of this Slide (in case Master-Slide has a corresponding object “Slide Name”, which enables display of this text). Besides that, the name of a Slide is mentioned in the table of contents of the Module (again, if Master-Slide contain the corresponding “Contents” objects) even if the name is not displayed on the Slide itself. By default, newly created Slide is titled as “Untitled”. In order to change the name of a Slide, right click on Slide icon in Slides panel and choose Rename option from Context menu. There are no limitations for naming a Slide. NOTE: The newly edited name of a Slide will not be displayed in edit mode; but it will be visible in the viewing mode. 4.3.4.2. Slide ID Compared to Slide Name the Slide ID is used for internal programming purposes only (establishing relationship among the Slides, enabling process of Slide transition, etc.). By default CourseLab sets Slide ID automatically to every new Slide and usually there’s no need to change 17
  • 18. it. In case you need to change Slide ID, right click on icon of desired Slide in the Slide Panel and select Identifier option from the context menu. Please be aware that: • Slide ID must contain only Latin alphabet letters, numbers and underscore character (ID must not start with a digit). • Change of the Slide ID may require revision and adjustment of all corresponding actions and relationship for this Slide. • ID must be unique for all Slides, Frames, and Objects within a Module – two Slides of the same Module can not share the same ID (upon attempt of changing Slide’s ID the entered data is automatically validated for uniqueness). 4.3.4.3. Select the Master-Slide for the Slide As it was previously mentioned the Learning Module may contain several Master-Slides. You can modify Master-Slide which is the background for associated Slide while in editing mode: right click on the Slide from the Slide Panel and select Master option from the context menu. In the popup window make a selection of desired Master-Slide. By default, when the Module is created, first created Slide is linked to the first Master-Slide from the list of Module’s Master-Slides, regardless of number of Master-Slides for this Module. Later, every newly created Slide is based on the Master-Slide, which is associated with the previous Slide. For example, the foundation for new Slide 11 will be the Master-Slide of Slide 10. 18
  • 19. 4.3.4.4. Slide Content To insert pictures, texts, and objects into the Frame of the Slide, Insert – Picture, Insert – Text Box, and Insert – Object sub-menus can be used, or corresponding Panel buttons. Complex objects can be inserted directly from the library of the objects either by double-clicking on the selected objects or by dragging and dropping the object into the working area. Please refer to the Object allocation section of this document for more details on the specifics of object allocation. 4.3.4.5. Slide Comments Slide Comments is additional text that can be attached to the Slide. It can contain author's comments and remarks to the Slide, or comments to the Slide that imported from PowerPoint presentation. Slide Comments is not part of viewable Slide area, and it is not an object, therefore it cannot be displayed as usual text object. Special objects are used to display comments to learner (please refer to Complex Objects - Navigation section of this document). To add or edit comments to the Slide right click on the Slide icon in the Slide Panel and select Comments option from the context menu. RichText editing window will appear. Edit the text. 4.3.4.6. Slide Transition By default, it is assumed that transition to the next Slide will be performed by click on the “Next” button or by other user- activated navigation actions. Apparently, this is the most common situation when the user is in control of the timing for observing the Slide. But there are instances when timing must be set to transition to the next Slide regardless of the action from the user. In order to change default transition settings, right click on the target Slide icon from the Slide Panel and select Advance option from the context menu. In the open window modify “Wait for Action” setting to “Immediate”. Transition to the next Slide will occur 19
  • 20. automatically right after all the elements for the current Slide have been displayed. Please refer to the “Actions” section of this document for other methods of programming Slide transitions. 4.3.5. Create and remove Slides. Change the order of Slides Once the Module is created – it already contains one Slide. To add a new Slide on the Insert menu select New Slide (or use Ctrl–M shortcut keys), otherwise, right click on Slide Panel and select New Slide from the context menu. Note, that new Slide will be placed right after currently selected Slide vs. being placed to the last position from the list of Slides. You can always adjust position of the Slide: left click on the icon representing the Slide that you would like move and drag this Slide to the desired location while holding down the left mouse button. To delete a Slide select the Slide you want to delete and press Del key. Alternatively, on the Edit menu, select Delete Slide or use Delete Slide from the Slide’s context menu. Remember, that you can always reverse Slide deletion by using Undo under Edit menu. 4.3.6. Module and Slide Preview While editing, it is always possible to preview what the Learning Module will look like on Web Browser. For viewing of the entire Module select Module – View Module (or press F5 key, or press corresponding button on toolbar). Module will be loaded into the separate browser window, which is limited by width and height according to the size of the Learning Module configured for viewing from the beginning. For Slide preview select Module – View Slide sub-menu (or press Shift-F5). Module will be loaded into the separate Browser Window which is limited by width and height according to the size of the Learning Module and will automatically transition into the selected Slide for display. 20
  • 21. 4.4. Add Modules. Change the order of Modules. Upon creation of new Learning Course, it contains only single Module. In case it is not enough, you can add required number of Modules and group them into the Folders. To add new Module to the Course you can either select File – New – Module sub-menu (or use Ctrl-N shortcut keys), or use context menu by right clicking on the name of the Course from the “Course” panel. Add required number of Modules and fill them with the learning content. To change Module’s order do the following: in the Course panel drag Module with the mouse button to the parent element (Course or Folder). Dragged Module will be placed at the end of the list of Modules. 4.5. Add Folders 21
  • 22. Upon creation of new Learning Course, it contains only single Module, which is not placed in the Folder. As the number of the Modules increases, it might be necessary to group Modules into the Folders. To add new Folder to the Course you can either select File – New – Folder sub-menu or use context menu by right clicking on the name of the Course from the “Course” panel. Add required number of Folders and fill them with the Modules. To change Folder’s order do the following: in the Course panel drag Folder with the mouse button to the parent element (Course or Folder). Dragged Folder will be placed at the end of the list. 4.7. Publish Course After completing of all editing tasks Course should be published. Publishing Course - creation fully functional standalone (separate from CourseLab) version of the Learning Course intended for use on CD, in the Learning Management System and so on. During publishing only those elements which are required for displaying the Course are copied into the separate folder from the folder containing the editable version of the Course, also some other elements added which are not used for editing, but require for Course display. The editable version of the Course during publishing remains unchanged. Depending on the prospective usage there are different choices of Course publishing: • for Launching from the CD • For distribution in the Learning Management System, which supports AICC standard • For distribution in the Learning Management System, which supports SCORM 1.2 standard • For distribution in the Learning Management System, which supports SCORM 2004 standard Sequence of the publishing steps as follows: • Specify runtime settings for each Module • Specify Course runtime settings • Launch “Publish Course” wizard 22
  • 23. 4.7.1. Module runtime settings Prior to publishing it is necessary to specify runtime settings for each Module in the Course: Select Module – Runtime Settings sub-menu. “Module Properties” dialog window opens up. In most cases LMS needs Module ID, Module Name and Module Description to represent the Module to the user. The actual name of the Module in CourseLab will be used in LMS as is (will be inserted in metadata files automatically). To define Module ID and Description select “General” tab and fill in “Identifier” and “Description” fields under “Module identification in LMS” section. Identifier is a short Module ID, which will be used in the Learning Management System. Description – brief informal description of the Course, which will be used within Learning Management System in the Module card. 23
  • 24. Use “Checks” tab to specify software components that need to be checked for availability on student’s computer prior to launching Module. For example, if you have inserted sound files or video clip in AVI format, it will be useful to check if Windows Media Player is installed on student’s computer. Use “Runtime” tab to specify some extra execution parameters. Specifying parameters in the “Objectives” and “Rules” tabs is described in greater details in the Score section. 24
  • 25. 4.7.2. Course runtime settings Prior to publishing, it is necessary to specify runtime settings for the Course. Select File – Course runtime settings sub-menu. “Course Properties” dialog window opens up. In most cases LMS needs Course ID, Course Name and Course Description to represent the Course to the user. The actual name of the Course in CourseLab will be used in LMS as is (will be inserted in metadata files automatically). To define Course ID and Description fill in “Identifier” and “Description” fields under “Course identification in LMS” section. Identifier – short Course ID, which will be used in the Learning Management System. Description – brief informal description of the Course, which will be used within Learning Management System in the Course card. 25
  • 26. 4.7.3. Wizard “Course Publication” Select File – Publish Course sub-menu to start Course publishing. Follow wizard instructions to complete publishing. Select desired publication type - standard compliant package or folder for CD. In case one of the LMS publishing options was selected CourseLab will generate ZIP archive, structured according to selected standard (AICC or SCORM). In case “Publishing for CD” option was selected CourseLab will generate folder set with autorun.html. Autorun.html is very simple HTML file that cannot be edited in CourseLab – you can adjust it to your design in any HTML editor. 26
  • 27. Select name of the package (or CD folder) and location, where it will be saved. Click th “Next” button and wait until the course is published. 27
  • 28. 5. Objects 5.1. Object and Object positioning within a Frame Object is the basic element of CourseLab, the building “brick” of the Learning Module. You may construct the Learning Module of any complexity by employing various Objects and building relationships among them. When you insert the Object of any shape into the Frame it is placed into the Rectangular Placeholder. You can change size and orientation of this Rectangular Placeholder. There are 3 types of Objects allocation within the Rectangular Placeholder: • Object that can automatically adjust its size to the size of Rectangular Placeholder (For example, pictures, and AutoShapes are always resizing height and width to fit the Rectangular Placeholder), • Object that can resize by itself (autofit to contents depending, for example, on the amount of the text) • fixed-size Object 5.2. Types of Objects: Internal and Complex Two main types of Objects are used in the CourseLab for building up learning Module: internal and complex. Internal Objects are the primary and most frequently used Objects; they are built into the CourseLab. In fact, you can create entire learning Module by utilizing only internal Objects such as: • text boxes (can include text, tables, pictures) • pictures and autoshapes Since these types of Objects are the most commonly used, the access to the Editor menu is very simple - editing buttons are conveniently located on the toolbar. Complex Objects are external to CourseLab and loaded into the CourseLab using the Open Object Interface. For presentations of software execution the special object Cursor can also be employed. 28
  • 29. 5.3. Internal Objects 5.3.1. Text Box Text Box – embedded into the editor object, which is used for creating areas within a Frame with formatted text and tables. 5.3.1.1. Inserting Text Box You can add Text Box to a Frame as follows: click on “Insert” menu option and select “Text Box”, or choose “Text Box” icon from the toolbar. Area of text appears on the Slide with “Enter Text” instruction on it. Alternatively, copy the desired text to Clipboard using any text editor and paste it right into the Frame. This insertion method is more convenient to use in many cases. 5.3.1.2. Editing Text. Editing Modes Using left mouse button, double click on Text Box or use “Edit text” option from the context menu to open text editing window. By default, text editing window opens up in Rich Text Format mode where you can edit text just like in any other conventional text editor: modify font, style, size, specify different format settings for paragraphs and lists, and so on. The edited text is automatically converted into HTML code, which will eventually be placed into the learning Module. Those who are familiar with HTML coding can switch to HTML mode by selecting “Edit HTML” button (right button in the bottom buttons row). 29
  • 30. 5.3.1.3. Insert a Table into Text To insert a table, click on “Insert Table” button in text editing window (selected on the picture below). In opened Insert Table dialog screen, specify the number of columns and rows and other parameters. 30
  • 31. After pressing “OK” button table appears in the text editing screen. You can insert text into the cells while in editing mode. Use “Table Properties” option from the context menu (right-click within table’s border) in case you need to modify settings for already inserted table. Note, that there are buttons to quickly insert and delete rows and columns. They are located right next to the “Insert Table” button. Use “Cell Properties” option from the context menu to modify settings for the single cell. 31
  • 32. 5.3.1.3. Insert a Picture into Text If necessary, you can insert a picture right inside the text. While in editing mode, press “Insert Picture” button (selected on the picture below) and locate the file of the picture to insert. 5.3.2. Pictures CourseLab enables insertion of the graphics created by any graphic editor tool into the learning module, although CourseLab itself does not support graphic editing. 5.3.2.1. Inserting Picture To insert picture into Frame of the learning Module you can either choose “Picture” sub-menu within “Insert” menu or use “Insert Picture From File” icon on the toolbar. Locate the picture you need to insert and press “Open” button. Picture will be inserted into the Frame and file itself will be copied into the “Images” folder of current learning Module. In case file being copied already exists, the User will be prompted to cancel file overwriting. LIMITATION: Since Learning Modules can be further used on Internet, all file names of the pictures should be web-safe, in particular it is recommended to use letters and numbers of Latin alphabet only; no spaces and no special characters. 5.3.2.2. Valid Graphic File Formats Any internet-friendly graphic file formats can be used in the learning course. With respect to the fact that learning courses can be used on the Internet, it is highly recommended to select only graphic files of the small size therefore only compressed graphic formats such as GIF, JPG, and PNG are recommended. Each format has some advantages and disadvantages, which should be taken under consideration when selecting format. Below is the brief overview of these formats. 32
  • 33. GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) GIF is the most common format for graphic images on the Internet supported by all browsers and majority of the graphic editors. Using the special compression algorithm (limited to 256 or less colors and simple linear compression along the horizontal axis) enables very small size of the graphic file if there are large areas of the same color on the source file. For the same reason it is not suitable for storing photos and images with the large graded areas - stored image will have a large size and poor quality display. GIF supports transparency (you can choose a single color in the image that will be rendered as invisible, allowing the background to show through when the image is viewed on a Web page) but you have to remember that GIF supports only 1-bit transparency: each pixel for the given color (so called Alpha Channel )is completely removed. Therefore, when picking transparency color take under consideration the background color for this image as it appears in the learning Course, otherwise, you will have an effect of blurred ringed color transition instead of fading away gradually into the transparent area. The latest version of GIF format supports animation created by stringing together various still images. GIF animation can be also employed for creating a learning Module. Note, Even though CourseLab editor does not support playback of GIF animation – only the first GIF image is displayed on the Slide while in editing mode, in the Learning Course GIF animation fragment will be displayed completely. JPG (JPEG, Joint Photographic Experts Group) JPG is also one of the most common formats for graphic images on the Internet supported by all browsers and majority of the graphic editors. When JPG compressing is executed, the source image is divided into square blocks with specific color and brightness information (so called chrominance/luminance scheme) created for each block, which enables coding of this area. The human eye is more sensible to the details of shapes than to color information therefore JPG compression reduces color information to variable size while using 256-grade brightness scale. Usually, not all of the colors of the entire image are used within compressed area; therefore the color information is quite small (it also depends on the user defined quality setting). Having said that, JPG format is very practical for displaying smooth color transitions and very well suited for compressing photos and pictures with high color gradient areas. However, if source image has multiple contrasting color changeovers, the compressed image will degrade depending on the level of compression (there will be mottled areas around color’s edges). JPG allows the user to choose the balance between file size and image quality, and one could choose better quality, but in this case the size of the file will be excessively big, which makes this format inefficient. Unlike GIF, JPEG does not support transparency. PNG (Portable Network Graphics) The Portable Network Graphics (PNG) format was designed for internet usage to replace the older and simpler GIF and JPG formats. When saving to 8-bit depth palette image (PNG-8) format is comparative to GIF (in general, provides about 15% better compression ratio than GIF, since PNG-8 performs compression along both horizontal and vertical axes). When saving to a 24-bit depth palette image (PNG-24) format provides high-quality of displaying color changeovers and very good level of file compression. PNG supports transparency and preserves quality of the color changeovers regardless of the underlying color. In fact, the only disadvantage of PNG format is 33
  • 34. limited support by older versions of Internet Browsers and limited support by some of the graphic editors. Nevertheless, since the older versions of Browsers are not supported in CourseLab learning Courses we strongly encourage using this format if possible. Other Formats When designing the learning Module, you can use other graphical formats supported by Internet Browsers, such as BMP, WMF, and others. However, consider the fact that some of the Browsers can display these formats incorrectly. Besides, BMP files (and other non- compressed formats) are very big in size. The choice is yours - if you are confident that images will be displayed correctly and network traffic permits it – you may use these types of format in your Course. 5.3.2.3. Change the Size of Picture Once picture is inserted, you may format picture within CourseLab using “Size” tab on the “Format Picture” dialog window. Things to consider: • By enlarging the picture you are not decreasing the amount of information stored in the image file, therefore the quality will definitely suffer. • The browser’s formatting capability that is used for minimizing pictures is far from perfect if compared to graphic editing tools. Besides that, remember that any formatting changes you apply to Slide’s picture will not affect the size of the loaded image file. Therefore we do not recommend making significant changes to the format of the picture when editing a Slide. With respect to the size of the file and image quality correlation, if one of the picture parameters is to be modified by more than 10-20%, we suggest using external graphic 34
  • 35. editing tool. Internal CourseLab format editing feature should only be used for slight formatting purposes (not to exceed 10-20% modifications in size). And again, the best formatting solution is to use external graphic editing tool. 5.3.2.4. Optimizing Pictures After the picture is inserted and its size is changed to fit Slide layout it is recommended to optimize file size of picture. Use Tools – Compress Images menu to optimize Module image files. All scaled pictures in Module will be automatically resized to fit user-defined width and height exactly with maximal possible picture quality and re-saved. Besides, pictures in BMP, WMF, EMF formats will be converted and re-saved in PNG format to minimize file sizes. 5.3.3. Section “Clip Art” For inserting frequently used pictures it is very convenient to use “Clip Art” section in the tasks area. Clip Art is the panel in the tasks area. It displays images thumbnails from the folder on the computer. To add picture into the Slide, drag image thumbnail into the working area. Unlike using the Insert Picture From File menu, the above mentioned picture inserting method eliminates the inconvenience of specifying the path to the picture file each time within “Open” dialog box. Use Insert – Picture – Clip Art (or use “Insert Clip Art” icon on the toolbar) sub-menu to start using Clip Art section. In the right part of the main editor window, tasks area will open up displaying the selected section “Images collection”. Click “Browse…” link at the bottom of the “Clip Art” section to specify folder containing pictures which will be accessible from the Clip Art panel. In the opened “Browse For Folder” dialog box, select folder containing pictures. 5.4. AutoShapes AutoShapes is a group of special objects based on vector controls (arrows, stars, curves, rectangles etc.). Based on the vector structure AutoShapes can be resized to any size without loosing on the form and quality. AutoShapes objects are accessible within the CourseLab Task Panel. Use Insert – Picture – Autoshape sub-menu to start using Autoshapes section. To insert an object, select the desired tab in the AutoShapes section on the Task Panel and double-click on the object. 35
  • 36. 5.5. Complex Objects 5.5.1. External Elements 5.5.1.1. “External File” Object “External File” object enables opening external files such as: document, pictures, movie, etc., in a separate Browser window. What types of files are supported by the Object? Object is not limited by the file types. At the same time, Browser restricts opening some of the file types; therefore, in a separate Browser window you may open any file which is NOT RESTRICTED BY BROWSER. For some conventional file types Object can place the corresponding icon into the Frame. In case of undefined file type, Text document icon will be displayed. After inserting object into Frame, specify path to the file, which you are going to open. Next, File will be copied into the “Images” folder of current learning Module. Input file’s Caption and choose location of the Caption with respect to position of the icon. Select the activation event to open file: • mouse click only on Icon; • mouse click only on Caption; • mouse click either on Icon or on Caption. Example of External File appearance on the Frame: 36
  • 37. 5.5.1.2. External URL External URL object is used for opening an external Link in a separate Browser window. The exceptional feature of the “External URL” object is an ability to fully control browser settings of the window being opened. The settings are: size of the Browser window and Browser navigation restrictions (limited availability since Microsoft introduced additional Security settings in Windows XP SP2). After inserting object into the Frame, specify URL which you are going to open. Remove checkmark, in case you prefer not to use standard icon. After “Display Icon” field becomes active select desired image, file will be copied into the “Images” folder of learning Module. Select size for the browser window to be opened, and other settings as appropriate. Example of External File appearance on the Frame: 5.5.1.3. IFRAME IFRAME object is used for opening an external web-content (from file or distant server) into the area on the Frame. WARNING! This object must be placed on top of ALL other objects on the Frame - otherwise errors may arise due to specific nature of this HTML Element. NOTE! This object is capable to load content from other domains, therefore browser's security restrictions (i.e. cross-domain security) may apply to this object. There's no possibility to override browser security settings from content. Example of IFRAME appearance in Edit area: 37
  • 38. The same IFRAME in Runtime mode: After inserting object into the Frame, specify URL or file which you are going to open and specify appearance settings, if necessary. 38
  • 39. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result REPLACE SOURCE Replaces URL of IFRAME content. 5.5.2. Popup Windows Such objects as Popup windows are used for displaying various explanations to the text on the Slide. Basically, text size for explanations is considerably bigger than the one used for the similar Balloon type of objects. Therefore, Popup window can be activated by clicking on the link or button. It does not close automatically, it remains open. Compared to Balloon type of object, Popup window type has its own windows closing mechanism. 5.5.2.1. “Relief” Popup Window Once object is inserted into the Frame, open “Format Object” dialog window. 39
  • 40. Select color scheme for the object. The “Base color” refers to the color of the window title and border. The background color for the part of the window containing the main text is usually white. Input text for the header and the main part of the window. By default, header text is centered and has a font corresponding to the default font of selected learning Module. You can change these settings while in editing mode. Specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the window and text block. Define window closing rule: it can be closed by clicking on popup window “Close” button (which looks similar to conventional Windows “Close” button) or by clicking anywhere within a popup window. Note, you can omit selecting closing rule, but in this case, it will be your responsibility to define closing procedure. Example of Relief Popup Window appearance on the Frame: Depending on the purpose of inserted popup window, it might be necessary to disable display of popup right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of popup window. Object Events Since “Convex” popup object has its own closing mechanism, it is capable of generating the closing Event. While building Frame, we can use closing event for initiating various actions. 40
  • 41. Reference in the Action Editor Triggered Upon On Close Popup Right after user initiates object closing 5.5.2.2. “Standard” Popup Window Once object is inserted into the Frame, open “Format Object” dialog window. Select color scheme for the object. The “Base color” refers to the color of the window title and border. The background color for the part of the window containing the main text is usually white. Input text for the title and the main part of the window. By default, title text is centered and has a font corresponding to the default font of selected learning Module. You can change these settings while in editing mode. Specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the window and text block. Define window closing rule: it can be closed by clicking on popup window “Close” button (which looks similar to conventional Windows “Close” button) or by clicking anywhere within a popup window. Note, you can omit selecting closing rule, but in this case, it will be your responsibility to define closing procedure. Example of Standard Popup Window appearance on the Frame: 41
  • 42. Depending on the purpose of inserted popup window, it might be necessary to disable display of popup right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of popup window. Object Events Since “Convex” popup object has its own closing mechanism, it is capable of generating the closing Event. While building Frame, we can use closing event for initiating various actions. Reference in the Action Editor Triggered Upon On Close Popup Right after user initiates object closing 5.5.3. Balloons Balloon objects are used for opening various instructions for a text on the Slide. In general, amount of text in Balloon instruction is relatively small (smaller than the instructions used for the similar Popup window types of objects). Balloon object is intended to open up when the user’s mouse moves over affected area versa the mouse click and closes when the user’s mouse moves away from the active area. Therefore, Balloon types of objects do not have their own closing mechanism. Compared to Popup window type of object, Balloon objects can have pointer arrow. 5.5.3.1. “Simple” Balloon After inserting object into the Frame, adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 42
  • 43. Select color scheme with respect to the overall design of the Slide. Press “Apply” button to observe changes. Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text. If necessary, specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between window border and the text. After you are done with parameters settings, place Balloon the way that arrow points right into the link or active area. Balloon opens up when the user’s mouse moves over that link or active area. Example of Simple Balloon appearance on the Frame: Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon, it might be necessary to disable display of Balloon right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of Balloon. 5.5.3.2. “Standard” Balloon After inserting object into the Frame, adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Select color scheme with respect to the overall design of the Slide. Press “Apply” button to observe changes. Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text. If necessary, specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between window border and the text. 43
  • 44. After you are done with parameters settings, place Balloon the way that arrow points right into the link or active area. Balloon opens up when the user’s mouse moves over that link or active area. Example of Standard Balloon appearance on the Frame: Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon, it might be necessary to disable display of Balloon right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of Balloon. 5.5.3.3. “Convex” Balloon After inserting object into the Frame, adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Select color scheme with respect to the overall design of the Slide. Press “Apply” button to observe changes. Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text. If necessary, specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between window border and the text. After you are done with parameters settings, place Balloon the way that arrow points right into the link or active area. Balloon opens up when the user’s mouse moves over that link or active area. Example of Convex Balloon appearance on the Frame: 44
  • 45. Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon, it might be necessary to disable display of Balloon right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of Balloon. 5.5.3.4. “Gradient” Balloon After inserting object into the Frame, adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Select color scheme with respect to the overall design of the Slide. Press “Apply” button to observe changes. Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text. If necessary, specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between window border and the text. After you are done with parameters settings, place Balloon the way that arrow points right into the link or active area. Balloon opens up when the user’s mouse moves over that link or active area. Example of Gradient Balloon appearance on the Frame: 45
  • 46. Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon, it might be necessary to disable display of Balloon right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of Balloon. 5.5.3.5. “Think” Balloon After inserting object into the Frame, adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Select color scheme with respect to the overall design of the Slide. Press “Apply” button to observe changes. Select direction of arrow pointer and input Balloon text. If necessary, specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between window border and the text. After you are done with parameters settings, place Balloon the way that arrow points right into the link or active area. Balloon opens up when the user’s mouse moves over that link or active area. Example of Think Balloon appearance on the Frame: 46
  • 47. Depending on the purpose of inserted Balloon, it might be necessary to disable display of Balloon right after Frame loading and define actions enabling display of Balloon. 5.5.4. Design Elements Design Elements is group of objects that is used for decorating and other purposes. In fact, these are the simplest objects used for creating learning material. 5.5.4.1. Gradient areas The Gradient areas types of objects are generally used for decoration purposes. After inserting object into the Frame, adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 47
  • 48. Select color for the start and the end of the Gradient areas with respect to the selected design of the Slide. Click “Apply” to view changes. Select direction of the gradient – vertical or horizontal. 5.5.4.2. Click Area The Click Area type of objects is used for defining transparent click area anywhere on the Frame. Transparent by default, click area can be made visible (and blinking) using object methods. This may be useful, for example, to highlight click area in case of incorrect click. The object is invisible by default; therefore object's placeholder is displayed in Edit mode: After inserting object into the Frame, adjust object's size and position in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. On the Highlighting tab you can select blinking timer, background color, border parameters and opacity of the object in the Highlight mode. Check the Preview highlighted checkmark to preview object's Highlight mode. Be aware that there's no possibility to display transparency for this object in CourseLab Edit mode, therefore only background and border can be previewed. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. 48
  • 49. Method name Execution Result HIGHLIGHT ON Turns the object in the Highlight mode. HIGHLIGHT OFF Turns the object back to Invisible mode. 5.5.4.3. Notifier The Notifier type of objects is used to attract learner's attention to the part of the Frame. There are three different shapes, which can be used as (optionally blinking) notifier: arrow, transparent rectangle with visible corners and colored transparent rectangular area. Examples of Notifier appearance: After inserting object into the Frame, open “Properties” dialog screen. Depending on selected object appearance, you can change various parameters: For arrow you can select arrow direction and color. 49
  • 50. For Corners you can select corners size and color. For Transparent area you can select blinking timer, background color, border parameters and opacity of the object. Be aware that there's no possibility to display transparency for this object in CourseLab Edit mode, therefore only background and border can be viewed. 50
  • 51. 5.5.5. Title-Slide Objects Title-Slide group of objects is used strictly on the Title-Slide. 5.5.5.1. Start Module Button Start Module Button appears in inactive state on the Title-Slide while the main block of Module is loading and becomes active only when Module is fully loaded. Select the Title-Slide. Insert object into the Frame (double click on icon in the “Object” panel or drag object with the mouse). Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu). By default, the standard Start Module Button is used. If you wish to use different button, then create 2 images using any graphical editor: • First picture will be displayed while the main block of Module is loading (specify path in the “Picture before loading” field). • The second picture will be displayed after the main block of Module is loaded (specify path in the “Picture after loading” field). Example of standard Start Module Button appearance on the Title-Slide: 51
  • 52. 5.5.5.2. Title-Slide Popup Title-Slide Popup button and window appears on the Title-Slide and may be useful for providing descriptions or help instructions. Examples of Title-Slide Popup button object appearance: Select Title Slide. Insert object into the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen. On the Popup window tab you can define popup window size and border, window header and text (these are RichText fields). If On open close other popups checkmark is set, then only one (last opened) popup window will be displayed. By default, the standard Start Module button is used. If you wish to use different button, then create 2 corresponding images using any graphical editor. 52
  • 53. 5.5.6. Rich Media objects 5.5.6.1. Flash-Movie Flash-movie object is used for playing Adobe Flash Movies or video clips converted to Flash. Adobe Flash movie files have .swf extension. IMPORTANT! The Adobe Flash Player software should be installed on the computer for playing Flash-movie. You can get the latest free of charge version of Adobe Flash Player at http://www.adobe.com/). To insure correct functionality of the learning Course remember to turn on the feature, which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module (menu “Module – Runtime Settings – Checks”). Insert Flash-movie object into the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Specify Flash-movie source. There are three options: • Local file ( file will be automatically copied into the “Images” folder of learning Module); • URL - full URL of Flash-movie; • Code - this option allows you to insert code from YouTube and similar services. Object will try to determine Flash-movie URL from this code. However, use this option with great care, because is potentially erroneous. Be aware, that URL and Code options refer to external content, therefore this Flash-movie becomes the subject for Flash Player security settings (cross-domain security). Select the playing mode. Adobe Flash Player supports the following window modes for playing the movie: • Opaque, on top of all layers (Window Mode). Flash movie plays in its own virtual window in the Frame above the core browser display window, therefore no other objects 53
  • 54. in the Frame can cover Flash-movie object. Background color for the Flash-movie precisely corresponds to the one selected by the user. • Transparent layer (Transparent Mode). Flash movie plays in the separate layer of the Frame and overlaps other objects placed underneath. However, the objects placed on top can overlap Flash movie. In case the background color for the Frame is not defined by user and Flash movie has transparent areas, then the objects layered underneath will be showing through the transparent portions of the movie. However, be aware that transparent mode is resource consuming, animation performance might be slower. • Opaque layer (Opaque Mode). Flash-movie plays in the separate layer of the Frame and overlaps other objects placed underneath. However, the objects placed on top can overlap Flash-movie. Compared to transparent mode Flash-movie in opaque mode will always have the background color defined, even if you do not explicitly specify Background color (White is default color). If necessary, you can specify background color for the Flash-movie object. LIMITATION: During insertion of the Flash-movie object, the content for this object is unknown to the CourseLab editor; therefore Flash-movie placeholder will be displayed in the editing mode instead. Object Methods Flash-movie playback can be controlled using object’s built-in methods. Method Name Execution Result PLAY Starts Flash-movie playback STOP Stops Flash-movie playback. REWIND Rewinds Flash-movie to the beginning frame. PAUSE Pauses Flash-movie playback. CONTINUE Continues Flash-movie playback (from PAUSE) 5.5.6.2. Shockwave-movie Shockwave-movie object is used for playing Adobe Shockwave movies created using Adobe Shockwave technology. Adobe Shockwave movie files have .dcr extension. Adobe Shockwave technology is far more versatile than Flash. The wider range of features has a drawback in terms of size of the Shockwave movie, complexity of creation, and requirement to have Adobe Shockwave player installed. Although, Adobe Shockwave player is distributed free of charge, it has a bigger size and it is less universal compared to Flash Player. Nevertheless, if you have a Shockwave movie you can insert it into the Frame just as easy as Flash-movie. IMPORTANT! The Adobe Shockwave Player software should be installed on the computer for playing Shockwave-movies. You can get the latest free of charge version of Adobe Shockwave Player at http://www.adobe.com). To insure correct functionality of 54
  • 55. the learning Course remember to turn on the feature, which checks whether or not Shockwave Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module (menu “Module – Runtime Settings – Checks”). Insert Shockwave-movie object into the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Specify path to the Shockwave-movie file, which you are going to insert. Next, file will be automatically copied into the “Images” folder of current learning Module. LIMITATION: During insertion of the Shockwave-movie object, the content for this object is unknown to the CourseLab editor; therefore movie placeholder will be displayed in the editing mode instead. 5.5.6.3. Video Clip Video clip object is used for playing Video clips in the different formats. Windows Media Player is used by default for playing MPEG, AVI, and WMV formats. For FireFox browser family it is recommended to install lates version of Microsoft Windows Media Player plugin from Port 25 Team (http://port25.technet.com/pages/windows-media-player- firefox-plugin-download.aspx). QuickTime Player is used by default for playing QuickTime MOV and 3gp formats. Note, that QuickTime Player must be installed on learner's computer (free download at http://www.apple.com/quicktime/). Real Player is used by default for playing clips in Real Media RM, RAM and RPM files. Note that RealMedia Player must be installed on learner's computer (free download at http://www.real.com/). IMPORTANT! Additional software should be installed on the computer for playing video clips. To insure correct functionality of the learning Course remember to turn on the feature, which checks whether or not required software has been installed on the target 55
  • 56. machine before loading the learning Module (“Module menu – Runtime Settings – Checks”). LIMITATION: During insertion of the Video clip object, the content for this object is unknown to the CourseLab editor; therefore Video clip placeholder will be displayed in the editing mode instead. Insert Video clip object into the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Specify Video source. There are two options: • File - then specify path to the Video clip file, which you are going to insert (file will be automatically copied into the “Images” folder of learning Module). • URL - full URL to video file. Be aware, that URL option refers to external content; therefore this Video clip becomes the subject for browser security settings (cross-domain security). Player selection option allows you to define desired player software explicitly. Note, that depending on this option and selected video source object placeholder may change the appearance. For example, this is Windows Media Player placeholder on the picture. 56
  • 57. Display of the player controls can be further adjusted. In case Movie Autostart check box is selected, Video clip is launched as soon as it is loaded, otherwise user should manually select “Play” button using video controls, or object methods. Windowless mode enables to launch Windows Media Player as inline element (i.e. in this case it can be overlapped by other objects), otherwise it will be launched in window mode (and by default it cannot be overlapped by other objects). Note, that not all players and browsers support windowless mode, however. Invisible mode enables to launch player software as a hidden element. This mode may be useful for playing audiofiles. Object Events Object “Video Clip” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Video Clip”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism (yellow cells contain events used only for streaming media). Reference in the Action Triggered Upon Editor Playing Tick Fires every second while the player is playing media. Use it with currentPosition property to create time-binded actions. Change Play State Fires at the moment when playing state of the media is changed (state itself doesn't matter - just changed). Play Stopped At the moment when playing of media stops (no matter was it learner's click or the end of media). Play Paused At the moment when playing of media becomes paused. Play Started At the moment when playing of media starts (position doesn't matter). 57
  • 58. Play Begin At the moment when playing of media starts from the beginning. Play Resumed At the moment when playing of media starts from the paused state. End Of Media At the moment when playing of media stops on the end of media. Position Changed Fires when current position is changed by slider control or method. Media Changed At the moment when player media is changed. Media Error At the moment when player generates media error. Waiting Server Response At the moment when player starts for waiting server responce. Reconnect To Server At the moment when player starts reconnecting to server. Start Buffering Media At the moment when player starts buffering. Preparing Media At the moment when media is loaded and player starts preparing. Media Is Ready At the moment when media is loaded and player is ready to start. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result PLAY Start playing clip. STOP Stops playing clip. PAUSE Pauses playing. Use PLAY method to continue from paused. SET PROPERTY Sets one of the player properties. REPLACE MEDIA Replaces video source of player. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID). Note, that these properties are available only for Windows Media Player and QuickTime Player (not for Real Player). Property Returns Syntax autoStart Returns 1 if AutoStart is set to true, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.autoStart 58
  • 59. mute Returns 1 if mute sound is set to true, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.mute volume Returns current sound volume (range 0-100). $OBJ_ID.volume currentMedia Returns current media name (if exists), empty string $OBJ_ID.currentM otherwise. edia duration Returns full media duration in seconds. $OBJ_ID.duration currentPosition Returns current position in media in seconds. $OBJ_ID.currentP osition currentState Returns current object state (tokens: "undefined", $OBJ_ID.currentSt "stopped", "paused", "playing" ,"forward", ate "backward", "buffering", "waiting", "ended", "preparing", "ready", "reconnect"). url Returns current media URL if available. $OBJ_ID.url isOnline (WMP only) Returns 1 if player object has access $OBJ_ID.isOnline to the network, 0 otherwise. 5.5.6.4. Java Applet Java Applet object is used for inserting Java Applets into the learning Course. IMPORTANT! Java Virtual Machine should be installed on the computer for running Java Applets (free download at http://www.sun.com/). To insure correct functionality of the learning Course, remember to turn on the feature, which checks whether or not Java has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module (menu “Module – Runtime Settings – Checks”). Insert Java Applet object into the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 59
  • 60. Specify path to the Java Applet, which you are going to insert. Depending on applet it can be single JAR-archive or set of files. You should specify path to archive and main (start) file in first case, and main class file and all additional files in second case. Next, Applet file(s) will be automatically copied into the “Images” folder of current learning Module. On the Parameters tab you can define horizontal and vertical margins (the space between the Object border and actual Java Applet window), alternate text (will be displayed for the user, in case Java environment is not installed), and applet parameters (will be transferred to applet upon applet start). 60
  • 61. On the Java tab you can specify preferred Java Virtual Machine (Sun or Microsoft). LIMITATION: During insertion of the Java Applet, the content for this Applet is unknown to the CourseLab editor; therefore Java Applet placeholder will be displayed in the editing mode instead. 5.5.7. Navigation Objects Navigation Objects enable transition among Slides and Frames. The majority of Navigation objects have certain usage limitations, therefore be cautious when implementing. 5.5.7.1. Navigation Menu Navigation Menu enables tracing of the current Slide name and an instant transition to another Slide upon selecting its name (if there are no restrictions for such transition by other conditions) LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Example of Navigation Menu appearance: Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. You can modify different Navigation menu display settings. The marker “Show Slide hierarchy” enables to modify display mode of the Slide’s structure in the Module. 61
  • 62. Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the frame were played back. Strict slide order message will be displayed if the learner will try to jump more than one slide further and strict slide order mode is enabled in Module run-time settings. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Navigation menu. ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Navigation menu. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled; 0 $OBJ_ID.disabled otherwise. selectedID Returns ID of current Slide $OBJ_ID.selectedID selectedName Returns slidename of current Slide $OBJ_ID.selectedName selectedNumber Returns number of current Slide $OBJ_ID.selectedNumber totalEntries Return total number of selector options $OBJ_ID.totalEntries 5.5.7.2. Current Position Current Position object enables tracing of the Slide number against the total number of Slides. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 62
  • 63. By default, object displays the following label: “POSITION: N/M” (where N is a Slide number, and M is a total number of Slides). You can modify text, divider, and some other display parameters with respect to the overall design of the learning Module. Example of Navigation Menu appearance: Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax currentPosition Returns number of current Slide $OBJ_ID.currentPosition 5.5.7.3. “Contents” tab Contents tab enables displaying the list of the Slide names within Module and transition to other Slides by selecting their names (unless transition to selected Slide is in agreements with other conditions). LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 63
  • 64. On the Display tab you can specify tab’s displaying parameters. In case the default tab set is used, you can select color, change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object, and specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive tabs. If default tab set marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs, change object’s border size, and color. 64
  • 65. On the Parameters tab you can specify additional parameters. Use standard Slides icons marker enables you to replace Slide’s icons, if desired. The marker “Show Slide hierarchy” enables to modify display mode of the Slide’s structure in the Module. Besides, you can replace images, which represents hierarchy connectors, if desired. Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back. Strict slide order message will be displayed if the learner will try to jump more than one slide further and strict slide order mode is enabled in Module run-time settings. Example of Contents Tab appearance: 65
  • 66. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Contents Tab. ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Contents Tab. OPEN TAB Opens Tab (if access is not disabled) CLOSE TAB Closes Tab Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.open 5.5.7.4. “Help” tab “Help” tab enables displaying the Help information block for the Module. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. 66
  • 67. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. On the Display tab you can specify tab’s displaying parameters. In case the default tab set is used, you can select color, change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object, and specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive tabs. If default tab set marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs, change object’s border size, and color. On the Parameters tab you can modify label of the Help tab and insert Help text into the text editable field. Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back. By default, Strict Navigation Mode for the “Help” tab is turned off. Example of Help Tab appearance: 67
  • 68. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Contents Tab. ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Contents Tab. OPEN TAB Opens Tab (if access is not disabled) CLOSE TAB Closes Tab Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled; 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.open 68
  • 69. 5.5.7.5. “Calculator” tab “Calculator” tab enables displaying the Calculator, which can be used for calculations inside the Module. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. On the Display tab you can specify tab’s displaying parameters. In case the default tab set is used, you can select color, change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object, and specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive tabs. If default tab set marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs, change object’s border size, and color. 69
  • 70. On the Parameters tab you can modify label of the “Calculator” tab and insert instructions on using Calculator into the text-editable field. Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back. By default, Strict Navigation Mode for the “Calculator” tab is turned off. Example of Calculator Tab appearance: 70
  • 71. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Contents Tab. ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Contents Tab. OPEN TAB Opens Tab (if access is not disabled) CLOSE TAB Closes Tab Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.open value Returns current value from calculator display $OBJ_ID.value 5.5.7.6. “Settings” tab “Settings” tab enables displaying current Settings for the Module. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 71
  • 72. In case the default tab is used, you can select color, change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object, and specify mouse over tooltip messages for both enabled and disabled tabs. If default tab marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs, change object’s border size, and color. You can modify header of the Settings tab and insert description texts into the Rich Text fields. Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back. 72
  • 73. On the Objectives tab you can select which Module parameters will be displayed. 73
  • 74. On the Objectives terms tab you can define messages and tooltips that will be presented to learner. Example of Settings Tab appearance: 74
  • 75. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Contents Tab. ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Contents Tab. OPEN TAB Opens Tab (if access is not disabled) CLOSE TAB Closes Tab Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.open 5.5.7.7. “About” tab “About” tab enables displaying the information text block for the Module LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 75
  • 76. On the Display tab you can specify tab’s displaying parameters. In case the default tab set is used, you can select color, change vertical margin with relation to the top border of the object, and specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive tabs. If default tab set marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying tabs, change object’s border size, and color. 76
  • 77. On the Parameters tab you can modify label of the Help tab and insert Help text into the Rich Text editable field. Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back. By default, Strict Navigation Mode for the “About Course” tab is turned off. Example of About Tab appearance: Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Contents Tab. ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Contents Tab. OPEN TAB Opens Tab (if access is not disabled) CLOSE TAB Closes Tab 77
  • 78. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.open 5.5.7.8. “Next” Button “Next” Button Object is a special object which enables transition to the next Slide. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. By default, standard “Next” button is used. In case you prefer to use different button, remove the check mark “Use default button set”. Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active. Use any graphic editor to create following four pictures: • The first picture displays the button in enabled state (specify path to the image under “Enabled Button”) • The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button (specify path to the image under “OnMouseOver Button”). • The third picture displays the disabled button (specify path to the image under “Disabled Button”) 78
  • 79. The fourth picture displays the button being pressed (specify path to the image under “OnClick Button”) You can specify mouse over tool tip messages for both enabled and disabled buttons. Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back. Example of Next Button appearance: Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Button. ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Button. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled 5.5.7.9. “Previous” Button “Previous” Button Object is a special object, which enables transition to the previous Slide from the current Slide. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 79
  • 80. By default, standard “Previous” button is used. In case you prefer to use different button, remove the check mark “Use default button set”. Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active. Use any graphic editor to create following four pictures: • The first picture displays the button in enabled state (specify path to the image under “Enabled Button”) • The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button (specify path to the image under “OnMouseOver Button”). • The third picture displays the disabled button (specify path to the image under “Disabled Button”) • The fourth picture displays the button being pressed (specify path to the image under “OnClick Button”) You can specify mouse over tool tip messages for both enabled and disabled buttons. Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back. Example of Previous Button appearance: Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Button. ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Button. 80
  • 81. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled 5.5.7.10. Slide Name Slide Name object enables to automatically display the current Slide name defined in the Editor. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer (usually, located on the top portion of the Master Slide, just like heading). Open “Properties” dialog screen. There you can modify background color and font settings for the Slide Name with respect to the overall design of the learning Module. LIMITATION: The Slide Name will be displayed completely only while playing the actual Course. Name substitute will be displayed in the editing mode instead. Example of Slide Name appearance: Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): 81
  • 82. Property Returns Syntax slideName Returns slidename of current Slide $OBJ_ID.slideName 5.5.7.11. “Sound” Button “Sound” Button object is a special object, which enables turning on and off the audio feature of the Module. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. By default, standard “Sound” button is used. In case you prefer to use different button, remove the checkmark “Use default button set”. Fields for specifying path to the pictures become enabled. Use any graphic editor to create following four pictures: • The first picture displays the “Sound” button in On state and the button can be pressed to turn the Sound Off (specify path to the image under “Enabled Off Button”) • The second picture will replace the first one in case user moves mouse over the enabled button (specify path to the image under “OnMouseOver Off Button”). • The third picture displays the “Sound” button in “Off” state and the button can be pressed to turn the Sound On (specify path to the image under “Enabled On Button”) • The fourth picture will replace the third one, in case user moves mouse over the enabled turn On button (specify path to the image under “OnMouseOver On Button”). You can also specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive buttons. Example of Sound Button appearance: 82
  • 83. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result TOGGLE SOUND Toggles sound on and off Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax soundOn Returns 1 if object is sound is currently on, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.soundOn 5.5.7.12. “Close Module” Button “Close Module” Button object is a special object, which enables correct closing of the learning Module. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. By default, standard “Close Module” button is used. In case you prefer to use different button, remove the checkmark “Use default button set”. Fields for specifying path to the pictures become enabled. Use any graphic editor to create the following three pictures: • The first picture displays the button in enabled state (specify path to the image under “Enabled Button”). • The second picture will replace the first one when user navigate mouse over the button (specify path to the image under “OnMouseOver button”). • The third picture will replace the second one when button is pressed (specify path to the image under “OnClick button”). 83
  • 84. You can also specify mouse over tool tip messages for active button and notification text to be displayed before closing the Module. Example of Close Module Button appearance: 5.5.7.13. “Replay Slide” Button “Replay Slide” Button object is a special object, which enables current Slide reloading (for example, to repeat animation used in the Slide). LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. By default, standard “Replay Slide” button is used. In case you prefer to use different button, remove the checkmark “Use default button set”. Fields for specifying path to the pictures become enabled. Use any graphic editor to create the following four pictures: • The first picture displays the button in enabled state (specify path to the image under “Enabled Button”) • The second picture will replace the first one, in case user moves mouse over the enabled button (specify path to the image under “OnMouseOver Button”). • The third picture displays the button being pressed (specify path to the image under “OnClick Button”) • The fourth picture displays the disabled button (specify path to the image under “Disabled Button”) You can also specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive buttons. 84
  • 85. Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back. Example of Close Module Button appearance: Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using DISABLE ACCESS and ENABLE ACCESS methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Button. ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Button. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled 5.5.7.14. “Simple” Progress Bar “Simple” Progress Bar is a special object, which indicates amount of the visited Slides relative to the overall amount of the Slides. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Example of Simple Progress Bar appearance: 85
  • 86. By default, the standard Slide’s icons are used. If you wish to use different icons – uncheck the marker. Fields for inserting pictures become available. Create 3 images using any graphical editor: • The first image will be displayed indicating already visited Slide. • The second image will be displayed indicating the current Slide. • The third image will be displayed indicating the Slides which are yet to be displayed. You can also modify appearance parameters for background of the progress-indicator. 86
  • 87. 5.5.7.15. “Extended” Progress Bar “Extended” Progress Bar is a special object, which indicates amount of the visited Slides relative to the overall amount of the Slides. Unlike “Simple” progress-indicator, “Extended” Progress Bar displays the name of the current Slide; it also enables exploring the names of other Slides and enables transition to them. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. By default, the standard Slide’s icons are used. If you wish to use different – uncheck the marker. Fields for inserting pictures become available. Create 3 images using any graphical editor: • The first image will be displayed indicating/in the place of already visited Slide. • The second image will be displayed indicating the current Slide. • The third image will be displayed indicating the Slides which are yet to be displayed. In case standard elements are used, you can modify their appearance. You can also, modify appearance parameters for background of the progress-indicator. 87
  • 88. On the Parameters tab you can specify which Slide parameters will be displayed. Example of Extended Progress Bar appearance: 5.5.7.16. “Help” Popup Window “Help” Popup window object enables display of the help content for the learning Module. Object consists of two parts: button to call the object and popup window with help content. Only “Help” button is visible in editing mode. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position “Help” button the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 88
  • 89. In the opened dialog you can select the base color for the object with respect to the overall design of the learning Module. Also, you can modify title text and style. You may input the Help content into the “Window text” field, which is in Rich Text Format mode that enables insertion of the formatted text, tables, pictures, and so on. Please be advised that width of the text area is limited; therefore avoid using tables and pictures that exceed 450 pixels in width. You can modify size and location of pop up Help window with respect to the design of the learning Module, however, there are technical limitations for significant width and height changes. Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back. On the Buttons tab you can specify buttons properties. In case “Use default button set” marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying buttons. You can also specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive buttons. 89
  • 90. Example of Help Popup Window appearance: Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using DISABLE ACCESS and ENABLE ACCESS methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Button. ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Button. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.open 90
  • 91. 5.5.7.17. “Contents” Popup Window “Contents” popup window enables displaying current Module contents, indicates visited Slides, and allows navigation within a Module. Object consists of two parts: button to call the object and “Contents” popup window. Only “Contents” button is visible in editing mode. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position “Contents” button the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. In the opened dialog you can select the base color for the object with respect to the overall design of the learning Module. Also, you can modify title text and style. You can modify size and location of pop up Help window with respect to the design of the learning Module; however there are technical limitations for significant width and height changes. 91
  • 92. On the Buttons tab you can specify buttons properties. In case ”Use default button set” marker is unchecked you can use custom images for displaying buttons. You can also specify mouse over tool tip messages for both active and inactive buttons. On the Parameters tab you can specify displaying parameters. Use default slide icon set marker enables you to replace Slide’s icons, if desired. 92
  • 93. The marker “Show slide hierarchy” enables to modify display mode of the Slide’s structure in the Module. Besides, you can replace images, which represents hierarchy connectors, if desired. Strict Navigation Mode – automatic blocking of the navigation object from the moment the Slide was opened until all objects on this Slide displayed in the Timeline panel of the Frame were played back. Strict slide order message will be displayed if the learner will try to jump more than one slide further and strict slide order mode is enabled in Module run-time settings. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE ACCESS Restrict access to Contents Tab. ENABLE ACCESS Permit access to Contents Tab. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled open Returns 1 if object is currently open, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.open Example of Contents Popup Window appearance: 93
  • 94. 5.5.7.18. Frame Navigator Frame Navigator is a special object, which indicates amount of the visited Frames in particular Slide relative to the overall amount of the Frames in the Slide. Add object to the Slide. Position it the way you prefer. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 94
  • 95. By default, standard button set is used. In case you prefer to use different button, remove the check mark “Use default button set”. Fields for specifying path to the pictures become active. Use any graphic editor to create pictures. Example of Frame Navigator objects appearance: 5.5.7.19. Comments Object Comments object enables to automatically display comments to the current Slide, that defined by the author (or imported from PowerPoint). Object default parameters are optimized for "Import" templates (intended for importing PowerPoint presentations), but this is not limitation - object can be used on any other template. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. Example of Comments object appearance: 95
  • 96. Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it on the left window border. Open “Properties” dialog screen. In case the Use default comments tab is checked, then you can select default tab color, change comments window size, specify mouse over tooltip messages and message, that appears when no comments to slide is present. Note, that window background color will be used for all comments, except for those imported from PowerPoint where background color is explicitly specified in PowerPoint source. If Use default comments tab marker is unchecked, then you can use custom images for displaying tabs, change object’s border size, and color. Checkmark Hide object on slides with no comments can be useful to attract learner attention. If it is checked (default state), then object will appear only on slides where comments are present. 5.5.7.20. Comments Tab Object Comments Tab object enables to automatically display comments to the current Slide, that defined by the author (or imported from PowerPoint). Object default parameters are optimized for "Standard" templates, but this is not limitation - object can be used on any other template. LIMITATION: This Object can be placed only ON THE MASTER-SLIDE. 96
  • 97. Examples of Comments Tab object appearance: Add object to the Master-Slide. Position it on the left window border. Open “Properties” dialog screen. In case the Use default comments tab is checked, then you can select default tab color, specify mouse over tooltip messages and message, that appears when no comments to slide is present. Note, that window background color will be used for all comments, except for those imported from PowerPoint where background color is explicitly specified in PowerPoint source. If Use default comments tab marker is unchecked, then you can use custom images for displaying tabs, change comments window size, change object’s border color. 97
  • 98. 5.5.8. Characters 5.5.8.1. “Agent” Character “Agent” is an animated character with a set of basic actions; these actions can be launched using Object’s methods. IMPORTANT! The Agent is created using Adobe Flash technology, thus make sure to turn on the feature, which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module. Example of Agent appearance: You can specify Agent’s appearance and display parameters (similar to Flash-movie display settings, in fact Agent is a Flash-movie). Agent control Use methods of the objects to control Agent. By default, Agent is displayed in “idle” mode for indefinite period of time. Object methods, i.e. functions embedded in the object, which modify the state of the Agent, are used to control Agent. Please see example provided below. 98
  • 99. Picture the situation when we have both question and Agent character presented in the Slide. The Agent’s task is to applaud when provided answer to the question is correct. Here is the sequence of the necessary actions: 1. Memorize character ID and open “Actions” screen for the “Question” object. 2. Select “Correct Answer” in the “Event” panel. 3. Select “METHOD” in the “Action” panel. 4. Specify parameters for the selected action – select character ID; in the “Select Method” screen specify “ACTION” with the following parameters: “Applaud” and “Return upon completion”. Confirm your choice. At this point, configuration of the relationship among the objects is completed. 99
  • 100. In the described example the event of the “Question” object has been used for launching Action. However, any other events or delayed actions can be employed for the very same purpose. Object methods The following methods can be used when working with Agent Character: • ACTION – forces Agent to execute some of the actions defined in the object. It has 2 parameters: action itself, which needs to be executed and option for returning back to the idle state (Agent can automatically return to the idle state or remain in the current state awaiting the return command). 100
  • 101. RETURN TO THE IDLE STATE – takes Agent back to the idle mode. • SHOW/HIDE – is used to turn on/off display of the object with effects. • TELEPORTATION - relocates Agent into the specified by coordinates location using effects. Let us review “ACTION” method in greater details. Almost all actions embedded into the object have 2 execution phases: action execution and return to idle state. When you select automatic return into the idle mode, above mentioned action phases will be automatically executed consequently one after another. When we select wait for signal to return to idle mode, only the first phase - execution of the action itself is launched; return to idle mode phase is postponed until you use “RETURN TO THE IDLE STATE” method, or by launching any other action (in this case, before the new action can be executed object returns to the idle state automatically). Things to consider, when working with actions: Actions: Talk, Walk left/right cannot automatically return to the idle mode. Agent will continue talking and walking until ordered to terminate action. Such actions as Yawn, Head-nod in agreement, Head-shake in disagreement (so called simple actions, marked with *), will always return to the idle state upon completion. Sequence of actions In case agent receives command for new action while it is not in the idle mode, meaning it is in the process of completion of previous action, such command is stored in the agent’s “commands queue” and new action is postponed until the previous one is finishing execution. The “Command queue” of the “Agent” role is based on the FIFO (First In First Out) data handling concept: i.e. each new incoming action command is added to the end of the execution line. Therefore, by employing “Command queue” you can create any sequence of actions for the character. 5.5.8.2. “Talking Head” Character Talking Head is an animated character with a set of basic actions; these actions can be launched using Object’s methods. IMPORTANT! The Talking Head is created using Adobe Flash technology, thus make sure to turn on the feature, which checks whether or not Flash Player has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module. Example of Talking Head appearance: 101
  • 102. You can specify Talking Head’s appearance and display parameters (similar to Flash-movie display settings, in fact it is a Flash-movie). Talking Head control Use methods of the objects to control Talking Head. By default, Talking Head is displayed in “idle” mode for indefinite period of time. Object methods, i.e. functions embedded in the object, which modify the state of the Agent, are used to control Talking Head. Please see example provided below. 102
  • 103. Picture the situation when we have both question and Talking Head character presented in the Slide. The Talking Head’s task is to amaze when provided answer to the question is incorrect. Here is the sequence of the necessary actions: 1. Memorize character ID and open "Actions" screen for the "Question" object. 2. Select "Correct Answer" in the "Event" panel. 3. Select "METHOD" in the "Action" panel. 4. Specify parameters for the selected action – select character ID; in the "Select Method" screen specify "ACTION" with the following parameters: "Amazement" and "Automatic" return to idle state. Confirm your choice. At this point, configuration of the relationship among the objects is completed. In the above described example the event of the "Question" object has been used for launching Action. However, any other events or delayed actions can be employed for the very same purpose. 103
  • 104. 104
  • 105. In the described example the event of the “Question” object has been used for launching Action. However, any other events or delayed actions can be employed for the very same purpose. Object methods The following methods can be used when working with Talking Head Character: • ACTION – forces Talking Head to execute some of the actions defined in the object. It has 2 parameters: action itself, which needs to be executed and option for returning back to the idle state (Talking Head can automatically return to the idle state or remain in the current state awaiting the return command). • RETURN TO IDLE – takes Talking Head back to the idle mode. • TELEPORT - relocates Talking Head into the specified by coordinates location using effects. Let us review "ACTION" method in greater details. Almost all actions embedded into the object have 2 execution phases: action execution and return to idle state. When you select automatic return into the idle mode, above mentioned action phases will be automatically executed consequently one after another. When we select wait for signal to return to idle mode, only the first phase - execution of the action itself is launched; return to idle mode phase is postponed until you use "RETURN TO IDLE" method, or by launching any other action (in this case, before the new action can be executed object returns to the idle state automatically). Things to consider, when working with actions: Action Talk cannot automatically return to the idle mode. Talking Head will continue talking until ordered to terminate action. 105
  • 106. Such actions as Agree, Disagree (so called simple actions, marked with *), will always return to the idle state upon completion. Sequence of actions In case Talking Head receives command for new action while it is not in the idle mode, meaning it is in the process of completion of previous action, such command is stored in the Talking Head’s "commands queue" and new action is postponed until the previous one is finishing execution. The "Command queue" of the "Talking Head" character is based on the FIFO (First In First Out) data handling concept: i.e. each new incoming action command is added to the end of the execution line. Therefore, by employing "Command queue" you can create any sequence of actions for the character. 5.5.9. Lists 5.5.9.1. Bulleted List Bulleted List object is used for creating sequentially appearing list of statements. It contains the list of items with built-in display manipulation mechanisms. IMPORTANT! Since Bulleted list object contains built-in display mechanisms, the actual duration might not be in accordance with the duration specified in the Time panel for the Frame. Example of Bulleted list appearance: Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure and amount of text. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 106
  • 107. Set button top margin (if you plan to use it) and divider lines between list items. Fill in the statements list. You can select bullet type and other appearance parameters for each list item. Select “Display mode” tab in “Properties” dialog screen to set parameters of item displaying. 107
  • 108. Depending on selected display mode parameters list on this tab will be different. Default mode is On user click (this mode include text link, form and image buttons - all controls that activated with mouse click). Define button or link parameters. In Delayed auto mode the only available parameter is Item display delay (in seconds). 108
  • 109. Third mode - On external call - means that no list controls will be displayed and items will appear only when object's method NEXT ITEM will be used. The only parameter here is Display first item automatically. 109
  • 111. In case “Use Transitions” check box is marked, you can choose any of the standard transition effects. Positive numbers (greater than 0) are used to set Time of the transition in seconds. LIMITATIONS: Due to lack of transition support in some browsers, transition effects might be substituted to closest available in browsers other than Internet Explorer. Object Events Object “Bulleted List” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Bulleted List”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Action Editor Triggered Upon On Display Item At the moment when Item begins to display Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result 111
  • 112. NEXT ITEM Start displaying of next item in queue. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax lastItem Returns number of last displayed item. $OBJ_ID.lastItem nextItem Returns number of next displayed item. $OBJ_ID.nextItem totalItems Returns total number of items. $OBJ_ID.totalItems 5.5.9.2. “Simple” List Simple List object is used for creating sequentially appearing list of statements. It contains the list of items with built-in display manipulation mechanisms. IMPORTANT! Since Simple list object contains built-in display mechanisms, the actual duration might not be in accordance with the duration specified in the Time panel for the Frame. Example of Simple list appearance: Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure and amount of text. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 112
  • 113. Fill in the statements list. You can select item appearance parameters for each list item. Select “Display mode” tab in “Properties” dialog screen to set parameters of item displaying. Depending on selected display mode parameters list on this tab will be different. Default mode is On user click (this mode include text link, form and image buttons - all controls that activated with mouse click). Define button or link parameters. 113
  • 114. In Delayed auto mode the only available parameter is Item display delay (in seconds). 114
  • 115. Third mode - On external call - means that no list controls will be displayed and items will appear only when object's method NEXT ITEM will be used. The only parameter here is Display first item automatically. 115
  • 117. In case “Use Transitions” check box is marked, you can choose any of the standard transition effects. Positive numbers (greater than 0) are used to set Time of the transition in seconds. LIMITATIONS: Due to lack of transition support in some browsers, transition effects might be substituted to closest available in browsers other than Internet Explorer. Object Events Object “Simple List” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Simple List”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Action Editor Triggered Upon On Display Item At the moment when Item begins to display Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result 117
  • 118. NEXT ITEM Start displaying of next item in queue. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax lastItem Returns number of last displayed item. $OBJ_ID.lastItem nextItem Returns number of next displayed item. $OBJ_ID.nextItem totalItems Returns total number of items. $OBJ_ID.totalItems 5.5.9.3. “Standard” List “Standard” List object is used for creating sequentially appearing list of statements. Object consists of “Standard” list items. It contains the list of items with built-in display manipulation mechanisms. IMPORTANT! Since Standard list object contains built-in display mechanisms, the actual duration might not be in accordance with the duration specified in the Time panel for the Frame. Example of Standard list appearance: Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure and amount of text. Open “Properties” dialog screen (Double click on object or select “Properties” item from the context menu). 118
  • 119. Select border color for the list items with respect to the overall design. Select marker type for the list Item. Input text for the list items. Specify value for inner margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the window and text block. Select “Display” tab in “Properties” dialog screen. 119
  • 120. Object enables displaying the list of items either consecutively, in automatic mode with user defined time delays or by accepting user input in a form of pressed button or clicked text link. On external call mode means that no list controls will be displayed and items will appear only when object's method NEXT ITEM will be used. The only parameter here is Display first item automatically. Select “Effects” tab. 120
  • 121. In case “Use Transitions” check box is marked, you can choose any of the standard transition effects. Positive numbers (greater than 0) are used to set Time of the transition in seconds. LIMITATIONS: Due to lack of transition support in some browsers, transition effects might be substituted to closest available in browsers other than Internet Explorer. Object Events Object “Standard List” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Standard List”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Action Editor Triggered Upon On Display Item At the moment when Item begins to display Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result 121
  • 122. NEXT ITEM Start displaying of next item in queue. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax lastItem Returns number of last displayed item. $OBJ_ID.lastItem nextItem Returns number of next displayed item. $OBJ_ID.nextItem totalItems Returns total number of items. $OBJ_ID.totalItems 5.5.9.4. “Standard” Block-List “Standard” Block-List object is used for creating lists of semantically related block statements, which will be displayed simultaneously. Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure and amount of text. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Select border color for the list block with respect to the overall design. Select marker type for the list Item. Input text for the list items. 122
  • 123. Specify value for inner margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the window and text block. Example of Standard Block-List appearance: 5.5.9.5. “Standard” List Item Standard List Item object is used for creating Lists, which contain clearly highlighted statements. Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure and amount of text. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Select border color of item with respect to the overall design. Select marker type for the List Item. Input text for the list item. Specify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the window and text block. Example of Standard List Item appearance: 5.5.9.6. “Simple” List Item Simple List Item object is used for creating Lists, which contain clearly highlighted statements. 123
  • 124. Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure and amount of text. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Select item background color and border color with respect to the overall design. Select marker type for the List Item. Input text for the list item. Specify value for inner margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the window and text block. Example of Simple List Item appearance: 5.5.10. Text Boxes 5.5.10.1. Shadow Text Box Shadow Text Box object enables placing desired text box with modified display settings (including shadow effects). Compared to embedded regular text box, Shadow Text Box enables using special effects for text appearance. IMPORTANT! Internet Explorer 5.5 and above should be used for correct shading display, however, text box will be visible in older versions of browser. Add object to the Frame. By default, object is placed in the center of the Frame. Adjust size and position an object with respect to the prospective Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 124
  • 125. To input text into the text box, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input area of the Text box is Rich Text, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved as you type the text in. If desired, modify value for inner margin. Text margin defines the space between border of the box and text. You can change text box background color. You can modify style, color, and width for the text box border. Finally, you can modify opacity of the main box. Please be advised that any changes applied to the opacity, affects the border of the text box as well. In case text box Shading is on, it is not recommended to use opacity less than 100%. 125
  • 126. Use “Shadow” tab to specify display settings for shading effect. The key control is “Display Box Shadow” check box. In case “Display Box Shadow” check box is not marked then all other settings are disabled for editing In case text box Shading is on, you can specify vertical and horizontal Shadow Shift with relation to the main box as well as opacity. We recommend using opacity of 40%, which is a default opacity value. The next check box is “Shadow copies the main box”. In case this check box is marked, such shading box settings as background color, style, color, and width of the box border will be copied from the main box settings (it will look more natural when combined with 40% opacity). However, if you need to change shading display with regards to main block, you can uncheck the “Shadow copies the main box” check box, then shading box settings become available for editing. 126
  • 127. On the “Effects” tab you can enable character iteration display mode for the text in the main box. In this case you can specify text occurrence frequency rate. Example of Shadow Text Box appearance: 5.5.10.2. “Relief” Text Box Relief Text Box enables placing the desired text into the box with convex border. Compared to embedded regular text box, this Text Box enables using special effects and scrolling for text occurrence. Note, that this object is capable to make text substitution in Rich Text. Text substitutions can be variable values and object properties. Because Rich Text format is quite complex, additional markers for substitution area are used - double curle brackets. Text substitutions will be applied only for double curle brackets areas. For example {{$OBJ_19.x}} will be substituted by value of X coordinate of OBJ_19 object's top-left corner, and {{#att_left}}will be substituted by value of CourseLab variable named att_left. If no substitution is found, all double curle brackets area will remain intact. Example of Relief Text Box objects appearance: 127
  • 128. Add object to the Frame. By default, object is placed in the center of the Frame. Adjust size and position an object with respect to the prospective Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Select color of the box border with respect to the overall design. To input text into the text box, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input area of the Text box is Rich Text, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved as you type the text in. If needed, modify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between box border and text. By default, text margin is equal to 5 pixels. Set Overflow style if needed - default value Autoscroll is suitable for most cases. If appropriate checkbox is marked, text box can be closed on mouse click anywhere within a box. 128
  • 129. On the “Effects” tab you can enable character iteration display mode for the text in the main box. In this case you can specify text occurrence frequency rate. Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Action Triggered Upon Editor Object Closed Object is closed Text Refreshed After text is refreshed Text Added After text is added Typewriter End After the moment when typewriter effect types last text character. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result CLOSE OBJECT Closes the object. RESIZE OBJECT Changes the size of the object. Note, that top-left corner position of the object is fixed. REFRESH TEXT Refreshes the text in the object, Can be useful if the text contains dynamically changed substitutes. ADD TEXT Adds the text to the current text. Note, that the style of closest paragraph will be used for new text. 5.5.10.3. “Simple” Text Box Simple Text Box enables placing the desired text into the box with optional border and different scrolling settings. Compared to embedded regular text box, this Text Box enables using scrolling and special effects for text occurrence. Note, that this object is capable to make text substitution in Rich Text. Text substitutions can be variable values and object properties. Because Rich Text format is quite complex, additional markers for substitution area are used - double curle brackets. Text substitutions will be applied only for double curle brackets areas. For example {{$OBJ_19.x}} will be substituted by value of X coordinate of OBJ_19 object's top-left corner, and {{#att_left}}will be substituted by value of CourseLab variable named att_left. If no substitution is found, all double curle brackets area will remain intact. 129
  • 130. Example of Simple Text Box objects appearance: Add object to the Frame. By default, object is placed in the center of the Frame. Adjust size and position an object with respect to the prospective Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Select color and other settings of the box border with respect to the overall design. To input text into the text box, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input area of the Text box is Rich Text, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved as you type the text in. If needed, modify value for inner margin. Inner margin defines the space between box border and text. By default, text margin is equal to 5 pixels. Set Overflow style if needed - default value Autoscroll is suitable for most cases. If appropriate checkbox is marked, text box can be closed on mouse click anywhere within a box. 130
  • 131. On the “Effects” tab you can enable character iteration display mode for the text in the main box. In this case you can specify text occurrence frequency rate. Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Action Triggered Upon Editor Object Closed Object is closed Text Refreshed After text is refreshed Text Added After text is added Typewriter End After the moment when typewriter effect types last text character. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result CLOSE OBJECT Closes the object. RESIZE OBJECT Changes the size of the object. Note, that top-left corner position of the object is fixed. REFRESH TEXT Refreshes the text in the object, Can be useful if the text contains dynamically changed substitutes. 131
  • 132. ADD TEXT Adds the text to the current text. Note, that the style of closest paragraph will be used for new text. 5.5.11. Form Controls 5.5.11.1. Text Field Text Field enables user to input text using keyboard. Inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions. Example of Text Field appearance: Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Specify variable name, which will be used for storing user input. LIMITATION: Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters, and numbers, and must not start with a digit. Variable names must be unique within a Slide. If necessary, specify default text, which will be displayed in the field once the Object loads up. If necessary, you may set restrictions on user-input length of value in characters. 132
  • 133. Use “Display Settings” tab to specify the field’s appearance. Object Events Object “Text Field” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Text Field”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Action Triggered Upon Editor On Leave Field At the moment when text is inserted and cursor leaves field Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE INPUT Restrict access to input field. ENABLE INPUT Permit access to input field. SET VALUE Set input field value Object Specific Properties 133
  • 134. Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled value Returns current input field value. $OBJ_ID.value 5.5.11.2. Hidden Text Field Hidden Text Field enables user to input text or numbers using keyboard. At display input text is replaced with bullets. Moving forward, inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions. Example of Hidden Text Field appearance: Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Specify variable name, which will be used for storing user’s input. LIMITATION: Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters, and numbers, and must not start with a digit. Variable names must be unique within a Slide. If necessary, specify default text, which will be displayed in the field once the Object loads up. If necessary, you may set restrictions on user-input length of value in characters. 134
  • 135. Use “Display Settings” tab to specify the field’s appearance. Object Events Object “Hidden Text Field” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Hidden Text Field”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Action Triggered Upon Editor On Leave Field At the moment when text is inserted and cursor leaves field Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE INPUT Restrict access to input field. ENABLE INPUT Permit access to input field. SET VALUE Set input field value Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): 135
  • 136. Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled value Returns current input field value. $OBJ_ID.value 5.5.11.3. Text Area Text Area enables user to enter large amount of text using keyboard. Moving forward, inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions. Example of Text Area appearance: Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Specify variable name, which will be used for storing user’s input. LIMITATION: Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters, and numbers, and must not start with a digit. Variable names must be unique within a Slide. 136
  • 137. If necessary, specify default text, which will be displayed in the text area once the Object loads up. If necessary, specify text wrapping rules. The default behavior for Text Area is to automatically move to a new line, once the length of text line exceeds the right margin. This is rather “Virtual” text wrapping, in fact, if you enlarge Text Area text will wrap at the different position. Other wrapping rules: • Automatically move to a new line and insert CRLF (carriage return /line feed) character, once the length of text line exceeds the right margin. If Text Area is enlarged, wrap point will remain at the same position. • Move to a new line only when “Enter” button is pressed, otherwise, horizontal scroll bar will be displayed, once the length of text line exceeds the right margin. Note: By pressing the “Enter” key, “Hard Return” is inserted in either one of the above mentioned cases. Use “Display Settings” tab to specify the Text Area display. Object Events Object “Text Area” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Text Area”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Action Triggered Upon Editor On Leave Field At the moment when text is inserted and cursor leaves field 137
  • 138. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE INPUT Restrict access to input field. ENABLE INPUT Permit access to input field. SET VALUE Set input field value Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled value Returns current input field value. $OBJ_ID.value 5.5.11.4. CheckBox CheckBox enables user making Yes/No selections. Inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions. Example of CheckBox appearance: Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 138
  • 139. Specify variable name, which will be used for storing user’s input. LIMITATION: Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters, and numbers, and must not start with a digit. Variable names must be unique within a Slide. Specify value for the variable, in case user marks CheckBox. Specify initial condition, which is whether or not CheckBox is marked after Object loads up. Use “Display Settings” tab to specify the CheckBox display. The essential CheckBox is “Show description”. In case it is not marked, all other tab parameters are disabled for editing, therefore only CheckBox will be displayed on the Slide. In case “Show description” CheckBox is selected, you can input description text into the field, which is in Rich Text Format mode. If needed, modify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between CheckBox border and text. Additionally, you can specify position (right or left) of the text description with regards to the CheckBox. Object Events Object “CheckBox” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “CheckBox”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Triggered Upon Action Editor On Check User sets checkmark On Uncheck User removes checkmark On Change State User sets or removes checkmark. This event is triggered right before events mentioned above. 139
  • 140. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE INPUT Restrict access to checkbox. ENABLE INPUT Permit access to checkbox. SET STATE Set checkbox state Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled value Returns 1 if object is currently checked, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.value 5.5.11.5. Group of Radio Buttons Group of Radio Buttons enables user making single Yes/No selection for one out of several values. Inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions. Example of Group of Radio Buttons appearance: Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 140
  • 141. Specify variable name, which will be used for storing user’s input. LIMITATION: Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters, and numbers, and must not start with a digit. Variable names must be unique within a Slide. Fill in the list of possible variable values. Open Input screen by clicking on the “+” icon. Enter the text description for the selected value into the field, which is in Rich Text Format mode. Specify value for the variable, in case user marks Radio Button. Specify initial condition, which is whether or not Radio Button is checked after Module loads up. LIMITATION: No more than one value should be initially selected for this type of object. Use “Display” tab to specify the Radio Button display. 141
  • 142. The essential CheckBox is “Show description”. In case it is not marked, all other tab parameters are disabled for editing, therefore only Radio Buttons will be displayed on the Slide. In case “Show description” CheckBox is selected, description text of radio buttons will be displayed. If needed, modify value for text margin. Text margin defines the space between Radio Button and text. Additionally, you can specify position (right or left) of the text description with regards to the Radio Buttons. Object Events Object “Group of Radio Buttons” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Group of Radio Buttons”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Action Editor Triggered Upon On Change State User sets checkmark on Radio Button. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE INPUT Restrict access to radio group. ENABLE INPUT Permit access to radio group. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 otherwise. $OBJ_ID.disabled value Returns value of currently checked radio button. $OBJ_ID.value 5.5.11.6. Drop-down Menu Drop-down Menu enables user making single choice selections out of a multiple values. Inserted values are accessible in a form of variables within CourseLab and may be employed in different actions. Example of Drop-down Menu appearance: 142
  • 143. Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. Specify variable name, which will be used for storing user’s input. LIMITATION: Variable names must contain only Latin alphabet letters, and numbers, and must not start with a digit. Variable names must be unique within a Slide. Fill in the list of possible variable values. Open Input/Edit screen by clicking on the “+” icon. Enter the text description for the selected value into the field. Specify value for the variable, in case user selects particular menu item. Specify initial condition, which is whether or not Menu-Item is selected after Module loads up. LIMITATION: No more than one value should be initially selected for this type of object. 143
  • 144. Use “Display” tab to specify the Drop-down menu display. Note: these settings will affect all menu-items. Object Events Object is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Action Editor Triggered Upon On Select Item User selects Menu Item Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result DISABLE INPUT Restrict access to input field. ENABLE INPUT Permit access to input field. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax 144
  • 145. disabled Returns 1 if object is currently disabled, 0 $OBJ_ID.disabled otherwise. value Returns currently selected value. $OBJ_ID.value selectedName Returns currently selected item description. $OBJ_ID.selectedName 5.5.11.7. Button Pressed Button enables triggering of the previously created actions. Example of Button appearance: Add object to the Frame. Adjust size and position an object in relation to the Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen. The only parameter on the first tab to fill is the button label. 145
  • 146. Use “Display” tab to specify the Button display. 5.5.12. Simulations “Simulation” group of objects includes special objects, which enable creation of the tests for the correct sequence of actions based on the software simulations. 5.5.12.1. “Task controller” object “Task controller” object is a special object, which contains correct scenario for the multi step interactive task. Object is not visible to the student. “Task controller” object works in close cooperation with “Test Structure” object by forwarding the status information about completion of the exercise. LIMITATIONS: Only one “Task controller”objects per Slide. Since this is invisible object, allocation within a Slide does not matter. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 146
  • 147. On the “Task” tab fill in fields that are specific to task. Task ID is unique within module identifier of the task (for example, it can be assembled using identifiers of the Chapter, Topic, and so on). Chapter/Topic/Group ID – indicates the level of test structure hierarchy. Marker “Mandatory” – if selected, then specified exercise will have the best chances to be included into the collection of the tasks, which will be offered to the user at the start up of the test (depends on the method of the selection specified for the Test Structure object). Attributes are additional parameters independent of the Chapter/Topic/Group hierarchy. These parameters are used when building more complicated selections of tasks upon test start up. 147
  • 148. The step by step task instructions are described on the “Task sequence” tab. Step is one necessary action performed by the user (mouse click or text input). 148
  • 149. Right after the Slide is launched, the object is waiting for the user’s response for conditions of the first step. In case condition was successfully fulfilled by the user, object automatically switches its mode to the waiting mode for the user to provide response for the next step conditions, and so on, until the sequence of the correct steps is performed. Step parameters Step ID is used to specify step in the list of steps. It should be unique within one task. Number of attempts – defines the number of unsuccessful tries, after reaching this limit, task execution will be ended with failure. Time limit on step – terminate task execution, if user exceeds the time allocated for the step completion (it is recommended to use only if necessary). Check on the next step – verification check for the current step will be “postponed” and will be executed for both current and next step together. Such verification method is typically used for the text fields input (it is almost impossible to correctly define the moment when user is finished with its input. Hence, verification is only performed, for example, when user presses “OK” button on the next step). Step can have “multiple paths”: one or more different correct variants of the actions can be defined. Let us review how to specify the action variant. Variant ID is unique identifier within a step. Check marker defines whether or not certain event (for example, mouse click or keyboard input) will be checked. Source – defines identifier of the event’s source (source identifier is used for calling action METHOD – REDIRECT ACTION of the Test Structure object) or source of the text being verified (in this case, source identifier is a variable name of the text field). In case check text input is selected, then both fields for the checked string and “Match Case” marker become accessible. 149
  • 150. If upon completion of the action, which corresponds to certain alternative, it is necessary to switch to the waiting mode for the action different from the next in the line from the list of steps, then it is possible to precisely specify identifiers of the step and variant, waiting mode for which needs to be established. In case these fields are not filled, the transition to the next step occurs (default behavior). In case only “Next Step” field is filled the system will be awaiting for all possible variants of this step to be executed. In case both fields are filled, the system will be awaiting only for specified variant of specified step to be executed. On the Scoring tab you can specify one or more objectives to which task score will be recorded. Note, that you can specify different values for objectives. Object events “Task Structure” object is a complex type of object, which is capable of generating events, depending on user’s actions and also depending on the interpretation of these actions by the object. In combination with actions these events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the object Triggered Upon Reference in the Action Editor On Attempt At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation On Success At the moment of action (step) evaluation, in case the action is correct. On Failure At the moment of action (step) evaluation, in case the action is incorrect. On Step End At the moment of current step completion, before transition to the waiting mode for the next step. On Attempts Limit After action (step) evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to zero. On Task End Task completion is finished (no matter how successful or unsuccessful it was). 150
  • 151. 5.5.12.2. “Test Structure” object “Test Structure” object is a special object, which manages tasks selection and display with regards to predefined conditions. This object appears in a form of the “Next Question” button. “Test Structure” object functions in close cooperation with “Task Controller” objects by receiving from them the status information about completion of the task. LIMITATIONS: This object must be located only on the Master Slide. Insert object into the Slide. Open “Properties” dialog screen. The Chapter List contains the list of Chapters headings to which tasks are linked. You can define the number of questions to be displayed for each chapter and for every topic within a chapter. ATTENTION! IDs of the chapters used for selecting tasks, must precisely match IDs used for tasks specifications. Attributes are additional filters independent of the Chapter/Topic/Group hierarchy. These filters will be applied to selections of tasks. Task selection – method of selection, which will be used for building test during Module launching. • Standard selection – specifically corresponds to the chosen number of the tasks from each topic/chapter. 151
  • 152. Mandatory selection – selects all tasks marked as mandatory from each topic/chapter. In addition, if quantity allowance is not exceeded, selection will supplement with other additional tasks. • All groups selection – selects single question from each group. • Fast selection – selects single question from each chapter, and is used for tuning purposes. Object methods Reference in the Action Editor Execution Method REDIRECT ACTION Any action that needs to be verified is forwarded into the Test Structure object, which automatically defines current Task Controller object and redirects action to it. 5.5.12.3. “Results by selections” object “Results by selections” object enables providing results upon test completion for the different objectives of the module, counting only exercises which participate in current selection. Under such conditions, the maximum possible result on the objective scale is not the maximum value specified upon setting objectives for the Module, but rather maximum available score points which can be received for the current objective within just completed test (i.e. maximum for selection). “Results by selections” object functions in close cooperation with the “Test Structure” object by receiving from it information about content of the selections. Insert object into the Slide. Open “Properties” dialog screen. 152
  • 153. The list of available objectives enables specification of appearance settings for each objective, as well as providing informal description for displaying in the table. If required, you can check marker Normalize to 100% for better results representations. You can use “Display” tab for selecting parameters for the appearance of the object itself and its scales. 153
  • 154. 5.5.13. Questions The current version of CourseLab supports the following types of questions: • single choice • multiple select • ordered items • numerical fill-in-blank • text fill-in-blank • matching pairs You can insert a separate question of certain type as well as test (using “Test” Object) which contains any combination of the above listed questions. Let us describe these objects in more detail. 5.5.13.1. Object Single Choice Question Single Choice question object enables user to choose one correct item from a list of possible answers. Creating Question Add Question Object to the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu). 154
  • 155. In the opened dialog select “Question” tab. To input question’s text, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input area is RichText, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved as you type the text in. Use "+" button to specify as many possible answers as needed. In the opened sub-dialog screen press “TE” button of the corresponding field and insert text of the possible answer. Select checkbox for correct answer. LIMITATION: No more than one answer should be marked as the correct one otherwise result will be incorrect. Alternatively, you can edit entered answers by pressing “Edit” button under the “List” menu. Select “Shuffle variants on display” check box in case you want answers to be displayed in random order. Otherwise, answers will be displayed in order they were inserted. Use “Up” and “Down” arrows to change order. 155
  • 156. Use “Limitations” tab to set the following restrictions: 1. Number of attempts. In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined automatically (i.e. checkbox “Define automatically” is not checked), “Number of Attempts” field is available for input. There you can specify the number with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology. The following formula is used for Automatic attempts calculation: number of attempts equals to number of possible answers minus one (for example, 3 attempts for question with 4 answers, 4 attempts for questions with 5 answers, and so on). In case automatic attempts calculation is selected, the number specified in the “Number of Attempts” field is ignored. 2. Time limit for the answer. Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections, and the question will be validated for correctness even if “Check Answer” button is not pressed. If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration, it will be credited to the user. 3. Possibility to skip the question. In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing “Skip Question” button. The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to provide the answer later) or counted as failed (without a chance for another attempt). 4. Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again (recurring approaches). 156
  • 157. Use “Scoring” tab to specify scoring parameters for the question. The essential CheckBox is “Credit Question”. In case it is not marked, all other scoring parameters are disabled, therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user. Such questions are referred as not credited questions. These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic, to keep the user focused, and so forth. In case of the credited question the following options are available: • Base weight of a question/attempt – base number of points for the question (or attempt for regression method). This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question. If fixed crediting method is used, the base weight of question equals the total score. • The following crediting methods can be used: o Fixed (Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number of attempts. This score is equal to the base weight) o Regression method (In this case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try; the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth, until all tries are used). The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts. Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters. It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the 157
  • 158. automatically calculated one (which is number of possible answers minus one); otherwise regression method will become ineffective. • Objectives. Received points can be stored in one or several objectives simultaneously. Remember, that only objective “total” always exists (which is inserted into the list of objectives by default). The “total” objective is used to store scores for ALL the questions, which will be used to determine the final score for completing the learning Module. Should you decide to record points for the current question into the additional objectives, make sure that the corresponding objective is created (Go to menu “Module” - “Runtime Settings” - select “Objectives” tab). Use “Feedback” tab to specify feedback options, which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond (correct or incorrect) and after completing the question. You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box. If student has used off all the attempts for response, or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed; user will not be credited for this answer. This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing. You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the 158
  • 159. coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner) Note, that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details. On the "Display" and "Messages" tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit the information and warning messages. 159
  • 160. Object Events Object “Single Choice Question” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Single Choice Question”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Triggered Upon Action Editor On Display Question The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed On Change Choice User changes selected item On Attempt At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation On Success At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct. On Failure At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is incorrect. 160
  • 161. On Time Out At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined) On Attempts Limit After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to zero. On Skip Question After “Skip Question” button is pressed On Question Answered After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left (on timeout or on attempts limit) Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax questionMode Returns current question mode (tokens: "normal", $OBJ_ID.questionMode "review"). questionType Returns "choice". $OBJ_ID.questionType questionDurati Returns allowed question duration in seconds (if $OBJ_ID.questionDuration on exists). questionTimer Returns current question timer value in seconds (if $OBJ_ID.questionTimer exists). itemQuantity Returns total variants quantity. $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity questionValue Returns current question value (spot values $OBJ_ID.questionValue divided by "~": for example, "0~1~0~0" - 0 corresponds to empty spot, 1 - to checked spot). Note, that the order of spots is always as it was defined in object - no matter shuffled or not. attemptsLast Returns current number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns allowed number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal 161
  • 162. 5.5.13.2. Object “Multiple Select Question” Multiple Select Question object enables user to choose one or several correct items from a list of possible answers. Creating question Add Question Object to the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu). 162
  • 163. To input question’s text, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input area is RichText, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved as you type the text in. Use "+" button to specify possible answers as many as needed. In the opened sub-dialog screen press “TE” button of the corresponding field and insert text of the possible answer. Select checkbox for correct answer. Alternatively, you can edit entered answers by pressing “Edit” button under the “List” menu. Select “Shuffle variants on display” check box in case you want answers to be displayed in random order. Otherwise, answers will be displayed in order they were inserted. Use “Up” and “Down” arrows to change order. 163
  • 164. Use “Limitations” tab to set the following restrictions: 1. Number of attempts. In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined automatically (i.e. checkbox “Define automatically” is not checked), “Number of Attempts” field is available for input. There you can specify the number with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology. The following formula is used for Automatic attempts calculation: number of attempts equals to number of possible answers minus one (for example, 3 attempts for question with 4 answers, 4 attempts for questions with 5 answers, and so on). In case automatic attempts calculation is selected, the number specified in the “Number of Attempts” field is ignored. 2. Time limit for the answer. Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections, and the question will be validated for correctness even if “Check Answer” button is not pressed. If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration, it will be credited to the user. 3. Possibility to skip the question. In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing “Skip Question” button. The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to provide the answer later) or counted as failed (without a chance for another attempt). 4. Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again (recurring approaches). 164
  • 165. Use “Scoring” tab to specify scoring parameters for the question. The essential CheckBox is “Credit Question”. In case it is not marked, all other scoring parameters are disabled, therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user. Such questions are referred as not credited questions. These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic, to keep the user focused, and so forth. In case of the credited question the following options are available: • Base weight of a question/attempt – base number of points for the question (or attempt for regression method). This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question. If fixed crediting method is used, the base weight of question equals the total score. • The following crediting methods can be used: o Fixed (Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number of attempts. This score is equal to the base weight) o Regression method (In this case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try; the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth, until all tries are used). The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts. Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters. It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the 165
  • 166. automatically calculated one (which is number of possible answers minus one); otherwise regression method will become ineffective. • Objectives. Received points can be stored in one or several objectives simultaneously. Remember, that only objective “total” always exists (which is inserted into the list of objectives by default). The “total” objective is used to store scores for ALL the questions, which will be used to determine the final score for completing the learning Module. Should you decide to record points for the current question into the additional objectives, make sure that the corresponding objective is created (Go to menu “Module” - “Runtime Settings” - select “Objectives” tab). . Use “Feedback” tab to specify feedback options, which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond (correct or incorrect) and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box. If student has used off all the attempts for response, or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed; user will not be credited for this answer. This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing. You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner) Note, that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of 166
  • 167. feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details. On the "Display" and "Messages" tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit the information and warning messages. 167
  • 168. Object Events Object “Multiple Select Question” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Multiple Select Question”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Triggered Upon Action Editor On Display Question The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed On Change Choice User changes selected item (set or removes any checkmark) On Attempt At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation On Success At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct. On Failure At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is incorrect. 168
  • 169. On Time Out At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined) On Attempts Limit After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to zero. On Skip Question After “Skip Question” button is pressed On Question Answered After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left (on timeout or on attempts limit) Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax questionMode Returns current question mode (tokens: $OBJ_ID.questionMode "normal", "review"). questionType Returns "select". $OBJ_ID.questionType questionDuration Returns allowed question duration in seconds $OBJ_ID.questionDuration (if exists). questionTimer Returns current question timer value in $OBJ_ID.questionTimer seconds (if exists). itemQuantity Returns total variants quantity. $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity questionValue Returns current question value (spot values $OBJ_ID.questionValue divided by "~": for example, "0~1~1~0" - 0 corresponds to empty spot, 1 - to checked spot). Note, that the order of spots is always as it was defined in object - no matter shuffled or not. attemptsLast Returns current number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns allowed number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal 169
  • 170. 5.5.13.3. Object “Ordered Items Question” Ordered Items types of questions require from the user to specify the right order of presented items. Creating question Add Question Object to the Frame. By default, object is placed in the center of the Frame. Adjust size and position an object with respect to the prospective Frame structure. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu). 170
  • 171. To input question’s text, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input area is RichText, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved as you type the text in. Use "+" button to specify possible answers as many as needed. In the opened sub-dialog screen press “TE” button of the corresponding field and insert text of the variant. Alternatively, you can edit entered answers by pressing “Edit” button under the “List” menu. Note, that for this type of question the correct Order of Items will be the order specified by author. Question items are ALWAYS presented randomly to the user. Use “Up” and ”Down” arrows to change items order. 171
  • 172. Use “Limitations” tab to set the following restrictions: 1. Number of attempts. In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined automatically (i.e. checkbox “Define automatically” is not checked), “Number of Attempts” field is available for input. There you can specify the number with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology. The following formula is used for Automatic attempts calculation: number of attempts equals to number of possible answers minus one (for example, 3 attempts for question with 4 answers, 4 attempts for questions with 5 answers, and so on). In case automatic attempts calculation is selected, the number specified in the “Number of Attempts” field is ignored. 2. Time limit for the answer. Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections, and the question will be validated for correctness even if “Check Answer” button is not pressed. If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration, it will be credited to the user. 3. Possibility to skip the question. In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing “Skip Question” button. The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to provide the answer later) or counted as failed (without a chance for another attempt). 4. Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again (recurring approaches). 172
  • 173. Use “Scoring” tab to specify scoring parameters for the question. The essential CheckBox is “Credit Question”. In case it is not marked, all other scoring parameters are disabled, therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user. Such questions are referred as not credited questions. These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic, to keep the user focused, and so forth. In case of the credited question the following options are available: • Base weight of a question/attempt – base number of points for the question (or attempt for regression method). This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question. If fixed crediting method is used, the base weight of question equals the total score. • The following crediting methods can be used: o Fixed (Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number of attempts. This score is equal to the base weight) o Regression method (In this case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try; the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth, until all tries are used). The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts. Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters. It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the 173
  • 174. automatically calculated one (which is number of possible answers minus one); otherwise regression method will become ineffective. • Objectives. Received points can be stored in one or several objectives simultaneously. Remember, that only objective “total” always exists (which is inserted into the list of objectives by default). The “total” objective is used to store scores for ALL the questions, which will be used to determine the final score for completing the learning Module. Should you decide to record points for the current question into the additional objectives, make sure that the corresponding objective is created (Go to menu “Module” - “Runtime Settings” - select “Objectives” tab). Use “Feedback” tab to specify feedback options, which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond (correct or incorrect) and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box. If student has used off all the attempts for response, or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed; user will not be credited for this answer. This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing. You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the 174
  • 175. coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner) Note, that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details. On the "Display" and "Messages" tabs you can select appearance settings for the object and edit the information and warning messages. 175
  • 176. Object Events Object “Ordered Items Question” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Ordered Items Question”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Triggered Upon Action Editor On Display Question The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed On Move Item User moves any item On Attempt At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation On Success At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct. On Failure At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is incorrect. 176
  • 177. On Time Out At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined) On Attempts Limit After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to zero. On Skip Question After “Skip Question” button is pressed On Question Answered After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left (on timeout or on attempts limit) Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax questionMode Returns current question mode (tokens: $OBJ_ID.questionMode "normal", "review"). questionType Returns "range". $OBJ_ID.questionType questionDuration Returns allowed question duration in $OBJ_ID.questionDuration seconds (if exists). questionTimer Returns current question timer value in $OBJ_ID.questionTimer seconds (if exists). itemQuantity Returns total variants quantity. $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity questionValue Returns current question item order (spot $OBJ_ID.questionValue numbers starting from 0 divided by "~": for example, "3~1~0~2" - "0~1~2~3" in this case corresponds to correct order). attemptsLast Returns current number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns allowed number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal 177
  • 178. 5.5.13.4. Object “Numeric Fill-in-Blank Question” Numeric fill-in-blank questions require from the user to enter the correct number into the answer field using keyboard. Creating question Add Question Object to the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu). 178
  • 179. To input question’s text, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input area is RichText, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved as you type the text in. Use "+" button to specify possible answers as many as needed. Specify the approximate length of the entry field in symbols. We recommend allowing some extra space for that purpose. For example, if desired answer is 3.224 then the field size is 5 symbols (including decimal point). We recommend using double size of the desired length (4 symbols in this example) so that user does not get a hint about the correct answer. If necessary, enter description message for the answer field. Description message appears to the left of the answer field and may contain for example, units of measure for the answer. Specify conditions for the correct answer. Use "+" menu button to add conditions to the list of conditions menu as many as needed. Fill in the list of conditions for validating an answer in the opened sub-dialog screen. In the simple case only single condition is used (for example, when entered answer must exactly match some number). In case you need to specify the interval of numbers (for example when the answer should be the number in the range of 7 to 8) you should specify two conditions: a) greater than 7 b) less than 8. Therefore any number in the range of 7 to 8 (excluding 7 and 8 otherwise different conditions should be used: greater or equal to 7 AND less or equal to 8) will be treated as correct answer. 179
  • 180. IMPORTANT! When user’s response is checked, there is no difference whether comma or dot symbols are used as a decimal separator. However, for specifying the correct answer in CourseLab editor, it is recommended to use decimal POINT. Use “Limitations” tab to set the following restrictions: 1. Number of attempts. “Number of Attempts” field is always available for input (there is no automatic attempts calculation rule). There you can specify the number of answer attempts with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology. 2. Time limit for the answer. Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections, and the question will be validated for correctness even if “Check Answer” button is not pressed. If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration, it will be credited to the user. 3. Possibility to skip the question. In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing “Skip Question” button. The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to provide the answer later) or counted as failed (without a chance for another attempt). 4. Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again (recurring approaches). 180
  • 181. Use “Scoring” tab to specify scoring parameters for the question. The essential CheckBox is “Credit Question”. In case it is not marked, all other scoring parameters are disabled, therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user. Such questions are referred as not credited questions. These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic, to keep the user focused, and so forth. In case of the credited question the following options are available: • Base weight of a question/attempt – base number of points for the question (or attempt for regression method). This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question. If fixed crediting method is used, the base weight of question equals the total score. • The following crediting methods can be used: o Fixed (Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number of attempts. This score is equal to the base weight) o Regression method (In this case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try; the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth, until all tries are used). The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts. Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters. It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the 181
  • 182. automatically calculated one (which is number of possible answers minus one), otherwise regression method will become ineffective. • Objectives. Received points can be stored in one or several objectives simultaneously. Remember, that only objective “total” always exists (which is inserted into the list of objectives by default). The “total” objective is used to store scores for ALL the questions, which will be used to determine the final score for completing the learning Module. Should you decide to record points for the current question into the additional objectives, make sure that the corresponding objective is created (Go to menu “Module” - “Runtime Settings” - select “Objectives” tab). Use “Feedback” tab to specify feedback options, which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond (correct or incorrect) and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box. If student has used off all the attempts for response, or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed; user will not be credited for this answer. This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing. You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner) Note, that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of 182
  • 183. feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details. Use “Display” tab to select color scheme for the main elements of the question with respect to the Module design. 183
  • 184. Use “Messages” tab to modify texts of notifications and warnings for the question. Object Events Object “Numerical Fill-in-Blank Question” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Numerical Fill-in-Blank Question”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Triggered Upon Action Editor On Display Question The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed On Attempt At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation On Success At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct. 184
  • 185. On Failure At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is incorrect. On Time Out At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined) On Attempts Limit After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to zero. On Skip Question After “Skip Question” button is pressed On Question Answered After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left (on timeout or on attempts limit) Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax questionMode Returns current question mode (tokens: $OBJ_ID.questionMode "normal", "review"). questionType Returns "numeric". $OBJ_ID.questionType questionDuration Returns allowed question duration in seconds $OBJ_ID.questionDuration (if exists). questionTimer Returns current question timer value in seconds $OBJ_ID.questionTimer (if exists). itemQuantity Returns total variants quantity. $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity questionValue Returns current question field value (if there is $OBJ_ID.questionValue more than one input field, then returns string: values divided by "~"). attemptsLast Returns current number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns allowed number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal 185
  • 186. 5.5.13.5. Object “Text Fill-in-Blank Question” Text fill-in-blank types of questions require from the user to fill in the correct answer into the blank spaces using the keyboard. In general, entered text can contain numbers, but when user’s response is evaluated, the numbers are interpreted as text characters rather than numbers. Creating question Add Question Object to the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu). 186
  • 187. In the opened dialog select “Question” tab. To input question’s text, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input area is RichText, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved as you type the text in. Use "+" button to specify possible answers as many as needed. Specify the approximate length of the entry field in symbols. We recommend allowing some extra space for that purpose. If necessary, enter description message for the answer field. Description message appears to the left of the answer field and may contain answer format instructions, for example, “Use capital letter to answer”. Specify conditions for the correct answer. In the conditions list menu add as many conditions as needed using "+" menu button. Fill in the list of conditions for validating an answer in the opened sub-dialog screen. In the simple case, only single condition is used (for example, when entered answer must exactly match the specified word). You can also set condition “Contain”. In this case entered answer will be validated on whether or not it contains the character string specified by author. For example, if “Contain” “point” condition is set, either one of the following words will be considered as correct answers: Pointing, pointless, and pinpoint. Lastly, you can set the “Match Case” condition to match case when validating the answer. In this case, 187
  • 188. for above mentioned example the word “Pointing” which starts from the capital letter will not be considered as correct answer. Use “Limitations” tab to set the following restrictions: 1. Number of attempts. “Number of Attempts” field is always available for input (there is no automatic attempts calculation rule). There you can specify the number of answer attempts with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology. 2. Time limit for the answer. Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections, and the question will be validated for correctness even if “Check Answer” button is not pressed. If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration, it will be credited to the user. 3. Possibility to skip the question. In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing “Skip Question” button. The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to provide the answer later) or counted as failed (without a chance for another attempt). 4. Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again (recurring approaches). 188
  • 189. Use “Scoring” tab to specify scoring parameters for the question. The essential CheckBox is “Credit Question”. In case it is not marked, all other scoring parameters are disabled, therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user. Such questions are referred as not credited questions. These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic, to keep the user focused, and so forth. In case of the credited question the following options are available: • Base weight of a question/attempt – base number of points for the question (or attempt for regression method). This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question. If fixed crediting method is used, the base weight of question equals the total score. • The following crediting methods can be used: o Fixed (Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number of attempts. This score is equal to the base weight) o Regression method (In this case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try; the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth, until all tries are used). The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts. Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters. It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the 189
  • 190. automatically calculated one (which is number of possible answers minus one), otherwise regression method will become ineffective. • Objectives. Received points can be stored in one or several objectives simultaneously. Remember, that only objective “total” always exists (which is inserted into the list of objectives by default). The “total” objective is used to store scores for ALL the questions, which will be used to determine the final score for completing the learning Module. Should you decide to record points for the current question into the additional objectives, make sure that the corresponding objective is created (Go to menu “Module” - “Runtime Settings” - select “Objectives” tab). Use “Feedback” tab to specify feedback options, which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond (correct or incorrect) and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box. If student has used off all the attempts for response, or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed; user will not be credited for this answer. This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing. You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner) Note, that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of 190
  • 191. feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details. Use “Display” tab to select color scheme for the main elements of the question with respect to the Module design. 191
  • 192. Use “Messages” tab to modify texts of notifications and warnings for the question. Object Events Object “Text Fill-in-Blank Question” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Text Fill-in-Blank Question”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Triggered Upon Action Editor On Display Question The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed On Attempt At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation On Success At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct. 192
  • 193. On Failure At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is incorrect. On Time Out At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined) On Attempts Limit After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to zero. On Skip Question After “Skip Question” button is pressed On Question Answered After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left (on timeout or on attempts limit) Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax questionMode Returns current question mode (tokens: $OBJ_ID.questionMode "normal", "review"). questionType Returns "text". $OBJ_ID.questionType questionDuration Returns allowed question duration in $OBJ_ID.questionDuration seconds (if exists). questionTimer Returns current question timer value in $OBJ_ID.questionTimer seconds (if exists). itemQuantity Returns total variants quantity. $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity questionValue Returns current question field value (if there $OBJ_ID.questionValue is more than one input field, then returns string: values divided by "~"). attemptsLast Returns current number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns allowed number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal 193
  • 194. 5.5.13.6. Object “Matching Pairs Question” Matching pairs type of questions require from the user to match the provided question items. Creating question Add Question Object to the Frame. IMPORTANT! Matching pairs type of question is space consuming when placed into the Frame, therefore we do not recommend setting the width of the object to less than 700 pixels. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu). 194
  • 195. In the opened dialog select “Question” tab. To input question’s text, press “TE” button of the corresponding field. The format of input area is RichText, therefore all font settings (size, color, and style) will be saved as you type the text in. Considering specifics of matching pairs questions, it is not always necessary to display the text of the question (Object description will always be displayed in the Slide). Remove corresponding check mark, in case you want the question text not to be displayed. Specify variants of matching question items. In the list of answers menu add as many variants of matching question items as needed using "+" menu button. In the opened sub-dialog pairs editor screen press “TE” button of the corresponding field and insert text of base item and its corresponding match which is in RichText format. Please remember, that there are size limitations for entering both the base items and matches, therefore try using short texts and small fonts. Inserted question items appear in the List of items. If desired, you can edit entered items by pressing “Edit” button under the “List” menu. Note, that in matching pairs types of questions the correct matching pairs will be the ones specified by author. Unlike the question base items, which will be displayed in order they were inserted, the matches will ALWAYS be displayed in random order. 195
  • 196. Use “Limitations” tab to set the following restrictions: • Number of attempts. In case number of attempts is not supposed to be defined automatically (i.e. checkbox “Define automatically” is not checked), “Number of Attempts” field is available for input. There you can specify the number with respect to the level of question complexity or testing methodology. The following formula is used for Automatic attempts calculation: number of attempts equals to number of possible answers minus one (for example, 3 attempts for question with 4 answers, 4 attempts for questions with 5 answers and so on). In case automatic attempts calculation is selected, the number specified in the “Number of Attempts” field is ignored. • Time limit for the answer. Upon time expiration user will be restricted to make further answer selections, and the question will be validated for correctness even if “Check Answer” button is not pressed. If the correct answer is chosen just before time expiration, it will be credited to the user. • Possibility to skip the question. In case this option is selected user is able to ignore the question by pressing “Skip Question” button. The author of the course can specify whether or not skipped question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to provide the answer later) or counted as failed (without a chance for another attempt). • Possibility to reset stored result and answer the question once again (recurring approaches). 196
  • 197. Use “Scoring” tab to specify scoring parameters for the question. The essential CheckBox is “Credit Question”. In case it is not marked, all other scoring parameters are disabled, therefore they will be ignored when presenting question to the user. Such questions are referred as not credited questions. These questions are frequently used to prepare the user for the next Slide Topic, to keep the user focused, and so forth. In case of the credited question the following options are available: • Base weight of a question/attempt – base number of points for the question (or attempt for regression method). This number is used to calculate the Total score for the question. If fixed crediting method is used, the base weight of question equals the total score. • The following crediting methods can be used: o Fixed (Upon the correct response user gets the same score regardless the number of attempts. This score is equal to the base weight) o Regression method (In this case user is getting the highest possible score for providing the correct answer from the first try; the number of points is decreasing on the second try and so forth, until all tries are used). The maximum number of points in this case is equal to the base number of points multiplied by the number of attempts. Regression method enables more accurate performance evaluation but requires applying additional requirements to question parameters. It is important that number of tries for this method should not exceed the 197
  • 198. automatically calculated one (which is number of possible answers minus one), otherwise regression method will become ineffective. • Objectives. Received points can be stored in one or several objectives simultaneously. Remember, that only objective “total” always exists (which is inserted into the list of objectives by default). The “total” objective is used to store scores for ALL the questions, which will be used to determine the final score for completing the learning Module. Should you decide to record points for the current question into the additional objectives, make sure that the corresponding objective is created (Go to menu “Module” - “Runtime Settings” - select “Objectives” tab). Use “Feedback” tab to specify feedback options, which define what shall be displayed upon another attempt to respond (correct or incorrect) and after completing the question You may permit the display of correct answer upon question completion by marking corresponding check box. If student has used off all the attempts for response, or if the time has expired then the correct answer will be displayed; user will not be credited for this answer. This option may be used when the main objective of the question is educating rather than testing. You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the 198
  • 199. coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner) Note, that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details. On the "Display" tab you can select appearance settings for the object. 199
  • 200. Use “Messages” tab to modify texts of notifications and warnings for the question. Object Events Object “Numerical Fill-in-Blank Question” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Numerical Fill-in-Blank Question”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Triggered Upon Action Editor On Display Question The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed On Move Item User moves any item On Attempt At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation On Success At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct. 200
  • 201. On Failure At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is incorrect. On Time Out At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined) On Attempts Limit After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to zero. On Skip Question After “Skip Question” button is pressed On Question Answered After answer is evaluated and no more attempts left (on timeout or on attempts limit) Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax questionMode Returns current question mode (tokens: $OBJ_ID.questionMode "normal", "review"). questionType Returns "oto" (one-to-one match). $OBJ_ID.questionType questionDuration Returns allowed question duration in seconds $OBJ_ID.questionDuration (if exists). questionTimer Returns current question timer value in $OBJ_ID.questionTimer seconds (if exists). itemQuantity Returns total variants quantity. $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity questionValue Returns current match item order (match $OBJ_ID.questionValue numbers starting from 0 divided by "~": for example, "3~1~0~2" - "0~1~2~3" in this case corresponds to correct order). attemptsLast Returns current number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns allowed number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal 201
  • 202. 5.5.14. Tests 5.5.14.1. Test “Test” object is the structured set of questions (or single question in the simple case). “Test” object supports every type of the questions used in CourseLab: • single choice • multiple select • ordered items • numeric fill-in-blank • text fill-in-blank • matching pairs Creating Test Add Object to the Frame. LIMITATION: During editing the substitute of the object is displayed. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu). 202
  • 203. Use “Questions” tab to add any number of questions to the list of the questions by pressing “+” button. The opened edit screen practically duplicates the object “Question” edit window of the corresponding type, the only difference is that some common to all test parameters are missing. Please see the corresponding question object descriptions for more details. WARNING! If you plan to use this module within an LMS, limits on amount of stored data may apply depending on e-learning standard used and LMS properties. Every test question stores its data (and length of data depends on complexity of question), therefore it is recommended not to exceed 30-40 questions in test. The only standard that allows large amount of data to be stored is SCORM 2004. 203
  • 204. You can set the test as “not credited”, if needed (for example when the test is a part of the learning process or an additional exercise rather than knowledge testing) by removing “Scored Test” mark on the “Limitations and Scoring” tab. You can permit or restrict timing questions (Use “Enable time limitation for test” check box) if timing is defined. In addition, you can specify time limit for the whole test (use “Limit test duration” check box and corresponding field). You can permit the option of skipping the question by marking corresponding check box; however, question will be classified as skipped (with opportunity to provide the answer later). Besides that, you can allow the second run for the test. If this option is unchecked, the user will be prompted with message stating that test had already been taken and only test results can be viewed. In case this option is marked, the student will be prompted with the same as above warning message, but with the two options available to choose from: one is to take test again and second is to see test results. If test is taken again, all previous test results are discarded. At last, you can permit or restrict display of pictures related to the questions for the entire Test. IMPORTANT! You can not set up Objective for storing results of the entire test, instead, when editing each question specifies parameters settings for required Objective(s). Such approach allows maximum flexibility when evaluating test results. 204
  • 205. You may permit or restrict the feedback messages. You can modify the text of feedback messages, which is in RichText format. Feedback messages are displayed in the separate small window during Module play back. You can modify display coordinates for this window (the coordinates are given relative to the object’s upper left corner). Note, that there is a check box displayed next to every Edit button for the text feedback; it enables to turn On/Off display of feedback messages in CourseLab Editor. By default, all check boxes are empty to avoid overloading the question Object with too many details. 205
  • 206. On the "Display" tab you can select appearance settings for the object. On the "Messages" and "Texts" tabs you can edit the information and warning messages of the test. 206
  • 207. 207
  • 208. On the "Buttons" and "Spots" tabs you can define custom question and test buttons and active spots for single choice, multiple select and order type of questions. 208
  • 209. 209
  • 210. Object Events Object “Numerical Fill-in-Blank Question” is capable generating events with regards to the user's actions and interpretation of the actions by the object. When combined with actions events can be employed for building up intellectual behavior models for other objects depending on the current state of the Object “Numerical Fill-in-Blank Question”. Events are available using CourseLab built-in events manipulation mechanism. Reference in the Action Triggered Upon Editor On Display Question The question is fully loaded and all elements of the question are displayed On Choice Change Item configuration changed in single choice question On Select Change Item configuration changed in multiple select question On Item Order Change Item configuration changed in order question On Numeric Value Value changed in numeric question 210
  • 211. Change On Text Value Change Value changed in text question On Matching Change Item configuration changed in matching pairs question On Attempt At the moment of answer acceptance, but before answer evaluation On Success At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is correct. On Failure At the moment of answer evaluation, in case the answer is incorrect. On Question Time Out At the moment of time expiration for the answer (if defined for question) On Attempts Limit After answer evaluated, in case the number of attempts decreased to zero. On Skip Question After “Skip Question” button is pressed On Question End After answer is evaluated and no more activities left in this question On Test Timer Tick Every second while test timer is active On Test Time Out At the moment of time expiration for the whole test (if defined) On Test End After all questions are answered or test timeout Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax testMode Returns current test mode (tokens: $OBJ_ID.testMode "normal", "review"). questionNumber Returns current question number $OBJ_ID.questionNumber (starting from 0, first question has 0 number). totalQuestionQuantity Returns total questions quantity in $OBJ_ID.totalQuestionQuantity current test. testDuration Returns allowed test duration in $OBJ_ID.testDuration seconds (if exists). testTimer Returns current test timer value in $OBJ_ID.testTimer seconds (if exists). questionType Returns current question type $OBJ_ID.questionType (tokens: "choice", "select", "range", 211
  • 212. "numeric", "text", "oto"). questionDuration Returns allowed question duration in $OBJ_ID.questionDuration seconds (if exists). questionTimer Returns current question timer value $OBJ_ID.questionTimer in seconds (if exists). itemQuantity Returns total variants quantity. $OBJ_ID.itemQuantity questionValue Returns current question answer $OBJ_ID.questionValue value (format corresponds to question type). attemptsLast Returns current number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsLast attemptsTotal Returns allowed number of attempts. $OBJ_ID.attemptsTotal 5.5.14.2. Current Results “Current Results” object is used for displaying to the user current results for the one of the objectives. Note, that this object is created when the Slide is loaded, therefore it cannot display score changes automatically. Therefore, use REFRESH object method if you wish to display up-to-date values. Add Object to the Frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu). 212
  • 213. The field for specifying objective is the main field on the “Parameters” tab. You can precisely specify parameters that should be displayed and modify description messages to each of them. Marker Normalize to 100% enables presenting the number of points not only as actual number, but also as a percentage from the maximum number of points. Use “Display” tab to select color scheme for the main elements of the object, and also specify font settings for displaying points. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result REFRESH Refreshes current score values. Object Specific Properties Along with common object properties, this object has some specific properties, that can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax objectiveID Returns objective identifier. $OBJ_ID.objectiveID rawScore Returns raw objective score. $OBJ_ID.rawScore scaledScore Returns scaled objective score (if can be calculated). $OBJ_ID.scaledScore maxScore Returns maximal objective score (if defined). $OBJ_ID.maxScore 213
  • 214. 5.5.14.3. Results by objectives “Results by objectives” object is used for displaying current results by several objectives simultaneously. Note, that this object is created when the Slide is loaded, therefore it cannot display score changes automatically. Therefore, use REFRESH object method if you wish to display up-to-date values. Insert object into the frame. Open “Properties” dialog screen (double click on object within a Slide or select “Properties” option from the context menu). Use “Scales” tab for defining list of objectives results for which should be presented and specify parameters for displaying results. Marker Normalize to 100% enables presenting the number of points not only as actual number, but also as a percentage from the maximum number of points. 214
  • 215. Use “Display” tab to select color scheme for the main elements of the object, and also specify font settings for displaying points. Object Methods The state of the Object can be modified using methods. Method name Execution Result REFRESH Refreshes current score values. 215
  • 216. 5.6. Scenarios Scenario presents itself as a template for building interactions between multiple objects. Scenarios enable author of the course to define necessary parameters and get a filling for the slide right away. Even though the same task can be accomplished by placing text, pictures, and by specifying interactions between them, the usage of scenarios significantly speeds up the process. Let us review scenario utilization by using example of “Products catalogue” scenario. To place “Products catalogue” into the Slide, open “scenario” section on the tasks pane. Use context menu of the scenario icon to choose “Insert” item. To change parameters of the scenario, open “Frame structure” section on the task pane. Select “Edit scenario…” item from the context menu on the scenario identifier. Dialog window opens up, where you can specify parameters for scenario. For each product the following is defined: • Name of the product. • File containing the picture of the product. • Formatted text describing the product. Upon completion of all parameters, there will be list of the product’s names displayed on the Slide. When one of the product’s names from the list is selected, the card for corresponding product opens up. 5.7. Cursors The learning Courses designed for training on using software programs can contain software simulations. Usually, simulation is the sequence of the frames. For example, a moving cursor points to the predefined menu item. Then mouse click is imitated, and after that the next frame displays the result. For illustration of mouse movements the special object “Cursor” is employed. If during recording of simulation the marker “Capture Cursor” is checked, cursor object will be inserted into the frames automatically. However, cursor object can be added to the existing frames as well. To do so, select Cursor item from the “Insert” menu. Cursor will be placed on the current Frame. 216
  • 217. Cursor movement path The blue line that comes toward cursor represents cursor movement path. To change starting point of the cursor movement, hold down Ctrl key and double-click into the wanted point within a frame. In such a way you can modify the starting point of the cursor only on the first Frame within a Slide. For all subsequent frames the starting point of the cursor movement will be the cursor’s end point on the previous Frame. In order to modify cursor’s end point, simply drag the cursor icon using mouse into the desired point within a Slide. Select “Previous Frame” menu item from the cursor context menu to merge the final position of the cursor with the cursor’s end position on the previous Frame. Select “Next Frame” menu item from the cursor context menu to merge the final position of the cursor with the cursor’s end position on the next Frame. Time of cursor movement It is possible to specify cursor movement starting time and duration of the cursor’s movement. Select “Format Cursor” menu item from the cursor context menu. “Format” dialog screen opens up. 217
  • 218. The “Display” field contains information regarding duration of the cursor movement. The “Appear after” field contains information regarding cursor movement starting time. Within the same Frame it is possible to create complex multiple cursors movement paths by adding several cursors. It is obvious, that for each subsequent cursor the movement start time must be later than the movement end time of previous cursor. For all cursors with the “Display mouse click” setting turned on, the duration of the click is 0.7 second. This time period needs to be considered when defining display time for the Frame, and when specifying setting “Appear After” for the next cursor in the frame. 218
  • 219. 6. Handling Objects 6.1. Common settings of all objects. Object allocation within a Frame. In the previous chapters of this manual we have described the specific properties of different objects. In addition, there are properties that are common to all objects. Such properties can be accessed using “Format Object” (“Format Picture”, “Format TextBox”, and “Format AutoShape”) from the context menu. 6.1.1. Object’s background and border color. Opacity. When you insert any Object into the Frame, it is placed into the rectangular placeholder. Use “Color” tab on the “Format” screen to specify placeholder’s background color. Note that these parameters are pertaining only to the object’s placeholder, rather than object itself. If objects fit entire rectangular placeholder (for example pictures), it is appropriate to specify placeholder’s background color only when pictures contain transparent areas. Exceptions: AutoShapes Objects, where changes to placeholder’s background and border color apply to the AutoShapes directly. On the same “Color” tab move “Transparency” slider to modify opacity of the object’s placeholder as well as opacity of the objects itself. 219
  • 220. 6.1.2. Sizing and Scaling. The simplest method to change the size of the object is to click and drag the sizing handle inside of the editor window. The size of the object’s placeholder will change evidently. However, for precise sizing use “Format Object” item from the context menu. Use “Size” tab on the “Format” screen to specify size of the object’s rectangular placeholder. Depending on the object type, there are three variants of object allocation within the Rectangular Placeholder: • Object fills up all available space inside the placeholder. • Object will resize its width to fit the Rectangular Placeholder and automatically adjust its height size to fit content (for example, depending on the amount of the text). • Object will not change its size despite the placeholder’s size modifications (for example, some buttons are fixed-size). You can also change the size using relative values of the scale parameters in proportion or by length or height only. 6.1.3. Rotating Object Any object in the learning module can be entirely rotated by any angle. LIMITATION: Object rotating can be correctly displayed only using Internet Explorer – in any other browser object will not be rotated. Use mouse to grab rotating (green color) handle and rotate the object right inside of the editor window. However, for specific angle settings use “Format Object” item from the context menu. Use “Size” tab on the “Format” screen to specify precise rotating angle. 220
  • 221. IMPORTANT! The Browser’s capabilities are used for object rotating, when displaying the learning Module. Due to some limitations of the browser rotating capability the quality of the rotated object can be affected. 6.1.4. Object position within a Frame and permission to move object. Use “Position” tab on the “Format” screen to set the initial position for the top left corner of the Object placeholder within frame. 221
  • 222. The term “initial” is used intentionally, because ultimately you can make object to be dragged by the mouse when checking mark “Can be dragged by mouse” on the same tab – in this case, learner can drag specified object within a frame. LIMITATION: The Object that can be dragged cannot be moved by MOVE-START action 6.1.5. Modifying common settings for the group of the objects. If you select group of objects on the frame, you can modify common settings for the entire group. In the opened “Format” dialog screen the only filled in fields are those that have identical parameter values pertaining to all objects Otherwise, in case fields are empty, it means that parameter values for selected objects are different or not defined. 6.1.6. Aligning Objects Two or more Objects on the Slide can be aligned relative to each other using toolbar buttons. Horizontal Alignment Align Left. This button aligns the selected objects horizontally, relative to the border of the left most object from the selection Align Center. This button aligns vertical centerlines of the selected objects, based on the centerline of the widest object from the selection. Align Right. This button aligns the selected objects horizontally, relative to the border of the right most object from the selection. Vertical Alignment Align Top. This button aligns the selected objects vertically, relative to the border of the top most object from the selection. Align Middle. This button aligns horizontal centerlines of the selected objects, based on the centerline of the highest object from the selection. Align Bottom. This button aligns the selected objects vertically, relative to the border of the lowest object from the selection. 6.1.7. Distributing Objects evenly Three or more Objects on the Slide can be evenly distributed using toolbar buttons. Distribute Horizontally. This button distributes the selected objects evenly between the left and right outermost objects from the selection. Distribute Vertically. This button distributes the selected objects evenly between the top and bottom outermost objects from the selection. NOTE: In fact, Objects placeholders are distributed, therefore some inaccuracy may occur if Object does not fills up all available space inside the placeholder. 222
  • 223. 6.1.8. Changing Objects Z-Order Objects within a Slide appear sequentially. It is very illustrative in case objects are positioned using cascading (see picture below). The newly created objects displayed first, therefore they are covered by objects, which have been created later. To modify the sequence of the objects (Z-Order), use the context menu Order or one of the toolbar buttons: Bring to Front. Selected object will be placed on the top of all other Objects. Send to Back. Selected Object will be placed beneath any other Object. Bring Forward. Selected Object will be moved one step up. Send Backward. Selected Object will be moved one step down. 223
  • 224. 6.2. Effects. Controlling display time. 6.2.1. Objects display time. Timeline Panel. For the objects on the Slide it is possible to define the start time for displaying the object and also, the duration of the objects display. Moreover, it is possible to specify that object should be displayed only when initiated by certain event. To modify object display start time and duration of the object display select Format… item from the object context menu. “Format” dialog screen opens up. On the “Display” tab of the “Format” window you can define the following parameters: • Object display mode You can choose one out of four options: o None – object will not be displayed at all. This mode is used when object needs to be displayed only upon certain action from the user. o Rest of Frame – object will be shown from the moment display was turned on, up until transition to the next Frame within the same Slide (or to another Slide, in case current Frame is the last one or the only one on the Slide). o Rest of the Slide - object will be shown from the moment display was turned on, up until transition to the next Slide o Specified time – object will be shown from the moment display was turned on until specified time. • Appear after. Defines delay of the object display start time relative to the Frame display start time. Besides explicitly specifying object’s display time, there is also a possibility to use visual controls on the “Timeline” panel. 224
  • 225. Select View – Timeline to open “Timeline” panel. On the top portion of the module’s window “Timeline” panel opens up. On the panel there is a timetable containing all objects of the current Frame. The thin grey colored vertical line represents time limit for the Frame display end time. In case Slide consists of several Frames, at this particular time transition to the next Frame occurs. Frame display time can be modified by dragging grey colored vertical line to the left or to the right along the time scale. Stripe lines with object’s identifiers in the “Frame timing” panel represent the time duration of the object display. Left boundary of the stripe line represents object display start time. Right boundary of the stripe line represents the time when object will disappear. You can change object display start time and duration of the object display by dragging (using mouse) the borders of the stripe lines or the stripe line itself. In case the object display mode is set to “Rest of the Slide” stripe line ends with small grey triangle outside time limit of current Frame. Stripe lines with mouse cursors on it represent the time duration of the cursors movement. The empty spots on the stripe lines represent time during which the cursor remains still. IMPORTANT! In case “Display Click” setting is specified in the cursor’s properties, you should define the pause before the next cursor move or before Frame display end time is not less than 0.7 seconds. 6.2.2. Object entry and exit effects By default objects are entirely displayed on the frame. However, to make the learning process even more interactive, specify effects at display. Use “Display” tab on the “Format” screen to specify object entry transition. The CourseLab (and consequently the CourseLab player) contains 24 options of built-in entry transitions. LIMITATION: The full set of effects displays correctly only in Internet Explorer browser, in all other browsers the set of effects is limited. In case selected effect is not supported by particular browser CourseLab player will automatically replace such effect with the one supported by current browser. For each effect out of all (entry or exit) specify duration in seconds. 225
  • 226. Important to remember, that: • Unlike the time of entry effect execution, which is included into the time of object execution, the time of exit effect is not included into the time of object execution, thus such effect will be carried out in “overtime”. • In fact, effects as well as other common settings are applicable to the object’s placeholder. Therefore, if placeholder’s size is much bigger than size of actual object, then effect execution against an empty placeholder space might take some extra time. • Effects can be used not only at the time of object appearance, but also, at object display (or closing) initiated by DISPLAY action. 6.3. Binding sounds to Objects In the learning Module created by the CourseLab you can bind audio files with any object. Use “Sound” tab on the “Format” dialog screen, select audio file to be bound with the object (file will be automatically copied into the “Images” folder of current learning Module). 226
  • 227. By default, sound starts playing right after the object appears on the frame. This feature can be turned off by marking “Disallow autoplay” check box. In this case audio file will be bound to the object, however for playing the sound special action “SOUND” should be used. The following audio formats can be used: Adobe Flash (*.swf), or any format supported by Windows Media Player (*.wav, *.wma, *.mp3 and so on). IMPORTANT! When using audio files, make sure to turn ON the feature under (“Module menu – Runtime Settings”), which checks whether or not system has required component for playing specific audio formats. 6.4. Object Properties Object Properties are parameters of object, which can be used in actions and text substitution. 6.4.1. Common Object Properties Common Object Properties are properties that belong to every CourseLab object, and can be used in actions and in text substitutions (OBJ_ID below means current object ID): Property Returns Syntax x Returns X coordinate of top-left corner of object's position on the $OBJ_ID.x Frame. For moving object it is always start position, defined in Edit mode. y Returns Y coordinate of top-left corner of object's position on the $OBJ_ID.y Frame. For moving object it is always start position, defined in Edit mode. w Returns width of the object in pixels. $OBJ_ID.w 227
  • 228. h Returns width of the object in pixels. $OBJ_ID.h 6.4.2. Specific Object Properties Specific Object Properties are parameters of object, which can be used for actions and text substitutions. Depending on the type of the object there could be different set of specific properties (or none). Read corresponding object's topic to find which properties are available. 228
  • 229. 7. Multiframe animation At first, the Slide contains only the single Frame. It is possible to achieve animation effect by creating the sequence of the Frames with predefined duration of playback assigned to each Frame. 7.1. Using Frames Use “Frames” panel for managing the Frames on the Slide. To open “Frames” panel, select View – Frames. In the bottom part of the Module window the “Frames” panel opens up. Add as many frames as necessary. Make appropriate changes to each of them to reflect animation sequence. 7.2. Frame display time Each individual Frame has its own display time. To modify display time in the “Frames” panel select Advance… item from the frame’s context menu. “Advance” dialog screen opens up. 229
  • 230. Define display time in seconds. IMPORTANT! Specified Frame’s display time has a higher priority over the display time of the objects within the same Frame – in case this time is less than the display time of some objects, then such objects will not be displayed at all. Specify method of transition to the next Frame – “Advance” setting. By default, transition to the next Frame takes place upon expiration of the frame’s display time (setting “Immediate”) Alternative setting is “Wait for Action” – it means stopping upon finishing frame’s display. In this case, creation of action, which will trigger transition to the next Frame, will be of your responsibility. 230
  • 231. 8. Actions and Events 8.1. “Event – Action” Mechanism All interactions between objects within learning modules created by CourseLab are based/built on “Event – Action” mechanism. Event is a signal originated either by the object or by the course player at the certain time. Generally, events are generated at the moment of changing the state of the object (for example, at the moment of object appearance) otherwise events are generated externally (for example, by mouse click within the object). Events are used for triggering the actions when composing relations inside the module. Actions are predefined changes of the object state and/or module variables, which are used for composing complex object behavior. The Event trigger could be either Frame or Slide or one of the objects on the Frame. In first case all events are generated by CourseLab player, in the second case the common events for all objects are generated by the CourseLab player and all object specific events are generated directly in the object’s code. For illustration purposes and to better understand “Event – Action” mechanism let us review the following example: Picture for yourself a street with pedestrian crosswalk equipped with tow traffic lights, one for pedestrians, and another one for vehicles. At the red signal of the traffic light for vehicles the traffic stops, and starts again when red signal switches its color to green. Respectively, the pedestrians start crossing the crosswalk on the green signal and stop at red. In the example described above in the event of “red signal of the traffic light for vehicles” “Car” type of objects performed action “Stop”; and alternatively in the event of “green signal of the traffic light for vehicles” “Car” type of objects performed action “Start”. “Pedestrians” type of objects performs similar actions but using events of its own traffic light. The source for the events in both cases is two traffic lights. 8.2. Events generated by the CourseLab Player 8.2.1. Slide and Frame Events Each Slide and Frame of the Learning Module is generating the following two events: 231
  • 232. “beforedisplay” event arises at the moment when all objects of the current Frame are fully loaded, right before displaying the first object from the list (remember, that even in case all objects should be displayed simultaneously, practically the first object to be displayed is the one which is located underneath of all other objects). Even though both Slide’s “beforedisplay” events and Slide’s first Frame “beforedisplay” events occur virtually simultaneously, the order of triggering is as follows: The Slide’s “beforedisplay” event will occur first, and next, the Frame’s “beforedisplay” event will follow. • “afterdisplay” event occurs at the moment of finishing display of the last object from the list on the current Frame. Please note, that “afterdisplay” event indicates that all objects intended for automatic display have been displayed and this event has no relation with transition to the next Frame or Slide. Even though “afterdisplay” events for the last Frame and Slide occur virtually simultaneously, the order of triggering is as follows: The Frame’s “afterdisplay” event will occur first, and next, the Slide’s “DISPLAY END” event will follow. Please note that in the most common case scenario when Slide contains only one Frame, the “beforedisplay” and “afterdisplay” events occur virtually simultaneously. 8.2.2. Events common to all objects Any object located on the Frame can be source for the following events: • “onclick” event is generated by the user at the moment of left mouse click directly within an object. • “ondblclick” event is generated at the moment of mouse double-click directly within an object. The pause between the clicks which indicates whether this is double-click rather than two single clicks precisely corresponds to the mouse properties defined under the operating system settings on the user’s computer. • “onlmousedown” event is generated at the moment when left mouse button is pressed down within an object. 232
  • 233. “onlmouseup” event is generated at the moment when pressed left mouse button is released within an object.. • “onrmousedown” event is generated at the moment when right mouse button is pressed down within an object. • “onrmouseup” event is generated at the moment when pressed right mouse button is released within an object.. • “onmouseover” event is generated at the moment when mouse cursor reaches the outside border of the object, i.e. at the object’s “Entry” point. • “onmouseout” event is generated at the moment when mouse cursor reaches the inside border of the object, i.e. at the object’s “Exit” point. • “ondrop” event is generated at the moment when the dragged object is dropped. It is important to understand, that in case one object is dragged and dropped over another object, the second (target) object would be the source of generated event. • “beforedisplay” event is generated right before displaying the current object • “afterdisplay” event is generated at the moment of finishing object display (after complete finishing effect execution, in case the transition effect has been used at display) 8.3. Object Custom Events Besides general events, which are common to all objects, there is a set of objects (usually these are pretty complex objects, for example, questions), which can generate custom events (specific to this Object). For example, “Question” type of objects can generate the following events: On Success, On Failure, On Attempts Limit, and other events specific to the test questions. However, when it comes to managing these events are absolutely similar to any other events. Objects custom events are described in the corresponding sections under the “Object”. 8.4. Actions To create actions you can either employ built-in actions (which are listed in the Action Panel), or use JavaScript if you are familiar with this language. 8.4.1. Variables and object properties in action parameters If the action parameter is the plain text string or number (i.e. not an Object ID, Slide ID or time), then it can contain CourseLab variable values and/or other object’s property values. Syntax for variables: #var_name (where var_name is the name of variable and # means that variable value should be used). Syntax for properties: $OBJ_ID.property (where OBJ_ID is object ID, property is property name and $ means that property value should be used). Note, that if corresponding variable or property does not exist, then the string will remain intact! 8.4.2. Built-in actions Actions vary depending on the target they imply to; they are classified as execution actions (in fact, executing some actions against the objects) and service actions (intended for managing execution of other actions or assigning variables). 233
  • 234. Some of the service actions can have dependant actions, i.e. execution of such actions depends on the execution results of the given service action. Dependant actions in the sequence of actions are distinguished by right indent with regards to the parent action. 8.4.2.1. Execution actions EXTERNAL URL EXTERNAL URL action enables opening resource external to the Learning Module in the new Browser Window. EXTERNAL URL action has a single parameter, which is URL for opening in the new Window. URL should be specified with respect to the internet addressing rules, specifying the protocol, for example: http://www.courselab.com/ . RETURN Action RETURN performs transition to the Slide where action CALL was previously executed. It does not have any parameters. ROTATE - START ROTATE - START action initiates object rotating. ROTATE - START action has three parameters: • Object ID is the identifier of the object which will be rotated. Object ID can be either selected from the “Select Object” dialog (press button next to the field to open this dialog), or inserted as a text input (sometimes this approach is more convenient). • Angle is a numerical field, which indicates the angle and direction in degrees (input items can only be digits; no special characters are allowed). The positive value refers to rotating clockwise; alternatively the value with “minus” symbol (negative) refers to rotating counter-clockwise. Actually, you can rotate the object more than one full turn, specifying angle parameter of more than 360 degrees. • Duration – numeric field, which defines time of rotation in seconds. Zero value corresponds to the instant rotation of the object. Limitations: • Objects rotation is supported only by Internet Explorer Browsers, rotation is not supported by other Browsers. • The object, which can be dragged by mouse, can not be rotated. For this type of objects this action will be ignored. ROTATE - STOP 234
  • 235. ROTATE - STOP action discontinues object rotating. ROTATE STOP action has two parameters: • Object ID is the identifier of the object which will be rotated. Object ID can be either selected from the “Select Object” dialog (press button next to the field to open this dialog), or inserted as a text input (sometimes this approach is more convenient). • All Objects is a field with «Yes/NO» value options. In case “Yes” is selected, rotating of all currently rotating objects will be interrupted; the value of the Object ID parameter will be ignored. In case “No” is selected, only rotating of the object specified in Object ID parameter will be interrupted. Limitations: • Objects rotation is supported only by Internet Explorer Browsers, rotation is not supported by other Browsers. • The object, which can be dragged by mouse, can not be rotated. For this type of objects this action will be ignored. CALL CALL action initiates transition to the specified Frame of any Slide. CALL action has two parameters: • Frame is the identifier of the Frame where transition will be performed to. Frame ID can be either selected from the “Select Slide and Frame” dialog (press button next to the field to open this dialog), or inserted as a text input (sometimes this approach is more convenient). Note that this parameter is valid only if Option parameter is set to “Specified Frame”. • Option parameter determines the Frame where transition will be performed to. In case “Specified Frame” (default value) is selected, transition will be performed to the Frame specified in Frame parameter. In case any other value (“Next Frame”, “Next Slide”, “Previous Frame”, “Previous Slide”) is selected, Frame parameter will be ignored. During execution of the CALL action, identifier of the current Slide remains in memory as a parameter for the RETURN action. MOVE - START MOVE - START action initiates moving of the object within a frame. There are five parameters: • Object ID is the identifier of the object, which will be moved. Object ID can be either selected from the “Select Object” dialog (press button next to the field to open this dialog), or inserted as a text input (sometimes this approach is more convenient). • X – is a numerical field, which defines Object’s horizontal shift in pixels, depending on the Additive parameter this value can be either absolute (i.e. counted off frame’s top left corner), or relative to the current value. Inserted value can be located within a Frame as well as outside the Frame (in this case object will be moved outside the Frame and will become invisible). 235
  • 236. Y – is a numerical field, which defines Object’s vertical shift in pixels, depending on the Additive parameter this value can be either absolute (i.e. counted off frame’s top left corner), or relative to the current value. Inserted value can be located within a Frame as well as outside the Frame (in this case object will be moved outside the Frame and will become invisible). • Additive – is a field with «Add/Replace» value options. In case “Add” is selected, inserted X and Y shifts will be added to the current X and Y coordinates (i.e. the object will be moved with regards to added coordinates relative to the object’s current position). In case “Replace” is selected, specified X and Y shifts define the absolute coordinates of the point where the object will be moved. • Duration – is a numeric field which defines time in seconds of object relocation. Zero value corresponds to instant object relocation. Limitation: The object, which can be dragged by mouse, can not be moved. For this type of objects this action will be ignored. MOVE - STOP MOVE - STOP action interrupts movement of the selected object or all currently moving objects. MOVE - STOP action has the following two parameters: • Object ID is the identifier of the object, which movement needs to be interrupted. Object ID can be either selected from the “Select Object” dialog (press button next to the field to open this dialog), or inserted as a text input (sometimes this approach is more convenient to use).In case movement of all objects need to be interrupted (please see “All Objects” parameter below) input value for Object field is ignored (and it may be left blank). • All Objects is a field with «Yes/NO» value options. In case “Yes” is selected, movements of all currently moving objects will be interrupted; input value for Object parameter will be ignored. In case “No” is selected, only movement of the Object specified in the “Object” parameter will be cancelled. SOUND SOUND action either initiates or stops playback of the audio file. Sound action has three parameters: • Object ID is the identifier of the object with associated audio file, which playback needs to be either started, or stopped (binding audio file to the object described in the “Objects” section). In case “File” parameter is not empty, input value for this field is ignored (and it may be left blank) and action will be performed against the file specified in the “File” parameter instead of the object. • Employ “File” parameter to specify path to the audio file, which playback needs to be either started or stopped. Use “Select File” dialog (press button next to the field to open 236
  • 237. this dialog) to specify audio file for playback and it will be automatically copied into the “Images” folder of the Module. Audio file can be in Macromedia Flash Player (*.swf) format or any other format supported by Windows Media Player (*.mp3, *.wav, *.wma, and others). In case “File” parameter is not empty, input value for this field will have higher priority than value of the “Object” parameter, thus action will be performed against the file specified in the “File” parameter instead of the Object. The value of the “Object” parameter will be ignored. • Action parameter is a field with «Start/Stop» value options. In case “Start” is selected, selected audio file (explicitly specified or bound with the Object) will start playing. “Stop” value will stop playback of the selected audio file. IMPORTANT! For playing different audio formats, remember to turn on the feature, which checks whether or not required software has been installed on the target machine before loading the learning Module (menu “Module – Runtime Settings – Checks”). METHOD Method action enables launching execution of methods – actions built into the Object However, it should be taken into consideration that not all types of objects have built-in Methods (Usually, only complex types of objects like “Agent” have built-in methods). There are two steps in specifying parameter for the “Method” action. At the first step, only the following two parameters are accessible, and they should be specified strictly in the following order: • Object ID is the identifier of the object, which method should be launched. • Method, which should be launched. Further, in case the selected method has associated input parameters additional entry fields will appear for inserting method’s parameters. NAVIGATION Navigation action enables turning ON/OFF capability for transition to another Slides of the Module. For example, the necessity to turn off the transition capability may arise if you wish to allow user to move to the next Slide only after he/she completes the appointed tasks. Navigation action has two parameters: • Navigation Objects parameter determines the set of navigation objects, which need to be turned ON/OFF. • Action parameter is a field with «Allow/Restrict» value options. GOTO GOTO action initiates transition to the specified Frame of any Slide. GOTO action has two parameters: • Frame is the identifier of the Frame where transition will be performed to. Frame ID can be either selected from the “Select Slide and Frame” dialog (press button next to the field to open this dialog), or inserted as a text input (sometimes this approach is more 237
  • 238. convenient). Note that this parameter is valid only if Option parameter is set to “Specified Frame”. • Option parameter determines the Frame where transition will be performed to. In case “Specified Frame” (default value) is selected, transition will be performed to the Frame specified in Frame parameter. In case any other value (“Next Frame”, “Next Slide”, “Previous Frame”, “Previous Slide”) is selected, Frame parameter will be ignored. Unlike the similar CALL action, identifier of the current Slide does not remain in memory. DISPLAY Display action enables turning ON/OFF object display. This is the most frequently used action. It has four parameters: • Object ID is the identifier of the object, which must be either displayed, or hidden. • Display parameter is the field with «Show/Hide» value options. • Effect parameter is the field where you can select effect that will be used for this action. In case “Object” value is selected, then effect type will be read from Object’s properties. • Duration is a numeric field which defines effect time in seconds. MSGBOX MSGBOX action enables display of the alert message for the user with text specified in the single “Text” parameter for this action. When necessary, you can use variable #var_name for insertion into the text (please refer to VARIABLE section). In case the variable with that specific name is found, variable’s value will replace variable’s name; if not - no changes will occur. 8.4.2.2. Service Actions IF ... ELSE Conditional action. Conditional action by itself does not perform any noticeable changes to the Frame, it is rather intended for managing the execution of other actions. This action enables launching of different dependant actions (or sequences of actions) with regards to the condition being evaluated. Condition is the only parameter for this action. Condition can be any conditional expression, which results to true or false Boolean values (usually comparisons). If condition is satisfied (value is true), the dependant actions will be executed. NOTE: Conditions are evaluated using JavaScript, therefore Javascript conditional operators should be used. In case alternatives should be used when conditional expression is not satisfied (value is false), ELSE action can be added as a dependant action to the IF action, and alternative sequence of actions dependant to the ELSE action is inserted. 238
  • 239. DELAY DELAY action that is inserted into the sequence of actions will interrupt actions execution either for explicitly specified time, or until the next action performed by the user. There are two parameters for the DELAY action: • Duration parameter defines delay time in seconds for interrupting the sequence of actions. In case parameter “Wait for action” is set to “Yes”, then “Delay” parameter will be ignored. • Infinite parameter is a field with ”Yes/No“ value options. In case “Yes” is selected, sequence of actions will be interrupted indefinitely, until some action from the user is performed. Duration parameter in this case will be ignored. In case “No” is selected, the sequence of actions will be interrupted for the time specified in the Duration field. VARIABLE Variable action defines variable and its value, or, in case variable with specified name already exists, variable’s value will be changed. There are three parameters: • Name parameter defines variable name, which can be further used in expressions. Important: variable name must contain only Latin alphabet letters and numbers, and must not start with a digit. • Value parameter defines initial variable value. The Value parameter could be either text or number. • Scope parameter is a field with «Current Slide/Entire Module» value options. In case “Current Slide” option is selected, variable will be accessible only within currently selected Slide; upon transition to any other Slide this variable will be discarded. In case “Entire Module” option is selected, variable is accessible for all the Slides within a Module. To modify existing variable’s value, use the same “Variable” action, in this case in the “Name” field specify name of existing variable. Variable’s value may be used in various expressions (generally, in the conditional statements for the IF action). To insert variable value into expression use “#” prefix symbol in front of the variable name. For example, if variable name is var_name, then #var_name should be used for inserting variable value into the expression. CHECKHIT This action is used for verifying the particular Object that was dropped onto the target Object. Typically, this action is triggered by ondrop event generated by object-target. The only parameter for this action is: • Object ID is the identifier of the object being dragged, which is to be verified with regards to compliance. In case identifier of the object being dragged is identical to the specified one, sequence of actions under the current action will be executed. 239
  • 240. SEQUENTIALLY SEQUENTIALLY action enables launching of dependant actions in strict sequential order, i.e. each next action will be launched only upon completion of the previous one, unlike the usual routine, where actions are launched in predefined order; however the previous action may not even finished. TIMER ”Timer” action is used for delayed launching of dependant actions. Duration is the only parameter, and it defines delay time in seconds. FOR “FOR” action is used for executing dependant actions specified number of times. There are three parameters: • “From” is a starting value for the cycle counter • “To” is a stopping value for the cycle counter • “Step” parameter defines iteration step for the cycle counter. The variable used for the cycle counter has a fixed name cc (shortcut for Cycle Counter) and is accessible using #cc (please refer to the VARIABLE section). 8.4.2.3. Using JavaScript If you are familiar with JavaScript programming language you can use JavaScript code by two ways: 8.4.2.3.1. Action JAVASCRIPT Action JAVASCRIPT enables execution of JavaScript code. This action has single parameter – JavaScript text field, which contains submitted JavaScript code. However, you can use only inline code here (functions are not supported in this action, please read next section). Important! Remember, it is your responsibility to verify the correctness of JavaScript code you create. 8.4.2.3.2. Including JavaScript in module.js files Every Module has its own module.js file which can be used for inserting custom JavaScript code, including custom functions, which can be addressed from JAVASCRIPT actions. File module.js is located in the Module folder and can be edited using Notepad or any suitable programming tool. Important! Remember, it is your responsibility to verify the correctness of JavaScript code you create. 8.4.2.4. Actions with scores and statuses SET SCORE 240
  • 241. SET_SCORE action changes score for specified objective. It has 4 parameters: • Objective is the identifier of the objective, the score of which will be modified as a result of execution of SET SCORE action. • Source – text field, which specifies the source of the current score modification. This value is used for further score modification. For example, it can contain ID of some two- step task, every step of which has different scores. In this case Source parameter of SET SCORE action for every step must be the same (because both steps are parts of one task). • Add – indicates on how the value of Score parameter will be used for specified source. This parameter is a field with “Add/Replace” value options. In first case, specified score will be added to already existing in the given objective score from specified source. In second case, the score value from the specified source will be replaced with the new one. • Score – numeric field for assigning value to the score. SET COMPLETION STATUS SET COMPLETION STATUS action changes Completion Status for the specified objective. It has two parameters: • Objective is the identifier of the objective, Completion Status of which will be changed as a result of action execution. • Status parameter represents the value assigned to Objective’s Completion Status. The Status can have one of the following values: o Unknown – No information on completion. o Not Attempted – Completion of the objective is not started yet. o Incomplete – Completion of the objective is started, but it is not finished yet. o Complete – Completion of the objective is finished. Upon launching of Learning Module the Completion Status for all objectives is set to “Unknown”. SET SUCCESS STATUS SET SUCCESS STATUS action changes Success Status for the specified objective. It has two parameters: • Objective is the identifier of the objective, Success Status of which will be changed as a result of action execution. • Status parameter represents the value assigned to Objective’s Success Status. The Status can have one of the following values: o Unknown o Failed o Passed Upon launching of Learning Module the Success Status for all objectives is set to “Unknown”. IF SUCCESS STATUS 241
  • 242. IF SUCCESS STATUS action executes set of dependant actions according to the Success Status for the specified objective. It has two parameters: • Objective is the identifier of the objective, Success Status of which must be verified. • Status parameter represents the value, which will be used for verifying correspondence of actual objective’s Success Status. The Status can have one of the following values: o Unknown o Failed o Passed 242
  • 243. 9. Scores Scores in Learning Modules created with CourseLab are based on using objectives. 9.1. Objectives Objective is a special parameter for evaluating of Learning Module completion. There might be one or several objectives in the single Module. Technically, there is no limitation on number of learning objectives; however, such limitations can be introduced when using certain International standards of data transfer protocols (for example, in SCORM 1.2 the number of objectives can not exceed 100). Each objective has a Score, Success Status and Completion Status. Success Status can have one of the following values: • Unknown • Failed (objective is not accomplished) • Passed (objective is accomplished) Completion Status can have one of the following values: • Unknown • Not Attempted (completion of the objective is not started yet). • Incomplete (completion of the objective is started, but it is not finished yet) • Complete (completion of the objective is finished). One of the objectives for the Module must have defined setting “Module objective”. Module translates results of completion of this objective to the Learning Management Systems as a result of completion for the entire Module. By default, such objective is named “total”. During Module execution the properties of the objectives change either by employing special actions (please refer to 8.4.1.4. Actions with scores and statuses), or by employing actions built- in into the complex objects (for example, “Question” objects record score into the defined objective by itself). To add new objective: • Select Module – Runtime Settings… • In the opened “Runtime Settings” dialog screen go to the “Objectives” tab. • On the “Objectives” tab press “Add” button. • Use “Objective” dialog screen to specify objective’s settings. 243
  • 244. 9.2. Rules The Rule presents the set of conditions. If conditions are satisfied the status of indicated objective will change. Using Rules allows transferring control regarding both Success and Completion Statuses to the runtime player, i.e. statuses will be changed automatically. To add Rule: • Select Module – Runtime Settings… • In the opened “Runtime Settings” dialog screen go to the “Rules” page. • On the “Rules” tab press “Add” button. For each Rule specify the following: • Identifier of the objective, which status will be changed due to the Rule execution. • Success Status for specified objective (in case Rule must change it). • Completion Status for specified objective (in case Rule must change it). • Conditions. Each condition defines one of the following checks: o Slides Visited. Condition is satisfied if during Module execution all the Slides in sequence, including the ones with defined identifiers were viewed by the student. o Objective Score. Condition is satisfied if value of the actual objective’s score for the defined condition is for example greater or equal to the specified value. For comparison of specified score with actual score, the following operators are employed: <, >, =, <=, >=, and <>. o Objective Success. Condition is satisfied if actual value of the Objective Success Status corresponds to the specified one. o Objective Completion. Condition is satisfied if actual value of the Objective Completion Status corresponds to the specified one. • The logical expression among the conditions. If conditions are satisfied, Rule will be executed. The different logical conditions are connected to each other by following logical operators: AND, OR, XOR, and NOT. To change logical operation, select desired operation from the list and press “Operation” button. The logical operators can be grouped by using round parentheses. Select conditions from the list and press “Group” button to add parentheses. Select conditions inside of parentheses and press “Ungroup” button to remove parentheses. Rules allow building cascading Rules – when status of the single objective depends on the statuses of other objectives. IMPORTANT! Rules are executed at every slide transition sequentially from first to last in the list. This means that the Rule for “strong” Status must be executed later (for example, Rule for “Complete” Completion Status must be placed after “Incomplete” Rule). 244
  • 245. 10. Screen Capture and creating simulations of other applications Learning courses are created for many purposes. One of the most common objectives is instructing on how to use various software. To facilitate the creation of software simulations CourseLab contains built-in screen capture feature, therefore no additional software needs to be installed. Simulations are recorded directly into the internal format of the editor and can be edited later as usual frames. Internet Browser’s capabilities allow replaying of such animated simulations. No additional components (Flash, Shockwave, Media Player, etc.) are required. 10.1. What needs to be done prior to recording the simulation? Create learning Module (or select an already created one) to insert simulation. Select (or create the new) slide for placing simulation. Editor completely allocates each simulation session into the single slide and automatically adds necessary frames; there is no need to add frames manually. Define the size of the free space on the frame within the slide where simulation will be fitted - this is the requirement for setting up simulation recording. IMPORTANT! CourseLab does not support auto scaling for captured screens. Screen captures will be performed only within user defined area in scale of 1:1. Therefore, make sure that defined size of the captured screen enables recording all required information from the target software. In case of size insufficiency, you might need to change template of the current slide to increase size of recording area. Specify graphic format for storing screen captures. Select “Settings” item from the “Service” menu, on the “Screen Capture” tab specify the desired file format. As long as you do not have any specific restrictions, we recommend using PNG format for screen capturing, since this format performs the best in terms of quality/size of the saved files. Even though you can correct results later on, you should determine screen capturing scenario beforehand, in order to avoid mistakes. 10.2. Screen Capture Wizard While on the slide, which is to be used for recording the simulation, select “Capture Screens” item from the “Tools” menu. Screen Capture Wizard opens up. From the drop-down menu select program to record the simulation from. Mark “Capture Cursor” check box if you need to record mouse’s clicks and movements. Clicks and movements will be captured automatically, once the recording starts. On the next Wizard’s screen specify position for the top left corner of the area for placing simulations within a Frame. By default, position of top left corner of the area for recording simulations within a frame is equal to top left corner of the frame (position 0,0), however there are instances where it is not acceptable. For example, if there is a title located at the top of the frame, then top left corner of the area for recording should be placed underneath, by adding frame title’s height in pixels into the “Vertical” field. The next window of the Wizard defines location and size of the area on the monitor to be captured. The editor will try to adjust captured application window to the specified size automatically, if possible. 245
  • 246. After specifying these parameters you will come to the Wizard’s last screen before entering screen capture mode. Before starting capture, familiarize yourself with controls available in the capture mode, including capture mode exiting option. 10.3. Modify parameters settings while in capture mode After switching to the capture mode, CourseLab minimizes into the icon on the windows taskbar and red rectangular enclose appears, which limits the area or capturing. As mentioned before, the editor will try to adjust captured application window to the specified area size. However, some programs will not allow doing so. In this case, you can manually adjust screen capture area to fit the target window, or opposite, target window to fit screen capture area. You can modify screen capture area by dragging border or by using context menu of the capture area. Adjust screen capture area to fit the target window. Right click within the red enclose which limits capture area. Select “Adjust Enclose” item from the context menu. Screen capture area will automatically adjust its size to the current window size of the target application. Adjust target window to fit the screen capture area. Right click within the red enclose, which limits capture area. Select “Adjust Window” item from the context menu. Editor will automatically attempt adjusting size of target window to the size of screen capture area. If target program did not allow such change, adjust size manually. Precise sizing of the screen capture area and recording position. Right click within the red enclose, which limits capture area. Select “Size” item from the context menu. In the opened window you can modify numerical values for size and position of the screen capture area. Use another tab of the “Size” screen to modify position of the top left corner of the area within a frame, where capture recording will be inserted. 10.4. Capture Frames Make sure that all desired information is well fitted inside of the screen capture area. Press PrintScrn key, the first frame is captured. Go to the next step in target program, and press PrintScrn one more time. Using PrintScrn continue capturing all the changes that you apply to the target program, until you complete recording based on the desired scenario. IMPORTANT! If you marked “Capture Cursor” check box before entering the capture mode all mouse’s clicks and movements will be recorded automatically. However, remember that mouse click does not automatically capture the screen, do not forget pressing PrintScrn where appropriate. Upon capture scenario is completed, double click CourseLab icon from the taskbar. CourseLab Editor will be restored. 10.5. Special capture mode In addition to capturing the entire window of the target program, you can also record part of the screen capture area to the frame as a separate picture without interrupting capturing flow. It can be useful for example, for drop-down menu imitation (you can save the menu as a separate picture and further use editor’s capabilities for manipulating this picture). 246
  • 247. Press “Shift-PrintScrn” combination to enter the special capture mode. The target program freezes up and in addition to the red you will see the blue enclose frame indicating special capture mode. Modify size of the special capture area by dragging border and press “PrintScrn”. The content within blue area will be captured on the current frame as a separate picture. You can enter or modify identifier name to make it more self-explanatory before saving the picture (remember, that identifier names should contain only Latin alphabet letters, numbers, and underscore character). Use the same technique for “cutting” any number of the pictures from the current captured screen, by sequentially changing size and location of the blue screen capture area and by pressing the “PrintScrn”. After you finish “cutting”, you can go back to the main capture repository by pressing “Shift- PrintScrn”. The blue enclose frame will disappear and captured program will “unfreeze”; also “PrintScrn” button will continue capturing the entire area. 10.6. Editing captured frames So you have your captured screens, and you are back to the CourseLab. All captured frames are present on the Frame Panel. Sometimes, in case “Capture Cursor” mode is “On” the very first frame will be empty, it means that capturing mouse movements took place prior to the first screen capture. You may simply remove this frame. Review all the captured screens. Make sure that all the necessary screens are captured. Repeat capturing if any of the screens are missing The blue tracing lines on the frame are reflections of the mouse movements (they will not be visible when replaying). When required, you can modify location of the mouse clicks (you can drag it) and/or remove unwanted clicks completely, in this case trace of the mouse path will be automatically adjusted. Note, that you can also modify the cursor shape, speed of movements, and time duration for holding down the mouse button. To accomplish these modifications, right click on the cursor image and select “Format Cursor” item from the context menu. However, the captured set of frames is not quite finished and should be considered as “groundwork” for future editing. Most likely, you are going to need to provide additional supporting explanations in a form of balloons or popup windows. From the editor’s point of view, any of the captured frame is treated as typical frame (the only difference is recorded mouse movements; please consider this fact). On any of the captured frames you can insert additional objects from the objects library (balloons, popup, pictures, etc.) For all the captured frames you can use actions, change timeouts and so on, just like with any other typical frames. By default, the replay time for the particular frame is defined by the time spent on mouse movements. However, you can manually change frame display time, if necessary. Right click on the necessary frame and use “Transition” item from the context menu. Specify required timeout for the frame. 247
  • 248. 11. Import Microsoft PowerPoint presentations CourseLab allows importing content of the Microsoft PowerPoint presentations into the Learning Module. To accomplish import, select “Import from PowerPoint” command from the “Tools” menu. “Import from PowerPoint” wizard opens up. Specify path to the MS PowerPoint presentation to be imported and press “Next” button. 248
  • 249. Specify Master-Slide (press “Master” button to select) which will be the base for imported presentation. Pink area on the Wizard’s screen represents imported presentation. Press “Position” button to specify position of imported presentation on the Slide and scaling. You can import comments to Slides if necessary and position it on the Slide the same way as presentation main body (grey area represents comments). Press “Next” button to proceed. 249
  • 250. On the next wizard’s page you can select Slides which will be imported. Hold down Ctrl key to select needed Slides. Press “Next” button and start processing. Depending on the size of presentation, it can take up to several minutes to import presentation. You may want to compress imported images upon import completion (all scaled images will be automatically resized and converted to PNG format if necessary). Press “Finish” to return in editing mode. In general, imported Slides reproduce corresponding PowerPoint slides. You can further modify these Slides, if desired. 250